Autodesk 22505-051400-9000 - AutoCAD Electrical 2008 User Manual Download Page 1302

Page: 1302 / 1304

used panel tags

302

used schematic tags

301

user data

351

edit

351

User-Defined Attribute List dialog

box

1006

user-defined attributes

1005

edit

1005

utilities

zip

vault

vault drawings

1250

advanced

1250

vault projects

1250

advanced

1250

Vendor Menu Selection dialog box 1058
vendor menus

1031

Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box 1058
vendor part numbers

785

vendor selection

1031

verify changes

700

View/Edit Panel Component Connection

Sequence dialog box

1095

WD_AB icon menu

1031

wd_fam.dat

wd_lang1.mdb

703

WD_M block

134

alert

134

defaults

134

insert

134

WD_M blocks

63, 362

new drawings

overrides

362

WD_PNLM block

134

insert

134

WD_SLB

730

wd.env files

29, 70, 77

wddinrl.xls

344

web

705

create pages

705

publishing drawing files

705

WEBLINK assignment

777

What's New

2, 26

wire annotation exception

950

wire annotation exception report

933

wire colors

502

encode

502

information

502

Wire Conduit Routing Data Fields to

Report dialog box

892

wire connection

579

terminals

579

wire connections 914, 979, 1074, 1077,

1150

add

1150

annotations

1077

default

1074

from/to report

914

report format files

979

text

1077

Wire From/To Data Fields to Report dialog

box

876

wire from/to report

914

Wire Jumpers dialog box

397

Wire Label Data Fields to Report dialog

box

891

wire label report

920, 989

format files

989

wire layers

150, 156, 502

add existing

150

change

150, 156

convert

156

create

150

edit

150

setup

150

wire list export

1008

wire markers

467

wire networks

525

edit

525

sequence

525

show

525

wire numbers

96, 484, 492, 501–502,

506–508, 511–514, 516, 519, 521,
525, 1074, 1077

3-phase bus

484

add to footprints

1077

1290 | Index

«
...
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
»

Summary of Contents for 22505-051400-9000 - AutoCAD Electrical 2008

Page 1: ...AutoCAD Electrical 2008 User s Guide February 20 2007 ...

Page 2: ...desk Canada Co in the USA and or Canada and other countries Backburner Discreet Fire Flame Flint Frost Inferno Multi Master Editing River Smoke Sparks Stone Wire All other brand names product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders Third Party Software Credits and Attributions ACIS Copyright 1989 2001 Spatial Corp Copyright 1999 2000 The Apache Software Foundation All rights reserve...

Page 3: ...d Rogue Wave Software Inc promis e is a registered trademark of ECT International Inc GOVERNMENT USE Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12 212 Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights and DFAR 227 7202 Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software as applicable Published By Autodesk Inc 111 Mclnnis Parkway San Rafael CA 94903 U...

Page 4: ...1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ...

Page 5: ... Overview of projects 29 Use recently opened projects 29 Create a new project 31 Add a new drawing to the current project 31 Add existing drawings to the current project 32 Group drawings within a project 34 Change the order of drawings in the project 35 Remove a drawing from the active project 36 Assign a description to each drawing 36 Preview a drawing 37 About collaborative design 50 Create a n...

Page 6: ...f symbol naming conventions 163 Split a tag name into two pieces 172 Use multiple symbol libraries 173 Overview of Hydraulic and P ID symbols 174 Attribute Requirements 177 Schematic Attributes 177 Overview of schematic attributes 177 Non Schematic Attributes 192 Overview of non schematic attributes 192 Overview of parent and stand alone component attributes TAG1 196 Overview of child component at...

Page 7: ...log lists 312 Use the schematic lookup file 316 Insert from panel lists 323 Manipulate Components 330 Manipulate components 330 Annotate ratings attributes 337 Reverse flip components 338 Swap contact states 340 Check coil contact count 340 Follow signals 342 Insert dashed link lines 344 Overview of DIN Rails 344 Edit schematic lookup files 349 Overview of user data records 351 Component Cross Ref...

Page 8: ...ttributes to blocks 431 Chapter 8 Wire Wire Number Tools 433 Overview of wires 434 Insert 3 phase bus wiring 435 Insert wires 437 Trim wires 439 Stretch wires 440 Overview of wire color gauge labels 440 Insert cable markers into wires 443 Insert cable markers 444 Insert multiple cable markers 445 Insert shield symbols 466 Add a second shield to a cable shield represenation 467 Insert in line wire ...

Page 9: ...3 Resequence terminal numbers 578 View terminal wire connections 579 Show terminal internal external connections 580 Mark internal connections 580 Mark external connections 580 Erase connection codes 581 Terminal Strips 581 Create terminal strips 581 Use the terminal strip editor 585 Generate terminal strip tables 624 Terminal Properties Lookup 629 Overview of terminal properties database 629 Chap...

Page 10: ...y 760 Overview of the icon menu file 760 Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs 765 Use catalog tables 766 Catalog table naming conventions 766 Family tables in the default_cat mdb 768 Overview of the catalog database table structure 777 Use the merge utility 781 Catalog Assignment 785 Assign catalog information to components 785 Overview of the LISTBOX_DEF catalog database table 788 Copy catalog assignments...

Page 11: ...ematic wire numbers onto footprints 1074 Add wire information to footprints 1077 Lookup Files 1081 Use the footprint lookup file 1081 Item Numbers Balloons 1087 Assign an item or detail number to a footprint 1087 Nameplates 1091 Insert nameplates 1091 Panel Leveling Sequencing Tools 1093 Remove sequencing assignments 1093 Show sequencing assignments 1093 Swap terminal strip wire text 1095 Chapter ...

Page 12: ...al time error checking 1176 Modify invisible data 1184 Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity 1187 Set up peer to peer component relationships 1188 Create automated pin assignments 1190 Set up AutoCAD Electrical for multiple users 1193 Show source and destination markers on cable wires 1197 Use the PLC Database File Editor 1205 Add your own symbols circuits and commands to the icon menu 1214 Build your ...

Page 13: ...AutoCAD Electrical What s New In this chapter What s New in AutoCAD Electrical 2008 What s New in Previous Releases What s New in 2005 Release What s New in 2006 Release What s New in 2007 Release 1 1 ...

Page 14: ... to create a Unity Pro I O variable file xsy in the Unity Pro XML format from your AutoCAD Electrical drawings The Unity Pro export file is generated from the PLC drawings and their respective PLC symbols For More Information page 270 PLC I O Libraries Enhancements You can quickly create PLC I O drawings by selecting from a library of over 3 000 intelligent PLC I O modules from the industry s most...

Page 15: ...displays the corresponding menu icons in the Symbol Preview window The menu is created by reading the dat file defined in the Project Properties dialog box Symbol Preview window Displays the symbol icons and submenu icons corresponding to the selected menu Clicking an icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined in the dat file insert a component or circuit ...

Page 16: ...ined to force the connection reporting but it is limited to reporting the terminal as a common connection point for only 2 of the 3 field devices The third has to be reported as jumpered to 1 of the other 2 devices Now with the support for secondary direct to terminal sequences the third field device can be sequenced directly to the terminal and the Wire From To report shows all 3 field devices ti...

Page 17: ... Cable Information New tools are available on the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box to create associations separate levels from a multiple level terminal block into separate terminal blocks reverse the left and right wiring information for a terminal and edit terminal block properties such as the number of levels and number of wires per connection The Layout Preview tab of the Terminal Strip Editor...

Page 18: ...be combined is limited to the number of levels defined for the block property Terminal associations can also tie together a set of schematic terminal block symbols to one panel representation of a terminal footprint For More Information page 568 Terminal Properties Database Editor Terminal properties data is now managed based on manufacturer Use the new Terminal Properties Database Editor tool to ...

Page 19: ...s to install on the Manufacturer Contents Selection screen Catalog Content Updates AutoCAD Electrical ships with a manufacturer s catalog database that contains over 350 000 components from the industry s most popular vendors These components provide a full spectrum of input and output devices including switches sensors lights and numerous panel devices such as wireway and panel enclosures Improve...

Page 20: ...on the title bar of the main AutoCAD Electrical window It searches AutoCAD and AutoCAD Electrical Help systems to give you the most relevant information for any query you enter You can filter content and add frequently used content to the Favorites section InfoCenter replaces the Communication Center It provides notifications of software and content updates through a balloon notification mechanism...

Page 21: ...eport Generation X page 13 X page 12 Merge Utility X page 17 X page 13 Autodesk Inventor Professional Integration X page 4 X page 12 Terminal Strip Editor X page 21 X page 13 X page 13 Engineering Design Management X page 7 X page 20 X page 12 Catalog Content Updates X page 14 MDI Aware X page 13 Insert Component Equipment List Tool X page 14 AutoCAD Data Migration X page 14 Convert promis e Drawi...

Page 22: ...raries X page 18 Real time Error Checking X page 18 User Defined Attributes X page 19 Wire Label Report X page 20 New Project Tool X page 20 New Drawing Tool X page 20 Wire Type Selection X page 21 Autodesk Productstream Integration X page 21 Simplified Configuration Settings X page 17 Wire Number Leaders X page 16 Wire Connection Improvements X page 16 Wire Collision Avoidance 10 Chapter 1 AutoCA...

Page 23: ... Icon Menu Wizard Enhancements X page 2 PLC I O Import Export X page 2 Spreadsheet to PLC I O Utility Enhance ments X page 3 Surfable Reports X page 4 Direct Wire Sequencing X page 5 Inserting Spare Terminals X page 6 Multi Level Terminals X page 6 Terminal Jumpers X page 6 Terminal Properties Database Editor X page 7 Pin List Data Management X page 7 Installer Improvements X page 7 64 bit AutoCAD...

Page 24: ...urers This eliminates the need to ever manually add any module information or wait for a new version of AutoCAD Electrical to ship Expanded Catalog Content The standard parts catalog has been expanded to include more than 43 000 components from multiple vendors Merge Catalog Database Utility The Merge Catalog Database utility merges the new catalog database with the customized database already on ...

Page 25: ...tion This maintains custom entries and modifications that you have made to your databases while adding the new database and library information Improved Page Management Use the new Project Manager Enhanced Secondary Window ESW to manage all drawing files in a project You can manage entire projects or make modifications to single drawings using the Project Manager ESW Vault Integration Autodesk Vau...

Page 26: ...gns promis e Data Migration Use the new promis e data migration tools to easily migrate electrical designs from promis e into AutoCAD Electrical Additional PLC I O Libraries The PLC I O libraries have been expanded to include more than 2 000 new PLC I O modules from industry s most popular manufacturers Additional connection devices and panel footprint symbols have also been created and added to t...

Page 27: ...the arrow indicates the plug side wire direction You can change the connector orientation before insertion using the Tab V key or X key on your keyboard New connector editing commands add to the features versatility Scoot existing Scoot feature moves the parametric connector horizontally or vertically relative to the wires that are connected to the connector Scoot also moves the wires and pins alo...

Page 28: ...u can set the wire number placement for all new wires inserted You can use the new Toggle Wire Number In Line tool to switch the wire number between in line and the drawing default above or below the wire If the selected wire number is in line it toggles to above or below the wire based on the default Wire Number Placement setting in the Drawing Properties Wire Numbers dialog box If it starts as a...

Page 29: ...ors to Autodesk Inventor Professional for the automated creation of a 3D harness design Autodesk Inventor Professional users can now pass wire connectivity information to AutoCAD Electrical for the automatic creation of the corresponding 2D schematics Employing the widely used XML language format you can transfer design data back and forth while maintaining structure and organization From the XML ...

Page 30: ...sign errors as they occur You can locate the problem component automatically using the Surf command Identify and clean up problems that might affect an AutoCAD Electrical drawing using the improved Electrical Audit tool This tool displays a report of detected problems for the active project You can save this file for reference or surf the file to view and correct the errors Multiple Wire Bus With ...

Page 31: ...ponent Override tool to set display settings for a specific component that are different than the drawing or use the new Remove Component Override tool to remove component overrides so the cross referencing commands use the settings for the drawing Use the new Hide Unhide Cross Reference tool to change the visibility of cross references In most cases the cross referencing should be visible but the...

Page 32: ... and applying project properties is now easier using the New Project tool In a single dialog box you can define the minimum requirements to create an AutoCAD Electrical project definition file WDP the folder in which the project will be maintained and the settings and options defined within the project The new project automatically becomes the active project New Drawing Command When you are faced ...

Page 33: ... use Autodesk Productstream to manage AutoCAD Electrical bill of materials BOMs by controlling the release and change of a design using the Change Order environment Additional enhancements include Productstream now supports AutoCAD Electrical components quantities catalog numbers and balloon numbers Productstream Explorer supports all Productstream and AutoCAD Electrical data New controls in Produ...

Page 34: ...hile maintaining drawing file versioning The multi user environment in AutoCAD Electrical now provides drawing status indicators and better control of project wide commands when you are logged into Autodesk Vault You can now get previous versions of the drawing or project file 22 Chapter 1 AutoCAD Electrical What s New ...

Page 35: ...trical Help Overview of projects About collaborative design Create a new drawing Change drawing display options Overview of project related files Overview of the project file format Archive a project Work with Multiple Clients Miscellaneous Reference files 2 23 ...

Page 36: ...Support System DSS components AutoCAD Electrical Help and AutoCAD Electrical Launchpad What are ways to gain access to Help You can get help about a command while you are using it From the menu bar select Help Electrical Help Topics to view the AutoCAD Electrical Help home page Help Menu Press F1 At the command prompt press F1 to open the Proced ure topic for the active tool In a dialog box press ...

Page 37: ...the Help system When you start the Help system the first thing you see is the AutoCAD Electrical Help home page This page is designed for new users and accesses the basic Procedure topics For a list of all the Procedure topics you can access the Site Map There is an option to make the Site Map your home page At the top of every Help window is a navigation bar with icons The left most icon is eithe...

Page 38: ...k training visit http www autodesk com training or contact your local Autodesk office The Autodesk Authorized Training Center ATC network delivers Autodesk authorized instructor led training to design professionals who use Autodesk software Autodesk Authorized Training Centers use experienced and knowledgeable instructors More than 1 200 ATC sites are available worldwide to meet your needs for dis...

Page 39: ...to use the Search tab 1 Click Show in the browser toolbar if the tabbed navigation pane is not displayed 2 Click the Search tab 3 Enter text in the search text box and then click List Topics Use quotation marks around the search criteria to search for a string Use an asterisk before or after text as a wildcard 4 Double click a topic or select a topic and then click Display to show the topic 5 You ...

Page 40: ...int the entire Help system in the Contents tab right click on AutoCAD Electrical Help and select Print Select the option to print the selected heading and all subheadings and click OK To find out What s New about AutoCAD Electrical What s New topics describe the new functionality in the most recent AutoCAD Electrical release 1 Click Help AutoCAD Electrical Help In the AutoCAD Electrical Help click...

Page 41: ...roject file Is an ASCII text file with any path and any name followed by the WDP extension Lists the complete path to each wiring diagram drawing included in the project Carries default settings that can be referenced when new drawings are created and added to the project NOTE A project file is not needed if the project consists of a single wiring diagram drawing Project files default to the direc...

Page 42: ...cal is started 2 Active 1 listed as Open 0 not listed in window but available from the Recent Projects dialog box If you adjust this file either manually with a text editor or programmatically see the AutoCAD Electrical API Help you can control what project will be active when AutoCAD Electrical starts up and what other projects will be shown in the Project Manager window Work with projects Use th...

Page 43: ...ecify the an existing project file WDP to use Use the default or click Browse to select a previously defined project definition file 6 Optional Click Descriptions to enter descriptions for the project You can enter up to 12 description lines per page You can also select the checkboxes for the information to be in cluded in reports generated for the project 7 Optional Click OK Properties to modify ...

Page 44: ...rawings 3 In the Select Files to Add dialog box select the drawings to be added to the current project You can select multiple drawings using the Shift or Control keyboard keys NOTE The order in which you select drawings determine how they will be listed in the project drawing list 4 Click Add The drawings are added to end of the project drawing list Copy a project Copy a project file and create c...

Page 45: ...roject drawing list to be copied to the new project Process Selects one or more drawings from the project drawing list to be copied to the new project Reset Moves all selected drawings back to the project drawing list Un select Moves one or more drawings back to the project drawing list by Section sub section Selects drawings by sections and subsections 9 Click OK 10 Enter the directory path where...

Page 46: ...matic_lookup mdb Location codes loc Installation codes inst Ratings defaults wdr Component tagging wdx Spreadsheet PLC I O Utility settings wdi RSLogix import mapping wdf User defined attributes wda Terminal audit filter wdn Work with project drawings Use the Project Manager to access an existing project and modify its associated information Group drawings within a project You can create groups of...

Page 47: ...g box click the Settings page 114 tab 4 In the Sheet Values section enter a section or subsection code for the drawing 5 Click OK Repeat for each drawing you want to group together making sure to assign the same section or subsection code to each Change the order of drawings in the project The order in which drawings appear in the project s drawing list is the order in which AutoCAD Electrical pro...

Page 48: ...n the Project Manager right click the drawing name and se lect Remove The drawing is instantly removed from the project but it is not deleted NOTE You can remove all drawings from a project by right clicking the project name in the Project Manager and selecting Remove Drawings Select the drawings to remove from the Select Drawings to Process dialog box and click OK Assign a description to each dra...

Page 49: ...ing You can preview a drawing from the Project Manager 1 Click the Project Manager tool 2 In the Project Manager select a drawing from the list 3 In the Details pane click Preview An image of the highlighted drawing displays Once selected the preview remains on Each time you highlight another drawing in the project list the display updates with an image of the selected drawing 4 Click Details to r...

Page 50: ...u know the drawing name but you aren t sure what project the drawing is in click Find in the Recent Projects dialog box In the Find Drawing in Recent Projects dialog box enter the name of the drawing wildcards are accepted and click Find Once a list of possible projects is presented select the project name and click Drawing List to see a list of the drawings contained in the project Double click t...

Page 51: ...ect drawing list for the active project New Drawing Project Selection menu You can default to a predefined directory by adding an entry to your env file Exit AutoCAD and open the env file with any generic text editor such as Wordpad Add this line WD_PICKPRJDLG n your directory AutoCAD Electrical default pick proj Opens a different project from a list of recent projects or from a file selection dia...

Page 52: ...the active project New Drawing Refreshes the drawing list inside of the Project Manager Refresh For Vault Checks for changes in external file references and updates the Vault icons in the Project Manager Files that have changed and are currently checked out to you are not up dated Files that are checked out to another user are updated to their current version Files that are checked out to another ...

Page 53: ...isplay the following project editing options Edits the existing project descriptions Displays unlimited lines describ ing the project Descriptions can then be included in report headers and title blocks Descriptions Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or for the entire project drawing set Title Block Update Generates a report that lists project drawing information fro...

Page 54: ...es to plot the project publish to the Web publish to DWF or create a zip file of the project Publish Displays the project s settings and information about the AutoCAD Electrical environment Settings Displays a list of drawing file s that have different settings from the project definition file WDP If all drawing files match the wdp Exception List the dialog box indicates that there are no exceptio...

Page 55: ...roject Reserves and locks the project defini tion file along with the associated Check Out All drawing files listed in the Project Manager If the project definition file is unavailable for check out you can still check out the drawings available for editing Adds the project definition file to the vault and creates a new version of the Check In file Use this if you want to check in only the project...

Page 56: ...s it into your Get Latest Get Latest All working folder Older files are indic ated by the status indicator displaying a red background Project Drawing List Displays the drawings associated with a project You can select multiple drawings from the project list to open close remove apply project defaults or paste properties all at once You cannot select multiple drawings from two or more projects The...

Page 57: ...t to save the drawing to When prompted specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings in the WD_M block definition Removes the selected drawing from the current project Remove Replaces the selected drawing with one that you select from a file selection dialog box Replace Renames the selected drawing directly in the drawing list Rename Assigns edits and removes section ...

Page 58: ...n updated copy if necessary Check Out Checks out the drawing files when the project file is under Vault control you must be logged into the vault Removes the reserva tion lock from the master drawing file The master file is Undo Check Out now available for others to check out Any modifications made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault you must be logged into the vault Retrieves th...

Page 59: ...especially when the local copy is no longer in sync with the master These icons are crucial to the overall understanding of how to work in a vaulted environment Meaning Icon File is not in the vault File is in the vault in a checked in state and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault Also referred to as the Latest Version File is in the vault in a checked in state but the versi...

Page 60: ... the Latest Version This typically happens if the other user did not check changes back into the vault File is checked out to another user and the version you are working on is newer than the file in the vault This typically happens if the user checked in changes to the vault but kept the file checked out Use Refresh from Vault to update to the latest available version File is checked out to anoth...

Page 61: ...TE The wdp extension is not required in the edit box Specifies the location for a project definition file and folder definition If left blank the project definition Location file is created at the WD ENV project location Click Browse to pick a folder where the new project file folder will be created NOTE You cannot have duplicate project names in the same location Creates a folder with the same na...

Page 62: ...then restart the Copy Project command Copies the active project Copy Active Project Selects another project to copy Browse About collaborative design In a collaborative design environment several people can work on a project at the same time The project file WDP lists all the drawings that are part of a project You can use Autodesk Vault with AutoCAD Electrical for drawing management version contr...

Page 63: ...u NOTE You must have all references of a project file downloaded to your working folder to edit the project file View the status of files in a design Vault status icons indicate the status of your local copy of the files as compared against the master copy of those same files in the vault The vault status icons indicate when the local copy is in sync with the master and when it is not Tooltips pro...

Page 64: ...t to the physical location in the working folder When you are ready to check the project back in the mapping tells the vault where to check the files in from Opening a project from the vault checks all files out to the working folder of the Vault user In addition you can open a file in a checked in state as read only The essential rules to remember when working with AutoCAD Electrical Vault ARX ar...

Page 65: ... drawing list for the active project New Drawing Project Selection menu You can default to a predefined directory by adding an entry to your env file Exit AutoCAD and open the env file with any generic text editor such as Wordpad Add this line WD_PICKPRJDLG n your directory AutoCAD Electrical default pick proj Opens a different project from a list of recent projects or from a file selection dialog...

Page 66: ...the active project New Drawing Refreshes the drawing list inside of the Project Manager Refresh For Vault Checks for changes in external file references and updates the Vault icons in the Project Manager Files that have changed and are currently checked out to you are not up dated Files that are checked out to another user are updated to their current version Files that are checked out to another ...

Page 67: ...lay the following project editing options Edits the existing project descriptions Displays unlimited lines describ ing the project Descriptions can then be included in report headers and title blocks Descriptions Automates updating title block information for the active drawing or for the entire project drawing set Title Block Update Generates a report that lists project drawing information from t...

Page 68: ...es to plot the project publish to the Web publish to DWF or create a zip file of the project Publish Displays the project s settings and information about the AutoCAD Electrical environment Settings Displays a list of drawing file s that have different settings from the project definition file WDP If all drawing files match the wdp Exception List the dialog box indicates that there are no exceptio...

Page 69: ...ect Reserves and locks the project defini tion file along with the associated Check Out All drawing files listed in the Project Manager If the project definition file is unavailable for check out you can still check out the drawings available for editing Adds the project definition file to the vault and creates a new version of the Check In file Use this if you want to check in only the project de...

Page 70: ...s it into your Get Latest Get Latest All working folder Older files are indic ated by the status indicator displaying a red background Project Drawing List Displays the drawings associated with a project You can select multiple drawings from the project list to open close remove apply project defaults or paste properties all at once You cannot select multiple drawings from two or more projects The...

Page 71: ...o save the drawing to When prompted specify whether to apply the project default values to the drawing settings in the WD_M block definition Removes the selected drawing from the current project Remove Replaces the selected drawing with one that you select from a file selection dialog box Replace Renames the selected drawing directly in the drawing list Rename Assigns edits and removes section and...

Page 72: ...n updated copy if necessary Check Out Checks out the drawing files when the project file is under Vault control you must be logged into the vault Removes the reserva tion lock from the master drawing file The master file is Undo Check Out now available for others to check out Any modifications made to the local copy are not checked back into the vault you must be logged into the vault Retrieves th...

Page 73: ...ecially when the local copy is no longer in sync with the master These icons are crucial to the overall understanding of how to work in a vaulted environment Meaning Icon File is not in the vault File is in the vault in a checked in state and the version you are working on is the same as in the vault Also referred to as the Latest Version File is in the vault in a checked in state but the version ...

Page 74: ...rred to as the Latest Version This typically happens if the other user did not check changes back into the vault File is checked out to another user and the version you are working on is newer than the file in the vault This typically happens if the user checked in changes to the vault but kept the file checked out Use Refresh from Vault to update to the latest available version File is checked ou...

Page 75: ...eft blank the default ACAD DWT file is used Click Browse to select a template drawing or enter the path and name of a template in the box 5 Select or create the directory where you want to save the drawing 6 Optional Enter descriptions for the drawing You can enter up to 3 description lines for the drawing file The description displays in title block updates custom drawing properties and drawing l...

Page 76: ...of the tree inside the Project Manager and selecting New Drawing or by right clicking on the active project name and selecting New Drawing Drawing File Specifies the file name for the new drawing A file name must be entered to define any of the drawing properties or to create a new drawing Name NOTE The dwg extension is not required in the edit box Specifies the path and filename for an AutoCAD El...

Page 77: ...s in title block Description 1 3 updates and custom drawing properties Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active pro ject by clicking the arrow NOTE Drawing descriptions are disabled when you are modifying the properties of a drawing that is not in a project or if the project file is unavailable for edit IEC Style Designators Specifies IEC default values for the drawing such as...

Page 78: ...used as the replaceable parameter S Sheet Specifies the drawing number value for the drawing settings This value can be used as the replaceable parameter D Drawing Specifies the section value for the drawing file saved in the project definition file wdp This value can be used as the replaceable parameter A Section Specifies the subsection value for the drawing file saved in the project definition ...

Page 79: ...command is invoked AutoCAD Electrical automatically inserts this block at 0 0 Create a new drawing 67 ...

Page 80: ...on or add all of the options by clicking the All button The display option you selected moves to the Current Display Order list To rearrange this list select an option and click Move Up or Move Down To remove an option from the list select the option and click the button 4 Optional Change the character to use between the values in the listing The default separator value is a dash 5 Optional Change...

Page 81: ...your requirements Access On the Project Manager click the Drawing List Display Configuration tool From the Projects menu select Project Project Manager On the Project Manager click the Drawing List Display Configuration tool Lists the values that you can associate to a drawing Display Options Moves the selected display option into or from the Current Display Order To add an option to the list Arro...

Page 82: ...les that AutoCAD Electrical supports These files provide various functions such as keeping a project consistent helping update custom title blocks across a project or providing custom settings for various tools such as the PLC I O module insertion tool Optional AutoCAD Electrical project related files include Database for choosing catalog part number assignments It is also referenced when automati...

Page 83: ... the description edit box on the Insert Edit dialog box If the selected text has one or more characters it is in terpreted as having line breaks so the 2nd and 3rd descrip tion lines fill in as well Component tagging pick list data carried in an external text file accessed when you click External List on the In External component sert Edit dialog box for schematic or panel layouts The data in this...

Page 84: ...ot found then the default FOOTPRINT_LOOKUP MDB file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory search sequence B below Database for schematic components inserted from panel footprints Schematic lookup A file with the same path and name as the project but with a _SCHEMATIC_LOOKUP MDB suffix and extension is searched for first If the file is not found then...

Page 85: ... mount codes for selections found in the Panel Insert Edit Component dialog boxes select Include external list from the location s Project list subdialog box Mount codes A file with the same path and name as the project with a mnt extension is searched for first If the file is not found then the DEFAULT MNT file is searched for in the same directory as the project file and then in the subdirectory...

Page 86: ...oks for the DEFAULT WDN file in the project folder C Documents and Settings username My Documents Acade version AeData Proj The default wdn file contains the terminal number filers GND PE and E These are ignored when checking for du plication and will not be listed in the Electrical Audit report Edit this file with an ASCII text editor such as WordPad Defines the optional mapping of RSLogix codes ...

Page 87: ...ct definition file wdp Maps color and gauge wire descriptions based on wire layers Wire color and gauge labels A file with the same path and name as the project but with a wdw extension is searched for first If the file is not found then the DEFAULT WDW file is searched for in the same directory as the project file If the file is not found then the file is searched for in the subdirectory search s...

Page 88: ...AeData Catalogs 4 Panel footprint library base subdirectory C Program Files x86 autodesk Acade version Libs panel 5 AutoCAD Electrical support C Documents and Settings username Application Data Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical release country code Support AeData 6 AutoCAD Electrical support C Documents and Settings username Application Data Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical release country code Support 7 Aut...

Page 89: ...cade version 8 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options Files Support Files Search Path NOTE If the environment file wd env has setting WD_ACADPATHFIRST uncommented and set to 1 then the last search item the Options paths are searched between steps 1 and 2 above instead of at the very end NOTE If the environment file wd env has setting WD_SUP_ALT uncommented and set to a valid subdirectory path the...

Page 90: ...brary s WD_M dwg block insert When you start a new drawing for the project you want to have this switch turned on so that the special settings of your active project update the values on the inserted WD_M block insert and cause it to match the project s special settings This eliminates the need to go back into a new drawing s properties and adjust the wire tagging format setting to match the drawi...

Page 91: ...stallation Location Tag on 3 mode is on and include Installation Location as a tag prefix Marked with 11 followed by 0 allow entered DESC1 DESC3 to be upper lower case missing or 1 force all entered DESC1 DESC3 values to uppercase DESC case mode Marked with 13 followed by 0 or missing wire tagging normal mode wires combined into one wire number as Wire network mode signment 1 per wire basis mode e...

Page 92: ...fset value 0 or blank or missing normal centering of wire numbers Wire number offset on the wire segment value offset from left or upper end of wire segment Marked with 20 followed by the file name If this altern ative env file does not exist or cannot be found the default wd env file is used Alternate WD ENV Marked with 21 followed by 0 wire number by layer mode is off 1 mode is on and 22 holds t...

Page 93: ... 32 followed by 0 real time error checking mode is off 1 mode is on Real time error checking Marked with 33 to indicate a string of column names used in grid column headers in the Wire Type commands Grid column headers Marked with 34 to suppress the dash if it is the first character of a tag when the Combined installation location component tag mode is on See the 10 entry Suppress dash All remaini...

Page 94: ...1 Edit the env file to point to the zip utility 2 Create an entry for the utility labeled WD_ZIP followed by a comma and then the full path name to the executable zip program For example WD_ZIP c Program Files x86 winzip winzip32 exe NOTE All drawings to be included in the zipped file must be closed prior to running the zip utility This utility can also be accessed from within a number of AutoCAD ...

Page 95: ...or the zip file to create If you want to update a file browse to the zip file Enter zip file name to create update Specifies to include the project database file mdb in the zip file Include project database file Overview of set up for multiple clients You can set up AutoCAD Electrical to deal with multiple clients each with its own title block and library requirements Client specific drawing borde...

Page 96: ...xes and pick options to build the default wdt file Customize labels for title blocks Several title block related dialog boxes in AutoCAD Electrical display generic labels like LINE1 LINE2 and so on You can change these labels so that they match up with the actual link to the client s title block For example in the wdt mapping file you might have linked the AutoCAD Electrical data LINE10 value to t...

Page 97: ...default AutoCAD Electrical symbol library 3 Click OK NOTE Make sure you also update the Panel Footprint Library path Start a project for a client 1 Create and save the AutoCAD Electrical project wdp file to the client s base subdirectory where the client s default wdt and wdtitle wdl files are stored Make sure that the new project also points at the client s symbol library The actual drawings for ...

Page 98: ...pen Specifies the file name of the Catalog Database file to modify MDB file to modify Lists the existing tables found in the file Existing tables Specifies the name of new table to add to the selected catalog database The new blank table inserts with the Add new table default fields defined for example the fields needed for the catalog lookup function Project database table data project drawing fi...

Page 99: ...over previous versions of AutoCAD Electrical The PDS automatically updates the scratch project database without your intervention and without your knowledge If you edit the scratch database with all of the changes you want to write back to your project set there is a chance that the PDS will come in without warning and remove all of these edits to match the current state of the unmodified dwgs bef...

Page 100: ... s up one place in the report Move Up Moves the currently selected line s down one place in the report Move Down Moves the currently selected line s to the top of the report Move to Top Moves the currently selected line s to the bottom of the report Move to Bottom Edit Edits the values of the currently selected line Double click any line to go directly into edit Specifies the drawing name DWGNAM I...

Page 101: ...ocation L field for that drawing can be updated to match IEC_L If you change any of the SH DESC data the Description data held in the project file WDP can be updated to match SH DESC IEC tag mode update If a change to the IEC component tag mode format is detected use this tool to freshen the tag format This makes sure that component tags are displayed per the change Access From the Projects menu s...

Page 102: ...ool to access the Rebuild Project Database tool From the Projects menu select Projects Rebuild Freshen Project Database List Lists the drawings that appear to be out of date with the project s wire connection table You can trigger an update when the dialog box is open or you can defter to auto update when a wire report is run Include wire connection processing Indicates to process wire connections...

Page 103: ...g files were unavailable for editing Access Click the Project Manager tool On the Project Manager click the Project Task List tool or right click the project name and select Task List On the Update from dialog box select Update Select from list of drawings and click OK From the Projects menu select Project Project Manager On the Project Manager click the Project Task List tool or right click the p...

Page 104: ...full write access to the entire list of drawing files previously selected If you gain full access the files are locked out Retry Now by you and other users cannot make any modifications until the project wide command finishes Tasks saves all modifications in a task list to be run at a later time The task list is maintained inside of the Project Task List Task database file project_update mdb Not a...

Page 105: ...ert or copy a circuit Location box changes Find Edit Replace Set Edit Wire Connection Sequence Changing an IEC setting before running a Retag Copy Location Installation Mount Group Copy BOM Block Swap Terminal Strip Editor Insert Schematic from Panel Files unavailable for processing 93 ...

Page 106: ...94 ...

Page 107: ...and Project Properties In this chapter Overview of project and drawing properties Use replaceable parameters Save settings to the project file Create a template drawing Updating theWD_M Block Using Layers 3 95 ...

Page 108: ...awing These settings override the project properties set in the Project Properties dialog box If the drawing is part of a project the project name displays in the dialog box otherwise text displays indicating that the drawing is not part of a project and drawing related edit fields that are saved in the wdp file are disabled You can specify settings for the project or drawing defaults components w...

Page 109: ...tial or line reference based wire numbers Set wire number options such as hidden numbers excluded numbers or displaying numbers on a per wire basis Set up wire number layer options Define wire number placement above below or in line Define wire number leaders Cross References Use this tab to Define the cross reference annotation format Set cross reference options such as suppressing Installation L...

Page 110: ...w components or wire numbers on the drawing Set the tag wire number sort order Define and manage wire and component layers Set project or drawing properties You can specify settings for the project or drawing defaults components wire numbers cross references styles and the drawing format using either the Project Properties or Drawing Properties dialog boxes The steps below are for setting project ...

Page 111: ...on file as a project default Access Click the Project Manager tool In the Project Manager right click the project name and select Properties From the Projects menu select Project Project Manager In the Project Manager right click the project name and select Properties Library and Icon Menu Paths Select which schematic library panel library and icon menus to use To modify existing input fields in t...

Page 112: ...nu from Browse Removes the selected path from the libraries tree structure Remove Moves the selected path up one spot in the libraries tree structure Move Up Moves the selected path down one spot in the libraries tree structure Move Down Brings the default paths from the environment file WD ENV into the list box tree view for all search paths found underneath the highlighted folder Default Catalog...

Page 113: ...e warning is saved in the log file named project_name _error log and is saved in the User subdirectory If a log file already exists the new content is added to the same file A blank line separates one error record from another Sets the default wire numbering and component tag sort order for the project Tag Wire Number Sort Order Catalog lookup file This defines a secondary catalog lookup file to u...

Page 114: ...er selection switches to a secondary catalog lookup file For BOM report generation queries the second ary catalog lookup file when the target part number is not found in the default file Project properties components tab Modify your project default settings for components All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project defaults and settings Access Click the P...

Page 115: ... MISC_FLAGS attrib ute on the drawing s WD_M block Enter the beginning sequential number for the drawing Sequential tags can continue uninterrupted Sequential from one drawing to the next if you assign the same beginning sequential number to every drawing in your project As you insert components on any drawing of the project set AutoCAD Electrical starts with the value you set and works its way up...

Page 116: ... added to the end of the component tag To add it to the inside of the tag use X in the Tag Format Example N F or N F X suffix at the end such as 101 CRA N X F add to number before family code such as 101A CR Select from the default lists or manually enter your own suffix list in the row of edit boxes ComponentTAG Options Uses the combined installation location tag for inter preting component tag n...

Page 117: ...e AAA is the location Suppresses Location and Installation values on com ponents if they match the drawing default values Suppress Installation Location in tag when match drawing default NOTE Update cross reference text using the Auto CAD Electrical Cross reference command Specifies to exclude Installation and Location values as part of the tag when displayed in reports Suppress Installation Locat...

Page 118: ...must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing Properties Drawing Settings dialog box NOTE For reference based wire number tagging individual items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep multiple wires in the same reference location unique These are added to the end of the tag but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag form...

Page 119: ...above while DEMO2 would begin its wire numbers where DEMO1 left off making sure that duplicate wire numbers are not assigned The default is 1 Setting it to 2 with a starting sequential of 1 would yield wire numbers 1 3 5 7 9 11 and so on Increment Sets the wire number tag suffix This list is used to create unique reference based wire number tags for multiple wire Line Reference networks beginning ...

Page 120: ...umber for a wire network that has a wire number type terminal Hidden on Wire Network with Ter minal Displaying Wire Number Specifies to assign a wire number for each wire rather than the default one wire number per wire network On per Wire Basis Specifies the wire number ranges to exclude if using sequen tial wire numbers applied to the N part of the wire number tag format Exclude Syntax is starti...

Page 121: ...ption is unavailable for in line wire numbers AutoCAD Electrical places wire numbers on leaders when it determines that Leaders the wire number text bumps into something it does not check if the leader itself overlays another object Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders As Required Always or Never NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already present on the d...

Page 122: ... Drawings for off drawing references You can use the same format for both NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides some predefined formats for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters page 126 Cross Reference Options Automatically updates relay and wire source and destination symbols cross referencing across multiple drawings Real time signal and contact cross referen cing ...

Page 123: ...ly gets updated in real time so you can define the columns to dis play Table Format Displays a dialog box for setting the display defaults for each component cross reference display format Setup Project properties styles tab Modify your project default settings for various component styles All information defined in this tab is saved to the project definition file as project defaults and settings ...

Page 124: ...yers Layer List Defines layer names as Fan In Out layers Add Removes the selected layer from the defined layer list Remove Specifies the default mode of operation when wires cross each other insert gap with no loop insert gap and loop or solid no gap Wire Cross Specifies the default wire tee marker none dot angle1 or angle2 Wire Tee Project properties drawing format tab Allows you to modify your p...

Page 125: ... the drawing Set your drawing s X Y Grid vertical and horizontal index numbers and letters spacing and origin in the X Y grid setup dialog box TIP Use negative spacing values for Horizontal or Vertical if you want to change the X Y grid system s origin to be other than the upper left hand corner of the drawing Similar to X Y Grid but there isn t a Y axis Set your drawing s horizontal labels spacin...

Page 126: ...rder Sets the default wire numbering and component tag sort order for the drawing Your selection overrides the project settings for sort order unless you select No override Layers Defines and manages wire and component layers NOTE No matter what layer is current wires will always go to a wire layer and components to component layers Drawing properties drawing settings tab Apply a drawing specific ...

Page 127: ...the project wdp file Select from a list of predefined descriptions from the active project by clicking the arrow or select a descrip tion from the drawing by clicking Pick Indicates that the drawing should not be included in tag ging cross referencing and reporting functions If selected For Reference Only the drawing is included in project wide plotting and title block operations This is saved in ...

Page 128: ... in any of your tagging formats then specify a default drawing wide value to use Specifies the sheet number value for the drawing settings This value can be used as the replaceable parameter S Sheet Specifies the drawing number value for the drawing settings This value can be used as the replaceable parameter D Drawing Specifies the section value for the drawing file saved in the project definitio...

Page 129: ... number S parameter or the drawing number D parameter you must enter the values in the edit boxes in the Drawing Properties Drawing Settings dialog box NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined format for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters page 126 NOTE The N parameter is mandatory in any component tag format you define Searches for a connected PLC I O mod...

Page 130: ...ctrical does this using a suffix list of A B and so on NOTE The component tag suffix is automatically added to the end of the tag but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format Use the Suffix position parameter X in the component tag format for example N X F Displays the suffix list The individual items in the suffix list are given in the row of...

Page 131: ...s Drawing Settings dialog box NOTE For reference based wire number tagging individual items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep multiple wires in the same reference location unique These are added to the end of the tag but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format Use the Suffix position parameter X in the component tag form...

Page 132: ... list is used to create unique reference based wire number tags for multiple wire Line Reference networks beginning at the same reference location such as wire network beginning at a location per line reference number X Y grid reference or X Zone reference Displays a suffix list List suffix characters for wire numbers beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone Suffix Setup to keep wi...

Page 133: ...ader itself will overlay another object Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders As Required Always or Never NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already present on the drawing Drawing properties cross references tab Apply a drawing specific cross reference settings that are maintained inside the drawing s WD_M block This overrides the project settings since cr...

Page 134: ... text with any string as a separator between references on the same attribute Text Format Displays cross referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line Graphical Format Displays cross referencing in a table object that automatically gets updated in real time You can define the columns to display Table Format...

Page 135: ...om PLC module styles see Add a new PLC style page 251 Defines the default Fan In Out marker style and the layers for wires going out of a Fan In Out Source marker and those coming into a Destination marker Fan In Out Marker Style TIP For instructions on how to add custom Fan In Out marker styles see Add custom fan in out marker styles page 548 Lists the Fan In Out layers Layer List Defines layer n...

Page 136: ...w ladders you insert do not have line reference number ing by default Default insert new ladders without refer ences Specifies the width of the ladder Width Specifies the spacing between each wire in multi wire phases Multi wire Spacing Format Referencing Specifies the default referencing system There are 3 modes All referencing is tied to an X Y grid system of numbers and letters along the left h...

Page 137: ...rom 1 00 to 1 25 This change does not affect components and wire numbers that are already present on the drawing Select inch if your drawing is to use library symbols from the JIC1 JIC125 libraries or mm full size for the inch inch scaled to mm mm full size metric scaled symbol libraries This adjusts the wire connection trap distance that determines whether closely spaced wire ends connector not T...

Page 138: ...o a component this format is read and the codes are replaced with the appropriate values Replaceable parameters are also used for device tagging cross referencing wire numbering wire annotation and graphical terminal strips For device tagging cross referencing and wire numbering These are defined in the Drawing Properties Component family code string for example PB SS CR FLT MTR F Drawing s sheet ...

Page 139: ...the parent shows the MC drawing default location value of the drawing the child is on and the child shows the M drawing default location value of the drawing the parent is on no matter what the location value is on either the parent or child NOTE If you include I or L in your component s Tag code you are prompted tore calculate the component s tag if you change the Installation or Location value o...

Page 140: ... is tag color C Cable tag E Cable conductor core color J Cable tag substituted for wire number if cable tag is non blank V The wire number is displayed when a cable ID doesn t exist Wire color gauge or wire layer name G Cable wire color substituted for wire number if cable color is non blank H The wire layer is displayed when a wire conductor in conjunction with a cable ID doesn t exist Terminal s...

Page 141: ...of I L 1 P D tag term termdesc 9 The part after the colon is suppressed if the value is blank in 2 9 parameters for example 2 comp tag term The term part is suppressed if blank Save settings to the project file The changes you make to the current drawing s configuration are saved on the drawing s invisible WD_M block You can save a copy of these settings to the project file This makes the settings...

Page 142: ...se of the current drawing 5 Click OK NOTE Changing these settings does not automatically change components and wiring already present in your drawing Compare drawing and project settings This tool compares the general schematic settings carried on the drawing s invisible WD_M block with a copy of the settings saved in the project s wdp project list file You can update selected drawing settings mul...

Page 143: ...ll Displays settings that are different between the WD_M block and the wdp file Show Differences Selects all of the settings in the list so you can quickly change all settings to match either the project or the drawing Select All Changes the selected drawing setting to make it match the project Select the settings from the list and then click the button Match Project Changes the selected project d...

Page 144: ...roperties Manager dialog box adjust layer colors and click Apply 6 Save the drawing as an AutoCAD Drawing Template file with a DWT extension This template appears in the list of saved templates the next time you open a new AutoCAD Electrical drawing Drawing properties drawing settings tab Apply a drawing specific settings that are maintained inside the drawing s WD_M block and the project wdp file...

Page 145: ...by clicking the arrow or select a descrip tion from the drawing by clicking Pick Indicates that the drawing should not be included in tag ging cross referencing and reporting functions If selected For Reference Only the drawing is included in project wide plotting and title block operations This is saved in the project wdp file IEC Style Designators Specifies IEC default values for the drawing suc...

Page 146: ...replaceable parameter S Sheet Specifies the drawing number value for the drawing settings This value can be used as the replaceable parameter D Drawing Specifies the section value for the drawing file saved in the project definition file wdp This value can be used as the replaceable para meter A Section Specifies the subsection value for the drawing file saved in the project definition file wdp Th...

Page 147: ...t 0 default 1 25 for 25 bigger FEATURE_SCL Ladder defaults ladder orientation H horizontal rungs vertical ladders V vertical rungs horizontal ladders RUNGHORV reference numbering system ladder line reference based or X Y grid reference based REFNUMS 1 line reference numbers 2 numbers with ruling 3 user defined line reference block 4 X Y grid reference mode 5 X Zone reference mode default rung spac...

Page 148: ...omponent tag format specifier default F N TAGFMT Wire number tagging wire number format S sequential R reference based WIREMODE drawing s starting sequential number for sequential tag ging only i e 100 WIRE START wire tag suffix list for reference based tagging only i e A B C WIRE RSUF wire tag format specifier default N WIREFMT wire number increment WINC wire leaders 0 only as required 1 always i...

Page 149: ..._GAP attribute for settings list 2 s 4 s bits 00 default wire number above wire 01 below wire Layer names component tag layer TAG_LAY fixed component tag layer TAGFIXED_LAY parent component s description layer DESC_LAY child component s description layer CDESC_LAY component terminal pin numbers layer TERM_LAY parent component s cross reference layer XREF_LAY child contact s cross reference layer C...

Page 150: ...n In Out valid layer names for Fan In Out single line wires comma delimited FAN_INOUT_LAYS Fan In Out symbol style number FAN_INOUT_STYLE Cross reference cross reference format specifier default N XREFFMT optional cross reference format for inter drawing references i e S N ALT_XREFFMT cross reference style 0 text 1 graphical 2 table XREF_STYLE 1 s bit include unused contacts 2 s bit if table inclu...

Page 151: ... XREF_TBLSTYLE table title XREF_TBLTITLE table fields to include XREF_TBLINDEX table available field names XREF_TBLFLDNAMS table fields justification XREF_TBLCOLJUST Referencing X coordinate origin for X Y or X zone DATUMX Y coordinate origin for X Y or X zone DATUMY horizontal interval spacing for X Y or X zone DISTH vertical interval spacing for X Y referencing DISTV horizontal starting characte...

Page 152: ... see WNUM_FLAGS bit 1 for toggle mode value saved to GBL_wd_inline_gapas a list nil or num1 num2 num3 WNUM_GAP miscellaneous flags MISC_FLAGS 0 gap 1 loop 2 no gap 1 s bit mm full size 2 s bit ignore non lay0 lay vector 4 s bit use plc wire numbers 8 s bit insert new ladders without references 16 s bit search for PLC address on component insert 32 64 bit 10 none 01 angle 1 11 angle 2 00 dot 140 Ch...

Page 153: ... 6 Open your template file 7 Select Projects Swap WD_M or WD_PNLM Blocks Update to New WD_M Block Values Layers The new version of the WD_M block replaces your existing one Add missing attributes to the WD_M block As AutoCAD Electrical adds new features new attributes are sometimes added to the default WD_M block However if your drawing was created with an older WD_M block it may not carry these a...

Page 154: ...Defines the default schematic settings WD_M Defines the default panel settings WD_PNLM Alert A drawing needs an invisible block WD_M dwg on the drawing to be compatible with AutoCAD Electrical The WD_M dwg block is located in the default symbol library This block carries about 50 attributes that define settings layer names and other default settings that are referenced by AutoCAD Electrical comman...

Page 155: ...up 3 Specify information for the panel component layers non text graphic layers and nameplate layers When AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint it is modified on the fly to match the layering scheme set up in this dialog 4 Click OK Rename panel layers The Rename Panel Layers tool makes it easy to rename layers one by one or multiple layers at once by using the Find Replace method The advantage to...

Page 156: ...s Click OK Manage schematic layers 1 Click the Drawing Properties tool 2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box click the Drawing Format tab 3 In the Layers section click Define 4 In the Define Layers dialog box specify information for the component layers and wire number layers The layer names you choose are what AutoCAD Electrical will use as it inserts the parts and pieces of component symbols an...

Page 157: ...nd click Edit Enter a new layer name and click OK 4 To edit multiple layer names click Find Replace Enter the text to find and the text to replace it with in the edit boxes Click OK NOTE You can also change layer properties using the Project Manager tool In the Project Manager right click on the drawing name and select Properties Drawing Properties or to change the project default settings right c...

Page 158: ... creates that layer on the fly Component Block Layers Displays layer names Type layer names into the edit boxes A blank entry inserts that category on the current layer Multiple categories can be tied to the same layer name enter the same layer name into multiple edit boxes When a schematic component is inserted the block s graphics are inserted onto the layer listed in the Non text Graphics box T...

Page 159: ...d to hide freeze all attributes on that layer For ex Freeze ample to hide all child cross reference text select Freeze next to the Cross reference child edit box You can also use the AutoCAD LAYER command to do the same thing As AutoCAD Electrical inserts a component it moves the parts and pieces of the symbol to the category layers listed Apply to entities on layer 0 only in this dialog If you do...

Page 160: ...e by using the Find Replace method In addition to renaming the layer this also updates the AutoCAD Electrical layer assignment information carried on the drawing s WD_M block For example if DEMO WIRES is currently assigned as an AutoCAD Electrical wire layer and you rename it using this utility the new layer name is substituted for DEMO WIRES in the AutoCAD Electrical wire layer name list Access C...

Page 161: ...the layer name for a tag by entering a new name in the edit Panel Component Layers box If you do not want an attribute moved to a PNL layer place that attribute on some other layer than 0 on the block Then click on the Ignore above for symbol s non lay 0 ents toggle When a panel component is inserted the block will be inserted on the first layer in the Non text Non Text Graphic Layers Graphics lay...

Page 162: ... the wire layer of the ending wire ignoring the current layer and current wire type When a new wire is started at an existing wire and ends at another existing wire the new wire takes on the layer of the beginning wire If there aren t any wire layers in the drawing the new wire is drawn in the WIRES layer When a wire starts in empty space and ends at the component wire connection point or vice ver...

Page 163: ...Name is automatically created If you specified Wire Color Red and Size 20 the name RED_20 is assigned to the wire layer you are creating 5 Click Color Linetype or Lineweight to assign values for the new layer NOTE If you want the new wire layer to be the default click Mark Selected as Default 6 Click OK Add existing wire layers to the drawing Wire layer names for drawings are set up in the Create ...

Page 164: ...ess Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Create Edit Wire Type tool From the Wires menu select Create Edit Wire Type Wire type grid Displays the wire types used in the active drawing The the wire layer name and the wire properties like color size and user defined properties are listed in the grid An x in the Used column indicates that the layer name is currently used in the drawin...

Page 165: ...cord s you want to move and drag to the new position in the grid Option Makes all existing layers valid wire layers and displays them in the wire type grid Make All Lines Valid Wires Once you select to make all of the layers valid wire layers you can deselect this option if you later decide you want some layers to be wire layers and others to be line layers All of the layers are removed from the w...

Page 166: ... If you need special line types for constructing P ID or point to point diagrams you need to load the special line types from theacade lin text file Displays the AutoCAD dialog for lineweight selec tion The Lineweight dialog box highlights the line Lineweight weight corresponding to the wire type record The default lineweight for new records is default Un defined lineweights for layers should use ...

Page 167: ...nable the button NOTE Only unused layers in the active drawing can be deleted Makes the selected layer the default layer for new wire layers and displays the layer name in the dialog box Mark Selected as Default OK NOTE This is available only when one wire type record is selected in the list Makes the selected wire type the current wire type If the selected wire type does not already exist on the ...

Page 168: ...ct a wire type record from the drawing If you right clicked on a wire and selected Change Convert Wire Type in the Change Convert Wire Type dialog box the wire type corresponding to the selected wire layer is highlighted in the list 4 Make any selections in the dialog box If Change all wires in the wire network is selected all wires in the wire network are changed to the new wire type If unselec t...

Page 169: ...ire insertion Change convert wire type This tool converts lines to wires Use the grid control to sort and select the wire types for easy modification TIP Use the Create Edit Wire Type tool to create and edit wire types or type T at the command prompt during wire insertion to use the Set Wire Type tool Access Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Change Convert Wire Type tool From t...

Page 170: ... to the list of valid wire layers A new wire type record is created automatically Change Convert Changes all the wires in the wire network to the se lected wire type record If unselected only a single wire is changed to the selected wire type Change All Wire s in the Network Changes the lines to the selected wire type in the wire type grid Convert Line s to Wire s OK NOTE This is available only wh...

Page 171: ...ick the project name in the Project Manager and select Properties In the Project Properties Wire Numbers dialog box Wire Type section click Rename User Columns In the Rename User Columns dialog box specify a new column name and click OK Renaming of user defined columns is project specific You cannot rename the Color Size or Layer Name columns All of the data corresponding to the header column can ...

Page 172: ...NV file name reference is saved in the project s WDP drawing list file Whenever the project is selected the settings in the referenced ENV file are automatically restored Access Click the Project Manager tool Right click the drawing name and select Settings On the Current Settings dialog box click Environment file From the Projects menu select Project Project Manager Right click the drawing name a...

Page 173: ...chapter Determine symbol block names Library Symbol Naming Conventions Split a tag name into two pieces Use multiple symbol libraries Overview of Hydraulic and P ID symbols Attribute Requirements Managing Library Symbols 4 161 ...

Page 174: ...in the AutoCAD Electrical icon menuing system You can pick the symbol names from this file Here is an example of how the data looks in this file On delay coil S2 SHTD1N HTD1N The characters divide the entry into three sections The first piece is the description that appears in the menu s side bar the second in a slide library reference and the third is the actual symbol file name In this example t...

Page 175: ...arious AutoCAD Electrical symbols below Cable Marker Symbols AutoCAD Electrical cable conductor marker symbols follow this convention The first character is H or V for horizontal wire or vertical wire insertion The next two characters are W0 A zero 0 means that the symbol does not trigger a wire number change through it The fourth character is either 1 or 2 1 for parent marker or 2 for child marke...

Page 176: ...r terminals W0 for cable markers C0 for connectors The fourth character is generally a 1 or a 2 2 for child contacts and 1 for everything else parent or standalone component If the symbol is a contact then the 5th character is a 1 for normally open 2 for normally closed The remaining characters are not specified They are used to keep names unique Examples Control relay coil horizontal rung inserti...

Page 177: ...carries a ladder s first line reference number and additional information such as rung spacing and ladder length WD_MLRH dwg Same as above but for a ladder that lies on its side WD_MLRV dwg Optional user defined alternative to WD_MLRH dwg This symbol name is used by AutoCAD Electrical when you select User Block WD_MLRHX dwg from the Line Reference Numbers subdialog box of the Drawing Properties Dr...

Page 178: ...ples Horizontal parent single plug wiring connects from left or bottom HCN1_14P dwg Vertical child single plug wiring connects from left or bottom VCN2_18P dwg Horizontal parent single receptacle wiring connects from right or top HCN1_11J dwg Vertical child single plug wiring connects from right or top VCN2_12P dwg Upon completion of the parametric build connector a unique new block definition is ...

Page 179: ...symbol HCYL1_plunger_cyl dwg Inline Wire Marker Symbols Dumb inline wire marker symbols must be constructed with a tiny piece of pigtail line entity at each connection point This can be very small but it must be present for AutoCAD Electrical to correctly see the in line inserted block as it traces the wire network Inline wire marker symbols follow this naming convention The first character is H o...

Page 180: ...s A parametrically generated twisted pair representation consists to two instances of the same symbol there are no parent child versions This symbol must carry attribute ACE_FLAG with a value of 3 Parametric twisted pair symbols follow this naming convention The first 4 characters are HT0_ or VT0_ for horizontal or vertical parametric symbols The remaining characters can be anything default is set...

Page 181: ...or VSP1 for horizontal or vertical splices The 5th through 7th characters are 001 002 003 and so on Examples Horizontal splice 1 HSP1001 dwg Vertical splice 1 VSP1001 dwg Horizontal splice 3 HSP1003 dwg Source Destination Wire Signal Arrow Symbols AutoCAD Electrical wire signal arrow symbols follow this convention The first four characters of these symbol names are either HA S for source signal ar...

Page 182: ...O prefix Examples AB 1761 model L16 AWA with 0 5 unit rung spacing PLCIO50E1761 L16AWA dwg Standalone input point single wire connection PLCIOI1T dwg StandaloneTerminal Symbols Stand alone terminals follow this naming convention The first two characters are HT The third character is 0 if the wire number does not change through the terminal 1 if the terminal symbol should trigger a wire number chan...

Page 183: ...e origin of the block insert lies on its wire with the wire number attribute floating above below or off to the side of the block s insertion point Examples Wire number for horizontal wire insertion WD_WNH dwg Wire number for vertical wire insertion WD_WNV dwg Extra wire number copy for horizontal wire WD_WCH dwg Extra wire number copy for vertical wire WD_WCV dwg AutoCAD Electrical also supports ...

Page 184: ...TAG2 attribute 1 Open up the dwg library symbol drawing that you want to modify 2 Rename the TAG1 attribute definition to read TAG1_PART1 3 Add a new attribute definition TAG1_PART2 4 Position both attribute definitions inside of the symbol s circle graphics one above the other With this setup AutoCAD Electrical will automatically split tags like CR104 and 104CR into two pieces where characters sp...

Page 185: ...nager and select Properties In the Project Properties Project Settings dialog box click the plus sign next to Schematic Libraries or Panel Footprint Libraries Click Add and enter the library s path into the edit box or click Default to use the default libraries NOTE You can include electrical pneumatic or other schematic libraries in the path You can also include a series of library paths for Auto...

Page 186: ...ith WD_LIB 5 Edit this line to reflect the path of your default library For example if the path to your new default library is now n elec syms change the line to read WD_LIB n elec syms AutoCAD Electrical symbols 6 Save and close the file Another way to do this is to use an AutoCAD Electrical variable in the WD_LIB line of the env file You could use ACAD_SUP_LAST or ACAD_SUP_FIRST to point to the ...

Page 187: ...TR A Piping and Instrumentation Diagram P ID is a schematic illustration of functional relationship of piping instrumentation and system equipment P ID shows all of piping including the physical sequence of branches reducers valves equipment instrumentation and control interlocks The P ID are used to operate the process system The P ID symbol library consists of all the P ID symbols and is found u...

Page 188: ... Cyclone TK Equipment Engine exchanger E Equipment Turbine compressors C Equipment Fans F Equipment Mixer agitators M Tanks and vessels TK V Nozzles N Pumps P Fittings FIT Valves GVA Actuators ACT Logic Functions LOG Instrumentation INS Flow FLW FE 176 Chapter 4 Symbol Libraries ...

Page 189: ...bute definition on the symbol carries a default value of MCR and the drawing s tag format is F N where N is the placeholder for the line reference number or next sequential number As each instance of this symbol is inserted it will automatic ally be assigned a tag name with an MCR prefix tacked on to the reference or next sequential number NOTE When a component is marked with a fixed tag this attr...

Page 190: ...ag attribute combination 64 characters maximum COPYTAG Attribute used to hold manufacturer name or code 24 characters maximum This attribute is generally marked as invisible MFG MFG01 MFG10 Optional invisible attributes for manufacturer name or code for up to 10 additional Multiple Catalog part number as signments 24 characters maximum each If these attributes are not present and AutoCAD Electrica...

Page 191: ...ers maximum Generally the FAMILY at FAMILY tribute definition s default value is the same as the default value for the component s TAG1 or TAG2 attribute It is used as a check at the time child components are linked to a parent On a family mismatch an alert dialog displays A generic child device can be linked to any type of parent symbol if the child s Family attribute value is left blank AutoCAD ...

Page 192: ...ve the default value blank and then fill it in at component insertion time POSn Optional contact state character string to denote relationship between switch positions and open closed contact state It is for display only STATE You can leave the default value blank and then fill it in at component insertion time Optional rating value attribute text where n is a digit starting with 1 60 characters m...

Page 193: ...ent drawing or pneumatic drawing vs electrical schematic For example an instrument drawing might be included in an AutoCAD Electrical project drawing set with a valve marked FY201 On the electrical schematics the solenoid for this instrument valve is tagged SV456 The WDTAGALT attribute carried on the schematic valve symbol can be annotated with the FY201 instrument tag name and a WDTAGALT attribut...

Page 194: ...mber TERMn and a terminal description TERMDESCn attribute The character position is used to identify the preferred wire con nection direction 1 wire connects to the attribute from the right 2 wire connects to the attribute from above 4 wire connects to the attribute from the left 8 wire connects to the attribute from below 0 special for motor connections that radiate from a circle If more than 99 ...

Page 195: ...toCAD Electrical will consider them WD_JUMPERS internally jumpered when calculating wire number assignments and processing wire connection and from to reports For example a WD_JUMPERS attribute value of 01 02 will flag AutoCAD Electrical to treat wire connection X TERM01 as electrically jumpered to XD TERM02 WD_JUMPERS attribute value of 01 04 02 05 06 means that wire connection X TERM01 and X TER...

Page 196: ...h a value of 2 for all parametric connector symbols and a value of 1 for splice symbols 1 character maximum ACE_FLAG Same as above DESC1 DESC2 DESC3 Same as above X LINK Parent only Invisible attribute with a value of HC0 0 zero 32 characters maximum This WDBLKNAM is used to flag access of the C0 connector table in the catalog lookup database file Parametric Connector Wire Connection attributes De...

Page 197: ...NT_REMOVE_01P X _TINY_DOT_DONT_REMOVE_01J placed at the exact insertion location of the Xn TERM01P and XnTERM01J attributes This attrib ute is needed to maintain wire connection integ rity if a connector pin is moved beyond the end of the connector shell The digit is same as above Schematic terminal symbols The following attributes can be used for terminal symbols or multi connection sequence term...

Page 198: ...ible attribute with value of TRMS to force access of the TRMS table in catalog lookup 32 characters maximum WDBLKNAM Special Multiple Connection SequenceTerminal symbol The following attributes can be used for this special type of terminal symbol This single symbol instance can be used to define a series of up to six terminal strip inter connections example a wire that passes through a series of s...

Page 199: ...se symbols allow a wire to jump from one place to another either within a drawing or across multiple drawing Default library symbol names are HAxSn dwg HAxDn dwg where x style digit and n orientation 1 2 3 or 4 Description Attribute Attribute carries unique signal code that is user defined as the symbol is inserted 32 characters maximum This value is used to match up SIGCODE each source signal sym...

Page 200: ...ls insert into a wire break the wire and reconnect at each end They carry a text label or wire number in the gap between the connected wire ends They symbols can dynamically adjust their gap to accommodate the width of the in line text Default library symbol block names are HT0_ dwg VT0_ dwg Description Attribute Visible attribute for the text label COLOR or in line wire text WIRENO 24 characters ...

Page 201: ...ols with one or two wire connections Default library symbol block names are PLCIOI dwg and PLCIOO dwg Description Attribute Attribute for PLC I O module tag name parent child with the de fault attribute definition value for the parent symbol becoming the F part of the tag name format 64 characters maximum TAG1 TAG2 Attribute for the I O address 32 characters maximum TAGA01 Same as above INST LOC S...

Page 202: ...al text example Rack and Slot address numbers 24 characters maximum LINE1 LINE2 Parent only Optional attribute for general description purposes 60 characters maximum DESC Same as above default value PLC 8 characters maximum FAMILY Splices Description Attribute Attribute for wire annotation XnWIRE01 Attribute for wire annotation XnWIRE02 Attribute for wire connection description 128 characters maxi...

Page 203: ...insertion location of each of the XnTERM01 attributes This attribute is needed to allow the gap to auto adjust to text width and to maintain connectivity through the symbol if the in line label or wire number text is blanked or grows small compared to the total gap width in the wire Invisible attribute that carries the vertex offset distance measured from the midpoint of the symbol s two wire ACE_...

Page 204: ... P_TAGSTRIP Invisible attribute for optional terminal location code for example JBOX1 16 characters maximum LOC Invisible attribute for optional terminal installation code for example MACH1 24 characters maximum INST Attribute to carry the terminal pin number assignment 10 characters maximum It can be related to the attached wire number or inde pendent of the wire number TERM or WIRENO Invisible a...

Page 205: ...mum WIRENOR WIRENOL Optional attributes for schematic interconnection annotation 128 characters maximum TERMDESCR TERMDESCL Hydraulic and P ID symbols Description Attribute Attribute for required component tag name 64 characters maximum The default value you assign becomes the family code character string TAG1 AutoCAD Electrical uses to build the component s tag name when the block is inserted int...

Page 206: ...s maximum The value for this attribute is generally set by Auto CAD Electrical and not by the user Optional attribute for rating value text 60 characters maximum RATING1 DESC1 Description first or only line of description text 60 characters maximum DESC1 DESC2 DESC3 DESC2 2nd line of description text DESC3 3rd line of description text Attribute used on non electrical schematic symbols to identify ...

Page 207: ...non NO NC contacts if XREFNO and XREFNC are not present AutoCAD Electrical underlines the closed contacts Optional terminal pin number attribute 10 characters maximum Make sure to keep terminal pin number text paired with its wire connection attributes TERM Invisible wire connection attributes where an external wire connects to the attribute s origin point The n character is an incremented digit X...

Page 208: ...the wd_fam dat mapping file NOTE If the TAG1 attribute carries no default value then AutoCAD Electrical will use that symbol s FAMILY attribute value Overview of child component attributes TAG2 AutoCAD Electrical puts a copy of the parent component s tag name on the child component attribute TAG2 During the AutoCAD Electrical tagging operation AutoCAD Electrical takes the parent coil s tag name ca...

Page 209: ...ed symbol s dwg file in your USER subdirectory right click inside the Project Manager and select Settings to find the full path The AutoCAD Electrical component insertion command always looks at this directory for the requested symbol prior to going to the selected symbol library NOTE AutoCAD Electrical uses regular AutoCAD blocks If you insert a block from one library and then try to insert the s...

Page 210: ...including scaling each symbol changing attribute height based on AutoCAD Electrical attribute type and picking a different text font for the AutoCAD Electrical text style Tips and Hints Leave all symbol attribute definitions and geometry on layer 0 and that entity color assignments are by layer Let AutoCAD Electrical manage what layers the various parts and pieces of your symbol get put on at inse...

Page 211: ...pectively At insertion time these values show up as defaults NOTE You can override the default values at insertion time Create a new library symbol AutoCAD Electrical uses stock AutoCAD blocks and attributes in its library symbols The symbols can be any size and width You don t have to edit an external support file or database to register a symbol for use in an AutoCAD Electrical wiring diagram dr...

Page 212: ... select Settings to find the full path To test it call up a new or existing AutoCAD Electrical drawing Try to insert your new symbol into an existing piece of wire You can manually enter your new symbol s file name using Type it on the main icon menu page Tips and Hints Pigtails Avoid putting wire pigtails on your new symbols Pigtails can defeat the AutoCAD Electrical SCOOT command and automatic w...

Page 213: ...Electrical symbols to make them AutoCAD Electrical smart Schematic symbols created or converted using the Symbol Builder are fully compatible with AutoCAD Electrical break wires upon insertion and appear in the various BOM component and wire connection reports You can exit the Symbol Builder command and re enter it at any time You can also exit the command and use regular AutoCAD commands to edit ...

Page 214: ...lder dialog choices and selections differ 6 Select various options to insert required attributes wire con nection points terminal text and so on 7 When you finish click Block to insert your new component into your drawing or Wblock to first save a copy of your new symbol Try to retain the first 4 characters of the assigned block name Symbol builder choose symbol category This tool converts existin...

Page 215: ... to a parent component Child Schematic terminal with terminal number Terminal Schematic terminal that follows the wire number rather than having a terminal number of its own Terminal Panel symbol that is not used as a terminal or nameplate Footprint Panel terminal symbol Terminal Panel nameplate symbol Nameplate NOTE Depending on the selected symbol category the dialog box choices and selections d...

Page 216: ... the default family code for an automatically generated schematic component tag upon insertion into a drawing This defaults to DV unless you override it with another value such as PB or CR or MOT Specifies the default code for child component tags This value matches the code carried by the parent TAG2 F default Converts existing text to the target AutoCAD Electrical at tribute Pick text Adds the c...

Page 217: ... the exploded block or drawing to include with the symbol Standard Opens a dialog box for selecting the missing attributes for the symbol When you insert the TAG1 attribute for a parent schematic symbol you are prompted for a default value This value is used as the default family code for an automatically generated schematic component tag upon insertion into a drawing This defaults to DV unless yo...

Page 218: ...ts related child contact This method requires special attributes at the point where the dashed line connects to the symbol Rating You can add up to 12 optional rating attributes that can be used for anything from amps to motor horsepower Define an attribute prompt for each such as Motor FLA or Voltage These prompts display in the AutoCAD Electrical Insert Edit Component dialog box when you insert ...

Page 219: ...cellaneous tool to access the Symbol Builder tool Click Footprint Terminal or Nameplate then click Standard From the Components menu select Symbol Library Symbol Builder Click Footprint Terminal or Nameplate then click Standard Lists attributes that you can insert for the symbol Missing attributes Specifies the attribute height Height Specifies the attribute justification Justification Changes the...

Page 220: ... or drawing to include with the symbol Standard Opens a dialog box for selecting the missing attributes for the symbol Choose the text size and justification for the attribute from the menus if the desired text size is not shown go to the bottom of the list and click add On the Component type Panel Footprint dialog box click Insert Attribute to speed up the process of adding the correct attributes...

Page 221: ...tes to map your text attributes to the attribute names for the selected symbol type Change Specifies the text style text line weight and width factor for the new attributes Save and insert When you are finished click Block to insert your new component into your circuit or Wblock to first save a copy of your new symbol the default save location is your user subdirectory Swap blocks The block swappe...

Page 222: ... the new version of the same symbol The Library mode works the same way as the Update mode but will swap out all the blocks on the drawing s When you swap or update a block there may be times when you want the values of certain attributes mapped to different attribute names For example you may be doing a Library Update and the library symbols you are swapping out do not use standard AutoCAD Electr...

Page 223: ...d attribute locations old block scales or retag if parent swap causes family changes Option B Select to update a block by replacing it with a new version or substitute new versions of all blocks Specify the file name of the block that will be substituted for all in stances of the selected block Determine whether you want to retain old attribute locations old block scales or copy the old block s at...

Page 224: ...p Update Block Swap Block swap to different block name Exchanges one block for another one block at a time Swap a block one at a time Exchanges one block for another throughout the drawing Swap a block drawing wide Exchanges one block for another throughout the project Swap a block project wid Specifies to select a new block from the icon menu Pick new block from icon menu Specifies to select a ne...

Page 225: ...e block revised or different version of same block name Updates all instances of a given block with an updated version of the same block Update a block Updates all instances of a library symbol with an updated version of the same symbol Library swap Attribute mapping Uses the same attribute names from the original block Use same attribute names Allows the values of certain attributes to be mapped ...

Page 226: ... block substitution To use a different library enter its path or click Browse Insertion scale Specifies which scale factor to use 1 0 full scale Configuration Scale the scale setting in the Drawing Scale Properties Drawing Format dialog box 25 4 inch to millimeter scale factor and 1 25 4 milli meter to inch scale factor Specifies to retain the scale value from the original block Retain old block s...

Page 227: ...he selected block Enter a file name or click Browse Insertion scale Specifies which scale factor to use 1 0 full scale Configuration Scale the scale setting in the Drawing Scale Properties Drawing Format dialog box 25 4 inch to millimeter scale factor and 1 25 4 milli meter to inch scale factor Specifies to retain the scale value from the original block Retain old block scale Specifies to retain t...

Page 228: ...216 ...

Page 229: ...PLC In this chapter Generate PLC layout modules Insert PLC modules Overview of the PLC database file Single Stand Alone I O Points Work with PLC styles Create PLC I O Drawings from Spreadsheets 5 217 ...

Page 230: ...Program Files x86 Autodesk Acade version libs jic125 for 0 125 height version along with all of the other AutoCAD Electrical component symbols Their file names begin with the characters HP Horizontal ladder rungs PLC or VP Vertical ladder rungs followed by a digit that corresponds to a PLC I O style number Each symbol is a building block with a different arrangement of attributes and wire connecti...

Page 231: ...Click the Insert PLC Parametric tool From the Components menu select Insert PLC Modules Insert PLC Para metric Manufacturer Catalog tree Provides a complete list of the PLC modules available to AutoCAD Electrical The Manufacturer Catalog tree is compiled from the database file ace_plc mdb Module List Displays the defined modules Once you select a module type or a specific module from the Manufactu...

Page 232: ...by the rung spacing For example if the rung spacing is 0 5 then each time you click on the number increases by 0 5 I O points Specifies whether to include all of the points or break the module into many pieces You can break a module into as many pieces as you want at insertion time This is useful for a module that won t fit into a single ladder column You can also add extra space between adjacent ...

Page 233: ...Unused or When Excluding Unused in the Show column of the PLC Database File Editor dialog box Insert PLC modules In AutoCAD Electrical you can insert either PLC I O points as independent symbols or as a complete PLC module into your drawing 1 Click the arrow on the Insert PLC Parametric tool to access the Insert PLC Full Units tool 2 Click the Insert PLC Full Units tool 3 In the PLC Fixed Units di...

Page 234: ...he PLC module First Address Lists the available I O addresses to select from When you select an I O address from the list the I O Point Description Address automatically updates List Lists any I O points already assigned to the drawing or project Select a tag from the list to copy or to increment for this new component Used Drawing or Project Tag Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each I O ...

Page 235: ... O point s PLCIO table in the catalog database from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected cable Database queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with the database hits listed in the dialog s main window Description Optional line of description text May be used to ide...

Page 236: ...nal File Installation Location codes Changes the installation or location code s You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation and location codes A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of codes used so far is returned Select from the list to automatically update the module with the installation or location code Pins Assigns pin numbers ...

Page 237: ... Type and Table Name PLC_Manufacturer This table is for internal use only It is recommended that you do not edit this table PLC_MSG This table lists the box settings on a per style basis PLC_Styles There are two tables for each module type The Module Specification table contains information such as the model number type description rating and rectangle offset values The Module Terminal Information...

Page 238: ...OX_LEFT METRIC_BOX_TOP METRIC_BOX_BOTTOM METRIC_BOX_SPLIT_BOTTOM MET RIC_BOX_SPLIT_TOP The following are optional parameters for parametric build symbol placement Box color linetype layer You can instruct AutoCAD Electrical to draw the rectangular box using non default line properties for color layer line type or ltscale Encode this information as a series of keywords as if you were using AutoCAD ...

Page 239: ...es After you re prompted to enter values such as rack group or slot the values are available for use on any subsequent I O point of the module If you want to use each I O point s TERMDESC_ attribute to carry the I O address in Rack Group bit number format do the following 1 Prompt for Rack and Group values in the module s first entry 1PROMPT Rack number 2PROMPT Group number 2 Encode the TERMDESC_ ...

Page 240: ...2 08ND3 TERM_ 4 TAGA_ A 4 HP WA DR D2 08ND3 TERM_ 1 TAGA_ A 1 HP WA DQ D2 08ND3 TERM_ 5 TAGA_ A 5 HP WA DR D2 08ND3 TERM_ 2 TAGA_ A 2 HP WA DQ D2 08ND3 TERM_ 6 TAGA_ A 6 HP WA DR D2 08ND3 TERM_ 3 TAGA_ A 3 HP WA DQ D2 08ND3 TERM_ 7 TAGA_ A 7 HP WA DR D2 08ND3 Forcing a break You can pre define a module break point in the Module Terminal Information table Add SPECIAL BREAK on the line where you wan...

Page 241: ...Normally when AutoCAD Electrical generates a PLC module it uses the current rung spacing for I O and wire connection point spacing You can override this by using the SPECIAL SPACINGFACTOR val in the Module Terminal Information table When AutoCAD Electrical sees this on an I O point or wire connection entry line it uses a factor of the rung spacing For example a SPECIAL SPACINGFACTOR 0 5 for a give...

Page 242: ...HP W TERM_ VDC SPECIAL SPACINGFACTOR 0 5 HP WA D TERM_ 02 230 Chapter 5 PLC ...

Page 243: ...le If you attempt to copy a PLC Module part number into a PLC Type that already has a module with the same name the PLC Database File Editor prompts you to change the name of the new module being copied 6 To change the name for the module right click the module select Rename and enter a new name Adjust the terminal information When you highlight an exiting module part number in the PLC Database Fi...

Page 244: ...r text boxes or select a single terminal making sure to select the entire row if you want to change more than one field click the right mouse button and select Edit Terminal from the menu If you want to modify multiple terminals at the same time select the terminals click the right mouse button and select Edit Terminal from the menu 5 In the Select Terminal Information dialog box make any modifica...

Page 245: ...anufacturer The manufacturer then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alphabetical order New Manufacturer available only for the Manufacturer branch of the tree structure Defines a new PLC series underneath the respective Manufacturer New Series The series then appears in the PLC Selection tree structure in alpha betical order available only for the Series branch of the tree structure D...

Page 246: ...umber into a PLC Type that already has a module with the same name the PLC Database File Editor prompts you to change the name of the new module being copied Terminal Grid Control Highlight a module from the PLC Selection tree structure to populate the Terminal Grid Control with the terminal information that was previously defined for the module When creating a new PLC module the PLC Database File...

Page 247: ... insert a new terminal before or after the selected terminal in the grid control or delete a terminal from the grid control You can select multiple fields to update at the same time by dragging your mouse across contiguous fields or by holding down the Control key while selecting non contiguous fields Terminal Attributes Displays attributes associated to the selected terminal These attributes can ...

Page 248: ...ted NOTE The Module Box Dimensions override the style dimensions Settings Opens a dialog box for adding or updating the symbols available to build a module PLC selection Use this to select a module to add to the terminal blocks from Select the module from the list and click OK Access Click the drop down arrow on the Insert PLC Parametric tool to access the PLC Database File Editor tool Click the S...

Page 249: ...sign settings specific to this module Sets the right left top and bottom offsets for the rectangle that surrounds the module The optional Split Top and Split Bottom specify the offsets for a split module where Split Top specifies the offset for the top of a split module and Split Bottom specifies the offset for the bottom of the split module If left blank AutoCAD Electrical will use the rectangle ...

Page 250: ...trol section of the PLC Database File Editor dialog box and then you activate this dialog box you can update both fields through this dialog box for the selected terminals Category Lists the terminal categories to select from Top Input and Top Output are addressable terminals while the Top Terminal category consists of non addressable terminals Other categories to select from are Input Output and ...

Page 251: ... will cause AutoCAD Electrical to insert the point down two times the rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing New module Defines the module descriptions and parameters A series of boxes are used to type in or select the values required to define the module Access Click the arrow on the Insert PLC Parametric tool to access the PLC Database File Editor tool Click New Module From the Components m...

Page 252: ...mod ule Terminals NOTE This is not active since it is under the control of the total number of terminals listed in the Terminal Type grid control Specifies the total number of termination points on the PLC module that will receive the PLC address attributes Addressable Points AutoCAD Block to insert Specifies an AutoCAD block file to insert directly below the last I O point inserted parametrically...

Page 253: ...he list A blank entry line is added to the bottom of the list You must define the block name assign it to a terminal category for selection give it a description and assign a bitmap to be used for dialog displays Block File Name Defines the AutoCAD drawing file name that is inserted if this terminal is included in your PLC module These PLC symbols are stored in the symbol library of the active pro...

Page 254: ...ined styles 6 9 may be user defined Select a style number a sample portion of a PLC module displays There are about two dozen symbols with a file name HP dwg where is the style number associated with each style in the Program Files x86 Autodesk Acade version libs jic1 subdirectory To create a new style copy an existing style s symbols to one of the unused style numbers 6 9 and edit each library sy...

Page 255: ...style number associated with each style in the Program Files x86 Autodesk Acade version libs jic1 subdirectory To create a new style copy an existing style s symbols to one of the unused style numbers 6 9 and edit each library symbol Module Box Dimensions for Selected Style Sets the right left top and bottom offsets for the rectangle that surrounds the module The optional Split Top and Split Botto...

Page 256: ... when the module is highlighted in the tree structure of the PLC Selection dialog box These include Describes the PLC module being defined Description Gives an abbreviated type to the PLC module Module Type Specifies whether the PLC module addressing follows an industry standard Select from Octal Decimal Hexadecimal and Prompt Base Addressing Prompt asks you at module insertion time for Octal Deci...

Page 257: ...defining up to nine prompts to be used at the time of module insertion You can specify the prompt number and the accompanying text or you can remove prompts from this dialog box Prompts at module insertion time Use this to define up to nine prompts to be used at the time of module insertion You can specify the prompt number and the accompanying text or you can remove prompts from this dialog box A...

Page 258: ...lues or partial attribute values at module insertion time Modify single stand alone PLC layout symbols The single stand alone PLC I O symbols are in the Program Files x86 Autodesk Acade version libs jic1 library or Program Files x86 Autodesk Acade version libs jic125 library but do not follow the normal AutoCAD Electrical naming convention Their file names must start with PLCIO in order for AutoCA...

Page 259: ... right PLCIOI2 dwg First output wire right PLCIOO1T dwg 2 output wire right PLCIOO1 dwg First output wire left and right PLCIOO2T dwg 2 output wire left and right PLCIOO2 dwg Modify single stand alone PLC layout symbols 247 ...

Page 260: ...ow for the 2nd through nth points of a module which are children symbols of the first symbol par ent 4 Add or edit any information in the Edit PLC I O Point dialog box and click OK Annotate stand alone I O points The Edit PLC I O Point dialog displays when a stand alone I O point symbol is inserted or edited Use this dialog to make changes to your selected I O point 1 Click the Insert Component to...

Page 261: ...ent Select to insert a PLC I O point Specify the insertion point on the drawing Address Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I O address and if found uses the PLC address number in the compon ent s tag name I O Address Lists any I O addresses already assigned Select a tag from the list to copy or to increment for this new component Used Drawing or Project Transfers all information from t...

Page 262: ...n to the selected cable Data base queries are set up in the 3 lists across the top of the dialog with the database hits listed in the dialog s main window Substitutes a fixed text string for the F part of the tag format Retag Component can then use this override format value to calculate a Options new tag for the PLC module For example a certain PLC module needs to always have an IO family tag val...

Page 263: ...ns Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the module Show Edit Miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes Ratings Specifies values for each ratings attribute You can enter up to 12 ratings attributes on a module Select Defaults to display a list of default values NOTE If Ratings is grayed out the module you are editing do...

Page 264: ...b dialog box when you prepare to select and insert a new PLC module Add a new PLC style The icon menu graphics that display for the various PLC styles are bitmap files saved to your Program Files x86 Autodesk Acade version Acade folder where AutoCAD Electrical s Insert PLC and Drawing Properties tools can access them 1 Create the new style in AutoCAD 2 Zoom in to the new PLC style 3 Save the file ...

Page 265: ...below Module data This can be the code for a parametrically generated module or for a full module s library symbol It can even be a non PLC symbol such as a variable speed drive Module part numbers Code The I O address for each I O point This value gets annot ated to the TAGA_ attribute Address ADDR The module s rack number used for the attribute assigned to the 1 Prompt from the parametric data f...

Page 266: ...s There are some special values that can be placed in a row to direct special PLC module features Insert this keyword in the ADDRESS column of the spreadsheet where you want the PLC module to break and continue on the next ladder BREAK column There should not be any other data in the spreadsheet row only the word BREAK in the address column Insert this keyword in the ADDRESS column of the spreadsh...

Page 267: ...terminal s TAG ID value from the terminal number to be applied to the TERM attribute For example TB1 25 in the component tag column puts TB1 on the TAGSTRIP attribute and 25 on the TERM attribute The values assigned to the component s DESC attributes Use the symbol to separate text and assign it to DESC1 DESC2 or DESC3 Description DnDESC For example if you use CYCLE START in the description field ...

Page 268: ...jumper you encode the jumper as one of the available inline devices Use the character as the symbol block name for the jumper To control removal of wire connections follow the character with 4 characters to cover upper left upper right lower left and lower right connections Use W to keep the wire connection and X to remove For example a block name of WWXW inserts a jumper and trims the lower left ...

Page 269: ...use for the ladder reference numbers 5 Specify how you want the module to be placed in the drawing 6 Click Start AutoCAD Electrical constructs a set of PLC I O drawings based on the information carried in the PLC spreadsheet Ladders and modules insert automatically breaking at the bottom of one ladder and continuing on the next Change and use PLC I O settings You have control over many aspects of ...

Page 270: ...ou can also define the module placement style scale and in line device placement and spacing Click Browse to select an existing setting file that you can then edit and save Click Setup then click Spreadsheet Table Columns to define what column in your spreadsheet or database table goes with what data value in the utility The first page of this dialog deals with the overall module information The s...

Page 271: ...agrams directly from your data Ladders and modules insert automatically breaking at the bottom of one ladder and continuing on the next or on to the next drawing Access Click the arrow on the Insert PLC Parametric tool to access the Spreadsheet PLC I O Utility tool Select the spreadsheet output file and click Open From the Components menu select Insert PLC Modules Spreadsheet to PLC I O Utility Se...

Page 272: ...dsheet to PLC I O Utility Setup dialog box Use this to modify and save new setting configurations NOTE If you select the wdi file to use after you make changes in the Spreadsheet to PLC I O Utility Setup dialog box the settings in the wdi file are used and the setup changes are not applied Ladder Reference Numbering Specifies the value for the beginning line reference number for the first ladder o...

Page 273: ...ons leaves these out and the module is built without showing these terminal connections Select this to include the connections in the PLC module If you select to place modules within the same ladder enter the number of rungs to skip between modules NOTE When a module is selected that contains some of these terminals they are included if you select this option If you want to show these connections ...

Page 274: ...un completely to the end without stopping NOTE When you select Pause Between Drawings a single drawing is generated and then a dialog box opens allowing you to adjust settings select to do a free run or continue with a pause between drawings The Use active drawing option is disabled If your ladders use the AutoCAD Electrical Sheet parameter you can enter a value for the optional sheet number Sheet...

Page 275: ...ully edit the values near the top of the file Ladder Specifies the insertion point for first or only ladder on the drawing This corresponds to the upper left hand corner of the ladder Origin Specifies to create a vertical bus ladder with horizontal wires or horizontal bus ladder with vertical wires Orientation Specifies the default referencing system Reference numbers Numbers Only Numbers Ruling U...

Page 276: ...tical ladders insert left to right Horizontal ladders insert top to bottom Ladders per drawing Specifies the quantity of line reference wire rungs per ladder This value multiplied by the Spacing ladder rung Rungs per ladder to rung value determines the length of the inserted lad ders Specifies the distance from one rung to the next rung on a ladder Rung spacing Specifies the quantity of rungs to s...

Page 277: ...rom the upper horizontal bus NOTE If module type cannot be determined or if it is combination Input and Output then the module is inserted down the middle of the lad der Specifies the maximum number of module I O points to insert into each ladder without breaking the module and continuing it in the next ladder Maximum I O per ladder Specifies the insertion point offset distance between one in line...

Page 278: ...or reviewing and mapping spreadsheet columns to attributes on the PLC module symbol DrawingTemplate You can force the tool to use a specific template for new drawings Enter the template drawing file name with the full path or click Browse to search for an existing template this looks in the AutoCAD template folder where all of the user drawing templates are saved For the current default template l...

Page 279: ... box you can omit PLC cards reserve future locations for PLC cards in drawings and browse to select a PLC code from the PLC database Once you modify the eas file and apply the PLC data to categories you can save the data into a PLC import spreadsheet that is used to create the PLC drawing files Export I O information using RSLogix Use this to create a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file from a RSLogi...

Page 280: ...d click Change In the RSLogix 500 Import Change Module dialog box change the selected module part number by entering the new module name in the edit box selecting it from the PLC dialog using Browse or selecting it from the already used list once you have some modules selec ted Click OK to assign the module and return to the Input Module dialog box 9 Optional Click Omit to skip a set of points or ...

Page 281: ...6pt or 32 pt groupings 8pt 16pt or 32 pt slot addressing Specifies to display the module in octal or decimal format Default to Displays the I O modules already picked for each set of I O points Enter the module name in the edit box Module assignment so far select it from the PLC dialog box using Browse or select it from the already used list once you have some modules selected Click OK to assign t...

Page 282: ...nts and adds information so AutoCAD Electrical will add a blank column when generating the drawing from the spreadsheet Future Create PLC drawings from Unity Pro AutoCAD Electrical imports Unity Pro XML files to aid in the creation of various types of PLC and Panel Layout drawings in the active project Unity Pro supports numerous Schneider Electrical PLC cards PLC racks power supplies and various ...

Page 283: ...the xhw file i e Local Quantum Bus Bus Number ID displays the number of the bus and is specified in the position element of the xhw file i e Bus 1 The Rack Location node consists of descriptions location information and a catalog number Rack Location and Catalog Number node Example Rack 1 1 1 140XBP0600 Rack Description displays the description of the rack and is spe cified in the family element o...

Page 284: ...r PLC I O devices to AutoCAD Electrical schematic symbol names Syntax Value in Custom Field Symbol Block File Name Example PBNO HPB11 PBNC HPB12 PB NC HPB12 2POS HSS112 3POS HSS113 The comment fields marked with at the top of the file are used for information The custom field supports spaces in the string and wild cards NOTE The distance the remote component is located from the PLC and hot bus rai...

Page 285: ... configuration file in the project browser and select Export 2 Enter a file name for the xhw file and click Export 3 Right click the Variables FB Instances file in the project browser and select Export 4 Enter a file name for the xsy file and click Export NOTE We recommend that you export the files into the same location as the AutoCAD project wdp file If the export was successful the Unity Pro co...

Page 286: ...e whether to include inner or outer terminals You then need to select whether to place the terminal symbol names in every row or only those that have a defined I O point In the Hardware File section select the module to modify The data relative to the I O variable file for the selected module displays in the I O Variable File section of the dialog box If you select a module that does not have addr...

Page 287: ...n prompted to create an equipment list spreadsheet file You can save this file in xls mdb preferred or csv format The suggested file name is the name of the hardware import file with the suffix Equipment Access Click the arrow on the Insert PLC Parametric tool to access the Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet tool Select to open a Unity Pro hardware configuration xhw file and a Unity Pro I O configura...

Page 288: ... only I O modules includes modules that are not PLC I O modules the entire rack is removed from the tree structure If a rack node contains modules with and without I O addressing those that don t have I O addresses are removed Defines a terminal symbol to be placed into the spreadsheet on the inner side of the in line compon Include inner terminals ent between the I O point and the in line compon ...

Page 289: ...the I O variable file created from Unity Pro xsy displays at the top of this section of the dialog box Displays a list of the I O variables found inside of the Unity Pro I O Variable export file xsy This remains I O variable file grid empty if the selected module does not have ad dresses such as power supplies and CPUs All I O points for the respective PLC card display in the grid including those ...

Page 290: ...e symbol name The symbol name is derived from the value in the Custom field of the Unity Pro data and the symbol file name that it is mapped to in the mapping file Device Tag Displays the tag value If left blank the normal tagging method for parent compon ents is followed while children components re main untagged Click in the column to enter a value or right click to copy cut or paste a value int...

Page 291: ...or the rows that are defined with I O addresses Select All Defined I O single selection only Cuts the selected value de scription symbol name or device tag Cut Copies the selected value from one or more grid cells Copy Pastes in the selected value from one or more grids into the selected grid s Paste Selects all inner terminals in the grid Apply Terminal Inner Selects all outer terminals in the gr...

Page 292: ...the required for bidirectional updates NOTE These values are maintained on the PLC module If you delete the module from the drawing the variable name and type are also removed Variable names and types are created for new I O addresses for import back into Unity Pro During the AutoCAD Electrical import process the rest of the addressing is filled in based on the available I O points on the module T...

Page 293: ...ame and click Save By default the file is saved in the My Documents folder AutoCAD Electrical suggests a file name for the XML export file depending on whether you are creating the file for the project or the active drawing Unity Pro export This tool creates the Unity Pro I O variable file xsy in the Unity Pro XML format The XML file contains the PLC I O addresses and descriptions for import into ...

Page 294: ...282 ...

Page 295: ...ert from catalog lists Use the schematic lookup file Insert from panel lists Manipulate Components Swap contact states Check coil contact count Follow signals Insert dashed link lines Overview of DIN Rails Edit schematic lookup files Overview of user data records Component Cross References Circuits Wire Jumpers 6 283 ...

Page 296: ... component type from the left hand list The menu s right hand column is the Dyna stack It displays the last six components inserted during the current editing session Click Previous to display the last submenu from which a component was inserted or Used to display a list of recently inserted components 6 Specify the insertion point in the drawing The orientation of the symbol tries to match the un...

Page 297: ...in menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure Tabs Menu Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view Up one level Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view Views Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used wi...

Page 298: ... only the default value is 10 Display Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation This is opposite the drawing s default ladder rung orientation Vertical Horizontal Turns off the Insert Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing To add component detail later click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit No edit dialog Inserts the component un...

Page 299: ... Menu tree structure view to display the following options Expand Collapse Toggles the visibility of the menus Properties Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name image or submenu title Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties Options for the Symbol Preview window Right click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview windo...

Page 300: ... the project the relationship must be established prior to editing The steps to link the new component with related components are 1 Insert a new component and change the component tag as needed 2 Click OK and insert the component on the drawing 3 Right click the component and select Edit Component 4 Change the description catalog data and so on as needed 5 Click OK In the Update Related Component...

Page 301: ...ct Properties Project Settings dialog box This temporarily disables the warning dialog box for the current session of AutoCAD Electrical It alerts you of the duplication and suggests alternative tag names based on the user defined format You can select whether to use the duplicated tag or use a new tag that is suggested or you can type in a new tag NOTE An error log file is created for every proje...

Page 302: ...g a previous one was made during the current editing session Lists the manufacturer number for the component Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup Manufacturer Lists the catalog number for the component Enter a value or se lect one from the Catalog lookup Catalog Lists the assembly code for the component The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together Assembly Specif...

Page 303: ... from the dialog list External file You can pull catalog assignments from a gen eric ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spreadsheet or database program A dialog box displays the contents of the selected text file Find and highlight the ap propriate entry AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks it into its component parts These are dis played in the l...

Page 304: ... a component on the current drawing Pick If a symbol does not have the DESC1 3 attributes the description edit boxes are dimmed If you want to put descriptions on fuse symbols or other symbols without these attributes open the fuse library symbols in AutoCAD Electrical and add the DESC1 DESC2 and DESC3 attribute definitions Fuse symbol file names are HFU dwg and VFU dwg Cross Reference Overrides t...

Page 305: ...s A quick read of all the current or selected drawing file is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned Select from the list to automatically update the component with the location code Assign short location codes to components like PNL and FIELD so you can extract cable from to reports and location specific BOM reports later For example BOM for all field cables BOM for all PNL cab...

Page 306: ...catalog data and so on as needed 5 Click OK In the Update Related Components dialog box click Yes Update to update the related components with your changes or click Skip to just update the component you edited Access Click the Insert Component tool Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing Click Components Insert Component Select the component type to inser...

Page 307: ...gs appear in the edit box To define the component tag edit the existing tag or type a specific tag in the edit box Select Fixed if you don t want this tag to be updated on a retag If you enter an existing component tag during the insert edit process a warning dialog box displays This alerts you of the duplication and suggests alternative tag names based on the user defined format You can select wh...

Page 308: ...ent on the current drawing Pick Catalog Data You can do a drawing wide or project wide listing of similar components with their catalog assignments During your editing session the last MFG CAT ASSYCODE assignment for each component type you insert into your wiring diagram is remembered When you insert another component of that type the previous component s catalog assignment is set as the default ...

Page 309: ...ce of the selec ted component and returns the component values Previous Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current drawing Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the project Project Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selec ted component You can add up to 10 part numbers to Multiple Catalog any component These multiple BOM part number...

Page 310: ...dit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes Pins Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically located on the component For Connectors Once a connector is inserted onto the drawing file s block definition you can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector Displays pairs of pins in the first column the plug pin values in the second column and the recept...

Page 311: ...where n is the sequential code value 01 through 10 selected in the top list box If these attributes are not present on the symbols AutoCAD Electrical saves the information as Extended Entity Data Xdata on the symbol s block insert Sequential code Adds up to 99 extra part numbers in addition to the main catalog part number Pick which one you want to add or inspect edit Click the list button to show...

Page 312: ...ly performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result Multiple catalog part number assignments This displays the order in which the extra part numbers will appear in the various AutoCAD Electrical reports You can add up to 99 additional part number assignments to a component Access On the Insert Edit Component or Panel Layout Component Insert Edit dialog box Catalog Data section click Multi...

Page 313: ...scription Sort Shows all parent components for related family codes in the project Default Show parent stand alone references Shows the children along with the parent for related family codes in the project Show child references Shows all devices from all families in the project Show all components for all families Displays all panel components Show all panel components Makes changes on the curren...

Page 314: ...mat family override AutoCAD Electrical provides a way to override a component tag but still update the reference number portion on a re tag Access From the Components menu select Edit Component and click the Options button in the Component Tag area You can substitute a fixed text string for the F part of the tag format for a component Re tag can then use the override format value to calculate a ne...

Page 315: ...ick one of the buttons next to the attribute name to assign the value to Overwrites the existing value in the edit box with the selected value Overwrite Adds the selected value to the edit box The value is appended to any existing value Add Descriptions Standard Description lists can be created in ASCII text files with a WDD file extension You may create project related list component family lists...

Page 316: ...ng text in description lines 2 and 3 is left untouched i e inserting dual language descriptions OK Description 1 Inserts the selected text into line Description 2 Any existing text in description lines 1 and 3 is left untouched OK Description 2 Inserts the selected text into line Description 3 Any existing text in description lines 1 and 2 is left untouched OK Description 3 Select description from...

Page 317: ...ily wdd file if not already displayed For example if the component has the family code PB for Family pushbuttons and a file called PB WDD exists it displays when you click Family Displays a generic file WD_DESC WDD if not already dis played Generic Select description text format Specifies how to handle description text in the selected language Access Click the Edit Component tool and select the co...

Page 318: ...ines above and click OK Description 1 the description text displays in de scription lines 1 and 2 in the Insert Edit Component dialog box Inserts selected description text into the component s second description text line leaving any existing text in lines 1 and 3 as is OK Description 2 Inserts text starting at the component s second description text line leaving any existing text in the 1st line ...

Page 319: ... and potential reference line number where the connector definition is located in the project Sheet Reference Displays the contact type for example NO or NC This is the value carried by the component s CONTACT attribute If no Type attribute is present or this attribute is blank then this field will be blank Displays the pin numbers already in use in the project Pins Displays the wire numbers carri...

Page 320: ...tool to insert a series of similar components at fence crossing points with underlying wires 1 Click the Multiple Insert Component tool 2 Select the component type from the Insert Component Schematic Symbols dialog box 3 Select the component from the selection dialog box 4 Select a point above the first wire that you want to process 5 Select a point below the final wire for processing and then rig...

Page 321: ...n be manually typed into the edit box or selected from a drawing wide or project wide list of similar components If the parent is visible on the screen click Parent Sibling and select the parent or another related contact This transfers all information automatically to the child contact being inserted or edited Ratings Specifies values for each ratings attribute You can enter up to 12 ratings attr...

Page 322: ... and component lists Location Code Changes the location code s You can search the current drawing or entire project for location codes A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the location code Assigning short location codes to components like PNL and FIELD al...

Page 323: ... update the component with the installation code Assign short installation codes to components like PNL and FIELD so you can create location specific BOM and component lists later Location Changes the location codes You can search the current drawing or entire project for location codes A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of location codes used so far is re...

Page 324: ...st of default values NOTE If Ratings is grayed out the component you are editing does not carry any rating attributes Show Edit Miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes Cross reference AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross reference text when the cross reference command is run Pins Assigns pin numbers to the pins that are physically ...

Page 325: ...o create a new record If the new record is similar to an existing record highlight the existing record before you click Add Modify the record in the Add Record dialog box and click OK 7 Click OK 8 Specify an insertion point in the active drawing 9 Make any changes in the Insert Edit Component dialog box and click OK Schematic component or panel footprint Inserts schematic or panel symbols by choos...

Page 326: ...ical or Panel Layout toolbar Specifies how to sort the record list You can sort by description catalog number or manufacturer code Sort by Opens a dialog box for creating a new record If the footprint block is not in an AutoCAD or an AutoCAD Electrical search path include Add the part of the path that needs to be appended to one of these search paths or you can enter the full path If the new recor...

Page 327: ...a circuit Minimum of Block Name and either Description or Catalog Block Assembly Circuit The Block value can be a symbol name or AutoLISP expression If the footprint block is not in an AutoCAD search path or an AutoCAD Electrical search path include the part of the path that needs to be appended to one of these search paths or enter the full path to the footprint block Use Browse to locate the blo...

Page 328: ...tic lookup file maps catalog information from a panel component or equipment list to a specific schematic component library symbol AutoCAD Electrical supplies a starter lookup file called schematic_lookup mdb in Access mdb file format Within the database file are tables based on Manufacturer codes When you select a panel footprint from an AutoCAD Electrical extract file or select a panel footprint...

Page 329: ...in the list for you Fields may be blank and may use wildcards with the exception of SCHEMATIC_BLKNAM Each record consists of these fields in this order Manufacturer name same as attribute value MANUFACTURER Catalog part number CATALOG Assembly code part number link ASSEMBLYCODE Assigned description text DESC1 DESC3 FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION Block name of the panel footprint insert PANEL_BLKNAM Blank fo...

Page 330: ...f terminal symbols for terminal numbers while the W displays a list of terminal symbols for wire number terminals When multiple block name choices are returned they are displayed in a pick list along with any comments from each matching record If a match is not found or if matches are found and you choose not to use any of them the displayed Insert dialog box offers several other options You can P...

Page 331: ...odify the default settings Modify the settings or click OK to continue with the insert using the default settings Read Settings Select the file wde to read the settings from and click Open 7 Optional Click Spreadsheet Table columns to define the order of the data in the selected equipment list file On the Equipment List Spreadsheet Settings dialog box assign column numbers to the data categories s...

Page 332: ...et organizes the selected user created equipment list and presents the list in a pick list As you pick an item from the pick list the appropriate schematic symbol is found and inserted in the drawing at your pick point Your equipment list can be an AutoCAD Electrical generated Component report or it can be a list of motors giving horsepower and starter type along with motor ID and descriptions NOT...

Page 333: ...ing the schematic_lookup mdb It inserts the schematic components at your pick point Each line or record in the equipment list represents a single entry into the Equipment in dialog box for schematic component selection The quantity for a selected catalog number is not considered when inserting schematic components You can select to insert a single schematic component or multiple components from th...

Page 334: ...the schematic Use Equipment List TAG Scale Specifies the block insert scale 1 0 full Vertical Changes the default drawing orientation Insert Finds and inserts a schematic component for the highlighted equipment list component The query of the schematic_lookup mdb file returns one or more block names based on data that appears in the pick list The results are displayed in the Insert dialog box alon...

Page 335: ...u from which you can select the schematic component to insert This is different than the schematic symbols Icon Menu in the list and should not be considered another way to select the same components Copies a just like components and annotates it with the panel data Copy Component Insert from panel lists Insert components or terminals from panel lists After the schematic component is selected and ...

Page 336: ... 7 On the Panel Components or Panel Terminals dialog box select from the list of panel components terminals to insert the schematic symbol on the schematic drawing To modify the pick list so you can easily find the component or terminal to select click Sort List Display or Mark Existing 8 Click Insert 9 On the Insert dialog box select which block name to insert from the list If you want to insert ...

Page 337: ...and then save Uses a previous project s panel component list to create a spreadsheet listing After the initial extrac tion a list of panel components displays for selection Browse Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values Once you pick Named Installation Codes to extract Installations you can type the installation code in the box or click List Drawing or List P...

Page 338: ...edit and then save Uses a previous project s terminal list to create a spreadsheet listing After the initial extraction a list of terminals displays for selection Browse Extracts only the information for panel terminals with specific installation values Once you pick Named Installation Codes to extract Installation you can type the installation code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project...

Page 339: ...onents You can specify four sorts to perform on the list Reload Reopens the Panel Layout List Schematic Components Insert dialog box so you can re extract data or select a saved external file to use Mark Existing Matches panel components extracted from the project database with schematic components previously placed into the drawing and marks any existing components An x displays in left hand colu...

Page 340: ...ted tag The active drawing is automatically updated while up dates on other drawings are maintained inside of the update task file project_name upd for later modific ation of the panel drawings to match the new schematic component tag Maintains the tag as defined in the panel component listing and sets the tag to fixed in the schematic Use panel footprint TAG Scale Specifies the block insert scale...

Page 341: ...Select Project and click OK Select the files to process and click OK From the Components menu select Insert Terminal Panel List Select Project and click OK Select the files to process and click OK Sorts the list of panel terminals You can specify four sorts to perform on the list Sort List Reopens the Panel Terminal List Schematic Terminals Insert dialog box so you can re extract data or select a ...

Page 342: ...he results are displayed in the Insert dialog box along with a short description of each choice Specifies to pick a file for the insert Select an existing AutoCAD Electrical extracted panel terminal list file or extract a fresh copy of panel component data from the current project s database Pick File Manipulate components You can manipulate components by moving stretching splitting aligning or de...

Page 343: ...and wire numbers re centered if necessary You can align vertically or horizontally by flipping the command with a V or H character and a space entered on the command line NOTE The Align Component command can be used on panel layout symbols Move components The Move Component command removes the selected component from its current location wire connection and inserts it into the new position you pic...

Page 344: ... then reinsert the components redo the wiring etc or you could use the Stretch PLC Module command NOTE The block name itself is changed to make it unique Split PLC modules The Split PLC Module command is especially handy for splitting PLC modules once they have been built or inserted Maybe you need to move the last few I O terminal points to another ladder to make room for some other devices Manip...

Page 345: ...tes the selected items 3 Move your cursor to the appropriate position and click The items scoot and reconnect NOTE You can run the Auto Retag operation on the components if they move to a new line reference or update the child cross references only Align components wire numbers 1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Align Compon ents tool 2 Click the Align Components tool 3 Select the m...

Page 346: ... move 4 Select the insertion point for the move The component automatically moves to the selected position Stretch PLC modules 1 Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Stretch PLC Module tool 2 Click the Stretch PLC Module tool 3 Select the blocks to stretch using a crossing window or crossing polygon window 4 Press Enter 5 Select your base and second point of displacement The exploded bl...

Page 347: ...gged lines or draw it 7 Optional Select to reposition the child block to move it as part of this command 8 Click OK 9 To reposition the child block select a point on the screen to place the block Split block Use this tool to split blocks or parametric connectors into 2 separate block definitions for example parent and a child or a child and another child Access Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to...

Page 348: ...coordinates or click Pick Point and select the origin point on the draw ing Specifies the break type no lines straight lines jagged lines or draw it The default is set to jagged lines Click Draw to manually draw the break type on the drawing Break Type Specifies the layer for the child block You can accept the default or click List to select the layer from a list of existing layers Layer Specifies...

Page 349: ... may create multiple WDR files AutoCAD Electrical will look for a generic defaults file called WD_RATINGS WDR stored in the AutoCAD Electrical support directory You may also create a project specific file with the same name and path as the project with the WDR extension You may also have Family specific files named for the Family code of the component with the WDR extension For example if the comp...

Page 350: ... project WDD file if it is not already displayed Project Displays family specific files named for the Family code of the component For example if the component has the family code Family PB for pushbuttons and a file called PB WDD exists it will display when you select the Family button Displays a generic file WD_DESC WDD if it is not already dis played Generic Adds a new file to the rating defaul...

Page 351: ... only Reverse flip component This tool reverses or flips selected component graphics and its associated attributes NOTE This tool only operates on a component with 2 wire connections for example limit switch contact symbol Access Click the arrow on the Scoot tool to access the Reverse Flip Component tool From the Components menu select Reverse Flip Component Reverses the component graphics and the...

Page 352: ...tact If the maximum contact counts are carried by the parent symbol the maximum counts are checked so that they are not exceeded by the flip Check coil contact count Using the Cross Reference Check tool Components Cross Reference Cross Reference Check AutoCAD Electrical first extracts a complete list of components from the project drawing set Then it prompts you to select a component to check Auto...

Page 353: ...component N C references Lists the number of normally closed contacts assigned to the selected component Other references Lists the number of child devices that are neither NO or NC contacts These may include pins of a connector form C contacts or general devices that are being referenced Reference listing Lists the type number location installation and description text for the reference Parent In...

Page 354: ...arker to list The signal code dialog box ap pears All source and destination references for the signal code are listed in the three boxed groups 4 Review the references for the signal code 5 Click the Surf button to navigate to any of the references 6 Click Cancel when you are finished reviewing the signal refer ences Signal code Follows a signal from a specific source or destination symbol and li...

Page 355: ...roups Shows the references on upstream previous drawings Previous drawings sheet reference Shows the references on the current drawing Current drawing Shows references on downstream next draw ings Downstream drawings sheet reference Navigates to any of the references Surf Follow signals 343 ...

Page 356: ...ne Wire Layers dialog box 6 Optional Use the AutoCAD Layer command to assign a dif ferent line type to the layer 7 Optional Use the Scoot command to reposition any jog in the dashed link line 8 Optional Use the AutoCAD Erase command to remove the dashed link line Overview of DIN Rails The Din Rail is generated based on data held in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet called WDDINRL XLS Each row in the m...

Page 357: ...center line and the slot centers used for nonsymmetrical din rails RAILCEN2 Distance from the origin of the din rail to the center of the slots used for off center din rails RAIL2SLOTCEN Distance from the origin of the din rail to the din rail bot tom used for off center din rails RAIL2ENDBASE Standard length of din rail RAILLENSTD Minimum length of rail piece RAILLENMIN Distance from the beginnin...

Page 358: ... button is enabled and you can select standoff brackets BRKT Name of AutoCAD block for standoff bracket BRKT_NAME Manufacturer for standoff bracket Added as Multi BOM on the created Din Rail block BRKT_MFG Catalog number for standoff bracket Added as Multi BOM on the created Din Rail block BRKT_CAT Assembly code for standoff bracket Added as Multi BOM on the created Din Rail block BRKT_ASMB Name u...

Page 359: ... wire way from the list Line properties There may be times that you want to specify a Color Linetype or Layer for a particular line entity that makes up the Din Rail You can do this with a few optional spreadsheet fields For the 2 end lines you add 2 columns in your spreadsheet each called END_PROP The first one is for the left end the second is for the right end The format is COLOR colorname LAYE...

Page 360: ...information is entered and you click OK the Din Rail is generated Each Din Rail section is created as a separate block If you selected Standoff brackets each bracket is a separate block Some AutoCAD Electrical information is added to each block so it can be treated as an AutoCAD Electrical Panel entity The AutoCAD Electrical edit dialog appears for the first Din Rail section and the first bracket ...

Page 361: ...ing text 5 Optional Click Filter to filter the listing based on certain values in the table After you define the values to filter apply the filter in the database editing window 6 Decide if you want to edit an existing record or add a new one If you decide to edit an existing record select the record to edit and click Edit on the Edit dialog box or double click the record in the list If you decide...

Page 362: ...rm on the list Sort Specifies the value to find and then jumps to the next occurrence of the specified text This searches in a specific column or in the entire table Find Indicates to replace the find value with the new text string that you specify Replace Filters the listing based on certain values in the table Picking the blank entry in the list removes the filter for that field After you define...

Page 363: ...number link ASSEMBLYCODE Optional Assigned description text DESC1 DESC3 FUNCTION_DESCRIPTION Block name of the panel footprint insert PANEL_BLKNAM Blank for component queries T or W for terminal queries CATEGORY Name used to tie into catalog lookup table ex PB11 CR WDBLKNAM Schematic symbol block name or special insert command flag Click Command List to add a command rather than a single block nam...

Page 364: ...ecord is tracked on the entity by entity handle plus a three digit record number beginning at 000 This same information is automatically maintained project wide by AutoCAD Electrical in the user table of the project s database file Edit user table data You can add edit or remove free form user data records attached to the selected block insert These records are stored in a user database table in t...

Page 365: ...e family to be cross referenced but they must have the same TAG1 TAG2 TAG_ TAG attribute values Cross reference data is annotated onto attributes REFNO and XREFNC for N O and N C references respectively Alternately if attribute XREF is present both N O and N C references are combined into a single cross reference text string Insert stand alone cross reference symbols You use stand alone cross refe...

Page 366: ...symbol to insert 4 Specify the insertion point on the drawing 5 On the Stand alone Source Cross Reference Symbol dialog box specify the unique name for the source destination pair You can select the code From a list of recently used codes From a list of codes on the active drawing From a list of codes in the active project From a destination cross reference symbol 6 Click OK Create stand alone cro...

Page 367: ...ponent This icon menu can be modified expanded or replaced with your own custom menu You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project Properties Project Settings dialog box Select Projects Project Project Manager Right click the project name and select Properties Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu The default icon menu can also be re...

Page 368: ...tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file dat The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus defined in the dat file Menu Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure Symbol Preview window Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined by the da...

Page 369: ... the previously used menu each time you open the Insert Component dialog box For example if you insert a Always display previously used menu push button from the Push Buttons menu the next time you open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default Specifies the component block insertion scale This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties Drawing Format dialog...

Page 370: ...window and Recently Used window The current view option is indicated with a check mark Options include Icon with text Icon only or List view Properties available for icons only Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name image block names and so on Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties Pneumatic Hydraulic and P ID icon menus The Men...

Page 371: ...s reference component to insert and place it on the drawing Specifies the unique name for the source destination pair This links each source cross reference symbol to its destination cross reference symbols Code for Hexagon symbols only Displays the sheet Drawing Property value for the drawing the matching symbol Sheet Displays the line reference value for the matching symbol Reference Provides a ...

Page 372: ...d destination arrow symbol Update source destination cross refer ences Makes the wire number tags on the destination end match the wire number carried on the source end of each wire signal pair Update source destination wire number tags Stand Alone Cross Reference Symbols Set up the desired cross reference format in the Cross Reference Format section of the Drawing Properties Cross Reference dialo...

Page 373: ...g tool 3 Select the objects whose cross referencing you want to hide or display Single selection window selection or multiple se lection is allowed 4 Right click to end the selection and apply the command Insert a dashed link line This tool draws a smart dashed line between stacked contacts of a multicontact component When the dashed link line inserts the TAG2 and DESC attributes of the 2nd throug...

Page 374: ...ot command to reposition any jog in the dashed link line 5 Optional To remove a dashed link line run the command again selecting in the same order as before The dashed line toggles off and the hidden attribute annotation reappears Overview of cross reference settings Cross reference settings are supported at the project drawing and component level Settings are maintained inside of the project defi...

Page 375: ...cing the component on the drawing During normal operation of cross referencing commands AutoCAD Electrical looks to the component for its settings information prior to using the drawing settings If the component has settings defined those are used In the event that there are both component and drawing cross reference settings on the same drawing the component settings are used where applied and th...

Page 376: ... referencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line Table Format Displays cross referencing in a table object so you can define the columns to display 4 Specify the format for the cross reference display The Preview box displays an image that shows an example of the cross referencing format being defined 5 Selec...

Page 377: ...the same component Access Click the arrow on the Component Cross Reference tool to access the Copy Add Component Override tool From the Components menu select Cross Reference Copy Add Component Override NOTE You can also access this by selecting Components Insert Component Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing In the Insert Edit Component dialog box Cro...

Page 378: ...mat Displays cross referencing in a table object that automatically gets updated in real time while allowing you to define the columns to display Click Setup to display a dialog box for setting the display defaults for each component cross reference display format Remove component overrides You can apply overrides to a component so its settings override those of the drawing or project Use this too...

Page 379: ...ction select Text Format and click Setup NOTE You can also access this by selecting Components Insert Component Select the component type to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing In the Insert Edit Component dialog box Cross Reference section select Component override and click Setup In the Cross reference component override dialog box select Text Format and click Setup Format The ...

Page 380: ...would be displayed For example if you enter the text SP for spares SP displays in the referencing Displays the referencing in the order that the contacts are found in the project s line reference Cross Referencing Sorted by Line Refer ence Displays the referencing in the order that the Pin List is defined on the parent component This is sorted Cross Referencing Sorted by Pin List Order regardless ...

Page 381: ...es This setting is taken from drawing properties if there are no cross reference overrides specified on the inserted component IEC JIC The following example displays cross referencing next to the symbol in the graphic font format while the unused children contacts are displayed as separate references The Fill Reference With value is SP IEC JIC Contact Mapping Format Overview of graphical cross ref...

Page 382: ... section select Graphical Format and click Setup From the Projects menu select Project Project Manager In the Project Manager right click the project or drawing name and select Properties Click the Cross References tab In the component Cross Reference Display section select Graphical Format and click Setup NOTE You can also access this by selecting Components Insert Component Select the component ...

Page 383: ...n normally close and Form C contact types Displays the cross reference format using cross referencing type values NO NC NONC Enter the format into the edit boxes Contact Mapping Preview Displays an image that shows an example of the cross referencing format being defined Options Displays the child symbols that are not referenced or being used in the project pin list Display Unused Children Contact...

Page 384: ...look like in the drawing Below are examples of the table cross reference format Graphic Font Format Displays the cross reference format using a graphical font Select to use the JIC font or the IEC font The setting is applied to the graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties The following examples display the table cross referencing using the graphic font forma...

Page 385: ...ntacts 1 open and 1 closed where they share a common terminal pin number You can choose to display both of the Form C contacts as 2 individual symbols or together as one symbol Example where 2 symbols make up the Form C contact The common pin is on the right hand side next to the referencing column and displays in the P2 column of the table IEC JIC Overview of table cross reference formats 373 ...

Page 386: ...ng table automatically updates The table location is based on cross reference attributes but you can move the table to any location on the drawing and the table remains in the new position NOTE If you change the table setup once a table has been inserted onto the drawing you must run the Component Cross Reference tool to update the table Access Click the Project Manager tool In the Project Manager...

Page 387: ... GB JIS font The setting is applied to the Graphic Font graphical font regardless of the tagging mode assigned in the project properties The JIC image font style displays the cross refer encing using the JIC style normally open nor mally close and Form C contact types The IEC GB JIS image font style displays the cross referencing using the IEC style normally open normally close and Form C contact ...

Page 388: ... style and font of a table object There is always a table style on a drawing The standard table style cannot be deleted Various style drawing files that determine the drawing related settings are provided with AutoCAD Electrical The Table Styles drawing TableStyle dwg defines a series of table objects that are used in the selection process and then copied to the drawing files Select a table style ...

Page 389: ...wing and the cross reference table is subsequently updated If a component with a cross reference table is de leted the table is also deleted from the drawing Delete Component If a component is retagged retag move component move circuit edit component the cross reference table updates if the tag is part of the title Component Retag If a replaceable parameter is modified for a compon ent that has a ...

Page 390: ... Pin List data the cross reference table updates as soon as you exit out of the Insert Edit Component dialog box Additionally if you modify the Pin List manually on the parent component the cross reference table updates with the new pin numbers and the modified contact count once the Insert Edit Component dialog box is exited Commands that do not support real time cross reference updates include C...

Page 391: ...eferencing using the AutoCAD Electrical graphical font or using contact mapping edit boxes while displaying each reference on a new line Table Format Displays cross referencing in a table object so you can define the columns to display 4 Specify the format for the cross reference display The Preview box displays an image that shows an example of the cross referencing format being defined 5 Select ...

Page 392: ...ble to any location on the drawing and the table remains in the new position NOTE If you change the table setup once a table has been inserted onto the drawing you must run the Component Cross Reference tool to update the table Access Click the Project Manager tool In the Project Manager right click the project or drawing name and select Properties Click the Cross References tab In the component C...

Page 393: ... Form C contact types Displays the cross reference format using cross referencing type values NO NC NONC Enter the format into the edit boxes Contact Mapping See Learn about table cross reference formats page 368 for examples of the format styles Preview Displays an image that shows an example of the cross referencing format being defined Options Displays the parent component s reference informa t...

Page 394: ...the list The list initially displays table styles from the active drawing and the TableStyle dwg Click Browse to select a drawing with the desired table style Once selected the table style can be applied to the Table Styles drawing If the selected style does not exist on the TableStyle dwg it will be copied to it When a drawing is referenced the style is then copied from the TableStyle dwg Click D...

Page 395: ...to correct the error and then surf to the next one Component cross reference Cross referencing is based upon collecting and annotating groups of components that carry the same TAG text string value such as 101CR Components do not have to be of the same family to be cross referenced they just need to have the same TAG1 TAG2 TAG_ TAG attribute values Access Click the arrow on the Parent Child Cross ...

Page 396: ... Cross Reference Display section select Text Format and click Setup Real time cross reference update can be turned on or off on the Project Properties Cross References dialog box Use circuitry You can save groupings of components wires ladders and other entities as circuits Similar to blocks saved circuits are inserted as a single object Saved circuits save time when your projects require common a...

Page 397: ...e multiple copies of the selected circuit 6 Select the base point and then the second point for the copy NOTE If the circuit you copied contains any fixed wire numbers or component tags specify to keep them blank them out retag all of the found tags or keep all orphan contacts Move circuitry This tool moves the selected circuit to a specified location The components are automatically retagged base...

Page 398: ... Save circuit portions for later use Use this tool to save circuit portions for later use NOTE You can also use the AutoCAD WBLOCK command to save circuits to disk and then use the Insert Wblocked Circuit tool to insert the circuit 1 Zoom around the circuit to save so that it fills your screen 386 Chapter 6 Component Tools ...

Page 399: ...ove you can click Zoom on the Create New Circuit dialog box to zoom around the circuit to save 6 Click OK 7 Select the circuit s insertion base point 8 Window around the circuit from left to right capturing all of the appropriate components and wiring and press Enter AutoCAD Electrical processes the circuit and saves it to your AutoCAD Electrical user subdirectory NOTE You can overwrite the user s...

Page 400: ...select Add circuit 4 On the Add Existing Circuit dialog box specify Name of the icon Image file to use Make sure to select Create PNG from current screen image Existing circuit name 5 Click OK The existing circuit is added to the bottom of the symbol pre view window Insert circuits You can insert circuits you saved using the Save Circuit to Icon Menu tool or circuits that you saved using AutoCAD s...

Page 401: ...circuit 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Insert WBlocked Circuit tool 2 Click the Insert WBlocked Circuit tool 3 On the Insert WBlocked Circuit dialog box select the circuit you want to insert into the drawing and click Open 4 On the Circuit Scale dialog box click OK to use the defaults or specify a scale and then click OK 5 Specify the insertion point on the drawing Inse...

Page 402: ...from the Menu tree structure The main menu in the tree structure is displayed as the menu heading just above the menu tree structure Tabs Menu Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view Up one level Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view Views Changes the view display for the Symbol ...

Page 403: ...umbers only the default value is 10 Display Inserts the icon using a vertical or horizontal orientation This is opposite the drawing s default ladder rung orientation Vertical Horizontal Turns off the Insert Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing To add component detail later click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit No edit dialog Inserts the compon...

Page 404: ...e Menu tree structure view to display the following options Expand Collapse Toggles the visibility of the menus Properties Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing menu or submenu properties like the menu name image or submenu title Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties Options for the Symbol Preview window Right click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview wind...

Page 405: ...for later reuse Up to 24 circuits can be saved at any one time in this scratch menu You can change the user circuit menu number default is 19 by editing this command in the CUI editor TIP To get a good icon picture for the circuit button zoom in close to the circuit you plan to save so that it fills the screen Access Click the arrow on the Insert Circuit tool to access the Save Circuit to Icon Men...

Page 406: ... rarely used icons at the bottom of the window Symbol Preview right click menu Right click in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options View Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window The current view option is marked with a checkmark Options include Icon with text Icon only or List view Add Icon Adds new circuit icons or an existing circuit into the Sym...

Page 407: ...locked Circuit tool From the Components menu select Insert Saved Circuit or Insert WBlocked Circuit Specifies the insertion scale Custom scale Moves all non layer 0 line entities to a valid wire layer Move all lines to wire layers Indicates to not erase wire numbers if they are fixed Keep all fixed wire numbers Indicates to not erase the circuit s source arrows Keep all source arrows Updates the c...

Page 408: ... now jumpered together If you click Cancel the internal jumper data is not inserted NOTE You can keep jumpers from displaying in Wire From To reports by placing the jumpers on a layer that contains the substring JUMPER Add wire jumpers from a list 1 Select Components Component Miscellaneous Add Edit Internal Jumper 2 Select terminals from the list Drag your mouse to select contiguous terminals or ...

Page 409: ...s on a selected component When wire numbers are inserted these internal jumpers are read and wire numbers are assigned accordingly If you select to jumper two pins on a component together an alert displays indicating that internal jumpering will cause a conflict with the existing wire number assignments If you click Continue an internal jumper inserts between the two pins on the component you need...

Page 410: ... close to the terminal as you can AutoCAD Pick Electrical finds the closest connection terminal to your se lected point Displays the current jumper assignments AutoCAD Electric al draws temporary lines between the jumpered terminals These graphics disappear the next time you do a Regen Show Jumpers 398 Chapter 6 Component Tools ...

Page 411: ...rminal text Move description values Manipulate Attributes Set tags to fixed Retag components Change to multi line text Add location codes Update child codes Location Mark Symbols Location box Change attribute justification Change attribute text style Change attribute text size Modify library symbols Add attributes to blocks 7 399 ...

Page 412: ...pick point on a block insert 1 Click the arrow on the Edit Component tool to access the Edit Selected Attribute tool 2 Click the Edit Selected Attribute tool 3 Select the attribute to edit A dialog box displays and lets you type in a new attribute value 4 Enter a new attribute value in the Edit Attribute dialog box Click Pick to select another attribute whose text you want to use for the selected ...

Page 413: ...isting all of the component s attributes and their values 3 Check the Edit Attributes box in the upper right hand corner of the dialog box 4 Select the attribute you want to edit from the list A dialog box opens and lets you type in a new attribute value 5 Type in a new attribute value in the Edit Attribute dialog box You can click on the arrow keys to increment or decrement the attribute value 6 ...

Page 414: ... to access the Edit Selected Attribute tool From the Components menu select Attributes Edit Selected Attribute Specifies the attribute text You can click on the arrow keys to increment or decrement the attribute value Attribute value Selects another attribute whose text you want to use for the selected attribute Pick 402 Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools ...

Page 415: ...this is defined on the WD_M block s WIRENO_LAY attribute Click Terminals to change to the layer used for wire numbers on ter minals and source or destination signal arrows The default latyer is WIREREF this is defined on the WD_M block s WIREREF_LAY attribute 4 Click OK 5 Select the attributes to change to the target layer NOTE Windowing of attributes is not supported You must pick them individual...

Page 416: ...ist Forces the tool to change to the layer used for wire number text placed on wires The default layer is WIRENO this is defined on the WD_M block s WIRENO_LAY attribute Wires Forces the tool to change to the layer used for wire number text placed on terminals and source or destination signal Terminals arrows The default latyer is WIREREF this is defined on the WD_M block s WIREREF_LAY attribute 4...

Page 417: ...ocess and press Enter The Find Edit Replace dialog box displays allowing you to define your search and replace parameters 4 Click the Find check box next to the attribute you want to find 5 Enter the attribute value or click the List button to select the value from a list of current text values 6 Click the Replace check box for the selected attribute and type a new text string in the edit box 7 Se...

Page 418: ...mponent Text Select to process the drawing or project and click OK Specifies the value to find Initially only the Find F toggles are enabled Find Replaces the find value with the new text string that you specify Replace Displays a list of the current text values for the selected attribute Select from this list to define your find parameter List Replaces the text only if the entire text value match...

Page 419: ...ctive drawing or across the project drawing set Access Click the arrow on the Retag Components tool to access the Find Edit Replace Component Text tool From the Components menu select Component Tagging Find Edit Replace Component Text Decide if you want to run the component retag across selected components the active drawing or the entire project Manipulate component text 407 ...

Page 420: ...her the current drawing or the project and click OK If you chose to process the project select the drawings to process and add them to the Drawings to Process list Click OK to continue the operation If you chose to process the drawing by picks select the components to process and press Enter 8 The drawing or project set is scanned to find all the terminals and the current terminal text values The ...

Page 421: ... should be replaced First occurrence only Specifies the value you wish to find Find Specifies the text string to replace the find value with Replace with Move description values AutoCAD Electrical supports 3 lines of description text on schematic components If some only have 1 or 2 lines of description the description may seem to float too high above the device You can use these tools to move the ...

Page 422: ...es remain tied to the block inserts Hide attributes Pick on the graphic of a target block insert to display a listing of all attribute names and values You can toggle attributes between hidden and visible or you can edit individual attribute values 1 Select Components Attributes Hide Unhide Attribute Hide Attribute Single Picks or Hide Attribute Window Multiple 2 Select the attributes to hide or p...

Page 423: ...more attribute to flip to visible from the list 5 Click OK Rotate component attributes 1 Click the arrow on the Move Show Attribute tool to access the Rotate Attribute tool 2 Click the Rotate Attribute tool 3 Select the attribute text text or MTEXT string to rotate 90 degrees from its current orientation After rotation press M and space to flip into the Move Attrib ute mode Set tags to fixed Fix s...

Page 424: ...t click to accept the selection Single edit switch fixed unfixed Select the component to fix In the Fix Unfix Component Tag dialog box select Make it Fixed and click OK Fix tags project wide 1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Project Wide Utilities tool 2 Click the Project Wide Utilities tool 3 In the Project Wide Utilities dialog Component Tags section select Set all Pare...

Page 425: ...Run the AutoCAD Electrical Retag when something changes on your drawing or project that affects the component tags This can include revising the ladder line reference numbers or changing the tag format Retag redoes each selected primary component tag and then updates the related secondary components You can select to update a single component a group of components a drawing drawings within your pr...

Page 426: ...tool 2 Click the Change Cross Reference to Multiple Line Text tool 3 Select the text string to change 4 Type a new text string for the selected text Use the Text Formatting dialog box to change the text style and size You can also right click and select from the context menu options 5 Use the grips or double click on the text to bring up text formatting options to reformat the reference string int...

Page 427: ... the default location value for 5 Select Projects Drawing Properties 6 In the Drawing Properties Drawing Settings dialog box IEC Style Designators section enter a default Location value Click OK TIP You can click Drawing or Project to select a Location value that has already been used in either the active drawing or project The next time you insert a new component on this drawing the Location code...

Page 428: ...t 4 Click OK 5 Select the components to update in your drawing and right click or type ALL to process the entire drawing AutoCAD Electrical quickly extracts a listing of all parent components and pertinent codes from all drawings listed in the current project and applies these to the child contacts you selected on the active drawing Child contact and panel update from schematic parent This tool up...

Page 429: ...nk Specifies to update the child and panel components with the parent rating values Rating values Manufacturer Catalog part number values Specifies to update the child and panel components with the parent Manufacturer Catalog part number values Manufacturer Catalog part number values Specifies that the Manufacturer Catalog should al ways match the parent Manufacturer Catalog val ues Manufacturer C...

Page 430: ... on symbols that are identified with location code in text form Add a location code to a component If you try to insert a location mark symbol on a component with a blank location code you are prompted to enter the location code before selecting a 418 Chapter 7 Component Attribute Tools ...

Page 431: ...ist of location codes used on the drawing or in the project 4 Click OK Insert a location mark symbol 1 Click the Location Symbols tool 2 Select a component to add the symbol to and press Enter 3 From the Location Symbols dialog box select the symbol to associate with the component and click OK The attribute text turns to invisible and the location symbol inserts at its location You can reposition ...

Page 432: ...rompt 4 Enter Documents and Settings username Application Data Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical version wdxxsq1 sld as the file name to create 5 Click Save 6 Make a backup copy of Documents and Settings username Application Data Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical release country code Support wd_locs dat 7 Edit wd_locs dat with a text file editor such as Wordpad 8 Add the reference to the new mark symbol for e...

Page 433: ... symbols to menu You can create additional symbols if you wish Follow the WDXX naming convention and add to the icon menu as illustrated below The icon menu is driven by an ASCII text file wd_locs dat Edit this file to add references for your own location mark symbols You can also add additional submenu pages to the menu in a manner similar to that of the Insert Component icon menu file Example WD...

Page 434: ...ed box around selected components A description can be assigned to the box and components within the box can have their location and installation code s changed Access Click the drop down arrow on the Location Symbols tool to access the Location Box tool From the Components menu select Component Tagging Location Box Installation Location Codes Specifies the location code Location Specifies the ins...

Page 435: ...s the description text Box Description Specifies the description insertion point top bot tom left or right Description Insert Point Searches the active drawing for location box descrip tions Drawing Indicates for the description to use the location and installation values Use Location Installation Picks a description from a component in the active drawing Pick Like NOTE Use the AutoCAD Electrical ...

Page 436: ... a time or enter W and then window your objects 5 Click OK Change attribute text justification Use this tool to change the justification of wire number text component description text or attributes Access Click the arrow on the Move Show Attribute tool to access the Change Attribute Justification tool From the Components menu select Attributes Change Attribute Justification Lists the justification...

Page 437: ...me to apply to text style WD or WD_IEC and click OK 5 In the Project Wide Utilities dialog box click OK 6 In the Batch Process Drawings dialog box select to process the project and click OK 7 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box select to process specific files or click Do All to process all of the drawings in the active project Click OK AutoCAD Electrical processes the selected drawings a...

Page 438: ...t a time select the attribute s in the drawing The attribute text automatically changes to the new at tribute size If you chose to change all attributes of a certain type select an ex ample attribute and window the entire drawing This finds and adjusts all attributes of the same name to your specified size If you chose to type in an attribute name type the name in the edit box Wildcards are allowe...

Page 439: ... OK 7 In the Batch Process Drawings dialog box select to process the project and click OK 8 In the Select Drawings to Process dialog box select the draw ings to process and click OK AutoCAD Electrical processes the selected drawings and adjusts the target attributes to the value you ve specified Use the squeeze and stretch text utilities Use the Squeeze attribute tool to compress an attribute to m...

Page 440: ...ibute Text tool 2 Click the Stretch Attribute Text tool 3 Select the attribute text to change The text automatically stretches Change attribute size Use this tool to quickly change attribute text size when components or wire numbers have already been inserted onto your drawings Access Click the drop down arrow on the Move Show Attribute tool to access the Change Attribute Size tool From the Compon...

Page 441: ...hange all the description attributes on all the PLC modules on your drawing Select Type it and then enter DESC for the attribute name Window the entire drawing You can include a series of attribute names to match by separating each attribute name with a semi colon Example DESC TAG Modify library symbols Change library symbol attribute size Use the Modify Symbol Library tool to change the attribute...

Page 442: ...bute text scale resize Access From the Components menu select Symbol Library Modify Symbol Library Select the folder and click OK Specifies the new scale for the symbol A value of 1 0 no change Re scale symbol Specifies which command to run using AutoCAD Electrical s build in AutoLISP programming Enter the AutoLISP code in the edit box Run AutoLISP command expression Specifies the new width for th...

Page 443: ... on the Move Show Attribute tool to access the Add Attribute tool 2 Click the Add Attribute tool 3 Select the block 4 Define the attribute name value height justification and visibility 5 Click OK to create the attribute 6 Select the attribute location on the drawing NOTE Added attributes do not become part of the block definition They disappear during the Explode command and when inserting anothe...

Page 444: ...From the Components menu select Attributes Add Attribute Specifies text used to identify the attribute attribute tag Name Specifies the attribute text This value is displayed on the drawing and used in reports Value NOTE This can be left blank Specifies the height for the attribute value Height Specifies the justification for the attribute value Justification Indicates whether the attribute will b...

Page 445: ... 3 phase bus wiring Insert wires Trim wires Stretch wires Overview of wire color gauge labels Insert cable markers into wires Insert shield symbols Insert in line wire markers Wire Gaps Ladder Tools Wire Numbers Wire Sequencing Source and Destination Markers 8 433 ...

Page 446: ...e wire line segments and optional branches that interconnect and form an electrically unbroken conductor Wire segments of the network may contain in line terminals and wire crossing gaps All segments of a wire network receive the same wire number unless you select On per Wire Basis in the Wire Number Options section of the Project Properties Wire Numbers dialog box on the Project Manager right cli...

Page 447: ...insertion the current wire type displays at the command prompt The current wire type indicates the layer name in which the new wires are drawn You can override this by typing T and selecting a new wire type from the Set Edit Wire Type dialog box The new wire type becomes the current wire type and the command continues with the wire insertion 6 If starting at a component or bus select the component...

Page 448: ...ce start the new 3 phase wire connected at the last wire on the existing bus Move the cursor backward across the other wires until the connections are made and then move the cursor forward again This results in a reversed sequence connection TIP If you have trouble connecting a new 3 phase wire to an existing bus start the command and select the starting point on the existing bus Move the cursor s...

Page 449: ...You can use the Scoot command to adjust bus spacing after insertion Specifies the horizontal spacing between the wires Horizontal Specifies the vertical spacing between the wires Vertical Insert wires You can insert single or angled 22 5 45 or 67 5 degree line wire segments on a wire layer the wire layer does not have to be the current layer AutoCAD Electrical supports scooting components along an...

Page 450: ...nt of the wire You can end the wire seg ment or angled segment in empty space from an existing wire segment or from an existing component If it ends at a wire segment a dot wddot dwg is applied if appropriate If it ends at another component the nearest wire connection terminal is found and connected to your pick point on that symbol NOTE If the distance between 2 horizontal wires is relatively sma...

Page 451: ... drawing or type F followed by a space to remove multiple wires at once 3 If you are removing multiple wires draw a fence through the wires to trim A Zoom Extents is triggered when a wire runs off the screen If this zooming back and forth becomes annoying during multiple trims then zoom back so that all of the circuitry is completely shown on the screen or press Z and space at the trim prompt This...

Page 452: ...is referenced if a project specific wdw file is not found The mapping file lists each wire layer name followed by the wire color gauge label text that is to be assigned to that wire layer You can easily set up or edit these labels Select the wire color gauge tool and select Setup to display the setup dialog All of the current drawing s valid layer names are listed in the upper dialog list along wi...

Page 453: ...s fails it tries at approximately 60 degree angles If all checks fail it leaves the wire number where it originally was going to put it This entire process takes just a split second Leader checks are triggered when wire numbers are inserted or they re center due to an adjacent SCOOT operation If a component is scooted and the result is enough room for a wire number on a leader to do without the le...

Page 454: ... type and gap size for the leader The label text size follows the current AutoCAD DIMTXT setting and the arrow size defaults to the current AutoCAD DIMASZ setting Specify the leader layer and text layer Click OK to apply the changes to the wire labels The specified leader and text layers are displayed in the dialog box under the Setup button 4 Select how to place the label in the drawing automatic...

Page 455: ...ires Create Edit Wire Type dialog box Places the text label with no leader at the location you pick Manual No Leader Places the label on the drawing automatically AutoCAD Electrical looks for a good spot to place the label and the Auto Placement label is automatically placed without any picking on your part Places the label at the leader location point you pick Manual Insert cable markers into wir...

Page 456: ...hrough any of the normal methods Parent sibling or drawing project wide pick list will cause AutoCAD Electrical to offer the cable s next conductor color as a default 5 Assign the catalog information description location and in stallation codes and references for the tag 6 Click OK If a parent cable marker was inserted the Insert Some Child Components dialog box displays allowing you to automatica...

Page 457: ... Make any necessary changes in the From To combination box and click OK when you are ready to run the report The Cable Insert Edit dialog box displays 6 Define which wires are part of the cable by using the Include Include All Remove and Remove All buttons The wires for the cable are listed in the Wires Included in Cable portion of the dialog box 7 Set the cable tag by keeping the default using th...

Page 458: ...ed with your own custom menu You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project Properties Project Settings dialog box Select Projects Project Project Manager Right click the project name and select Properties Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu The default icon menu can also be redefined in wd env Add entry WD_MENU for schematic icon m...

Page 459: ...ays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure Symbol Preview window Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined by the dat file Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing Executes a command Displays a submenu NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon the icon name and block...

Page 460: ...nent dialog box For example if you insert a Always display previously used menu push button from the Push Buttons menu the next time you open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default Specifies the component block insertion scale This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties Drawing Format dialog Scale schematic box Once set this value is remembered until ...

Page 461: ...d window The current view option is indicated with a check mark Options include Icon with text Icon only or List view Properties available for icons only Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name image block names and so on Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties Pneumatic Hydraulic and P ID icon menus The Menu tree structure displa...

Page 462: ... from the Symbol Preview window and specify the insertion point CableTag There are a few ways to define the tag for this cable If there is an existing tag it appears in the edit box If not you can type a specific tag in the edit box Make sure you select Fixed if you want AutoCAD Electrical to mark this tag so it won t be updated on a re tag Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I O addres...

Page 463: ...sts the manufacturer number for the cable marker Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup Manufacturer Lists the catalog number for the cable marker Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup Catalog Lists the assembly code for the cable marker The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together Assembly Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each cable marker T...

Page 464: ...cking from the dialog list External file You can pull catalog assignments from a generic ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spread sheet or database program A dialog box displays the contents of the selected text file Find and highlight the desired entry AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks it into its component parts These are displayed in the le...

Page 465: ...ngs AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross reference text when the cross reference command is run Cross Reference Installation Code Changes the installation code s You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes AutoCAD Electrical does a quick read of all the current or selected drawing files and returns a list of all installation codes used so far Pick from th...

Page 466: ...art number information and if the particular cable is referenced in the AutoCAD Electrical cable conductor database table _W0_CBLWIRES within your Access catalog file AutoCAD Electrical can track conductors used versus conductors available Access Click the Cable Markers tool Select Cable Marker from the list From the Wires menu select Cables Cable Markers Select Cable Marker from the list This is ...

Page 467: ...ag Searches for a wire connection to a nearby PLC I O address and if found uses the PLC address number in the compon ent s tag name Use PLC address Uses the location codes of the connecting components Use end locations Lists any cable tag names in the same family as the current cable Select a tag from the list to copy or to increment for this new cable marker Tags Used so far Assigns a tag from an...

Page 468: ...r a value or select one from the Catalog lookup Catalog Lists the assembly code for the cable marker The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together Assembly Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each cable marker The tag value can be manually typed in the edit box Item Specifies the quantity number for the part number blank 1 This value gets inserted into a BOM report s SUBQT...

Page 469: ...t or database program A dialog box displays the contents of the selected text file Find and highlight the desired entry AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks it into its component parts These are displayed in the left hand dialog list For each relevant item highlight it and then pick the appropriate category button in the center column The high lighted item is transfer...

Page 470: ...Child Marker from the list ComponentTag If the parent is visible on screen click Parent Sibling and select the parent or another related marker This automatically transfers all information to the child marker being inserted edited The parent cable tag value can be manually typed in the edit box or selected from a drawing wide or project wide list of existing cables Tag Lists the component tags use...

Page 471: ...n Installation Code Changes the installation codes You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned Select from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code Assign short installation codes to components like PNL and FIELD...

Page 472: ... the installation codes You can search the current drawing or entire project for installation codes A quick read of all the current or selected drawing files is done and a list of installation codes used so far is returned Select from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code Assign short installation codes to components like PNL and FIELD so you can create location...

Page 473: ...parent marker carries a part number you can select the next unused color from a used unused pick list Parent cable marker cross reference AutoCAD Electrical automatically fills in cross reference text when the cross reference command is run Show edit miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes Multiple cable markers This tool first extracts compo...

Page 474: ...hat are out of date Freshen wire connection table Displays a listing of report settings files that have a prefix equal to the report type shown in the dialog box Format Cable insert or edit Cable markers carry a cable TAG value and a conductor color value carried as a RATING1 attribute value on the marker block symbol Access Click the arrow on the Cable Markers tool to access the Multiple Cable Ma...

Page 475: ...ne the tag for the cable If there is an existing tag it appears in the edit box If not you can type a tag in the edit box Make sure you select Fixed if you want AutoCAD Electrical to mark this tag so it is no updated on a retag Uses the location codes of the connecting components Cable End Locations Lists any cable tags already assigned Select a tag from the list to copy or to increment for this n...

Page 476: ...the dialog s main window Scans the previous project to find an instance of the selected cable and returns the cable values You can then make your catalog assign ment by picking from the dialog list Previous Lists the part numbers used for similar cables in the current drawing Drawing Lists the part numbers used for similar cables in the project You can search in the active project another project ...

Page 477: ...uctor color code by manually entering it in the edit box or by picking from a color list The list displays the wire colors for the cable If you have already selected catalog information the colors in the list correspond to the specific cable type If you haven t assigned catalog information the list is a generic set of colors To assign a color to a particular wire select the wire in the list of wir...

Page 478: ...arry an AutoCAD Electrical tag You can have parent and child shields You can insert them one at a time and relate them as you would any other component or insert a group at a time 1 Click the Insert Component tool 2 On the Insert Component dialog box click the Miscellaneous button 3 Click the Shields button 4 Select the type of shield to insert into the drawing 5 Pick the points on each wire for t...

Page 479: ...existing shield marker either select the first or last cable marker shield symbol 3 Specify the insertion point and right click to end the selection Insert in line wire markers You can insert a special in line marker into any wire This marker can be used to identify a special signal name or conductor color These reference only markers are ignored for wire numbering and reporting Insert in line wir...

Page 480: ...aming convention for terminal symbols page 170 For example the horizontal Red marker s file name is C Program Files Autodesk Acade 2007 Libs Jic1 jic1 HTO_RED dwg and the vertical version is C Program Files Autodesk Acade version Libs Jic1 jic1 VTO_RED dwg AutoCAD Electrical keys off of the first four characters of the block drawing name Insert component This icon menu can be modified expanded or ...

Page 481: ...ew Up one level Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view This is unavailable if the main menu is selected in the Menu tree view Views Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window The current view option is indicated with a check mark Options include Icon with text Icon only or List view The tree structure is created by rea...

Page 482: ...Edit Component dialog box when inserting symbols onto the drawing To add component detail later click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit No edit dialog Inserts the component un tagged i e without assigning a unique Component Tag The untagged value that displays is the com No tag ponent s TAG1 TAG2 default value To add component detail later click the Edit Component tool and s...

Page 483: ... menu name image or submenu title Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any menu properties Options for the Symbol Preview window Right click an icon or in empty space in the Symbol Preview window to display the following options View Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window The current view option is indicated with a check mark Options include Icon with text Ic...

Page 484: ...draulic Component and Insert P ID Component tools are accessed on the Extra Library toolbar Insert Pneumatic Component Insert Hydraulic Component Insert P ID Component 472 Chapter 8 Wire Wire Number Tools ...

Page 485: ... two crossing lines 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Insert Wire Gap tool 2 Click the Insert Wire Gap tool 3 Select the wire to remain solid 4 Select the crossing wire to have the gap The gap inserts into the second wire NOTE You can turn off the automatic gap loop feature by selecting Solid in the Wiring Style section of the Drawing Properties Style dialog box Wire Gaps 473...

Page 486: ...Flip wire gaps Use the Flip Gap command to flip the gap to the other wire 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Flip Wire Gap tool 2 Click the Flip Wire Gap tool 3 Select the wire that has the gap loops to flip You can also window the wires containing the gaps to flip by pressing a W then windowing the wires AutoCAD Electrical makes the gapped wire solid and flips the gap loop to...

Page 487: ...mber of ladders that can be inserted into a drawing but ladders may not overlap each other You can insert a new ladder at any time Multiple ladder fragments in the same vertical column need to be Define and insert new ladders 475 ...

Page 488: ...a three phase ladder the Width and Draw Rungs options are grayed out 5 Specify how to draw the rungs No Bus just draws the line reference numbers while No Rungs just draws the hot and neutral bus with rungs Add rungs with the AutoCAD Electrical Add Rung command or the Insert Wire tool Select Yes to automatically include a rung at every refer ence location skip 0 or every other line reference posit...

Page 489: ...fying a template or the attribute definitions These default values are carried on the invisible WD_M block Using a template Use these steps if you are using a template drawing with a pre inserted WD_M block 1 Open the template drawing in AutoCAD Electrical it has a dwt extension 2 Select Projects Drawing Properties 3 In the Drawing Properties dialog box click the Drawing Format tab 4 In the Ladder...

Page 490: ...esired but do not delete any of the attributes you find 3 Move or change the text size of the RUNGFIRST attribute definition 4 Save and exit the drawing Insert ladder There is no limit to the number of ladders that can be inserted into a drawing but ladders can not overlap each other You can insert a new ladder at any time Multiple ladder fragments in the same vertical column must be vertically al...

Page 491: ...u can use the AutoCAD Erase command to get rid of the extras Do not erase the top most line reference number This is the ladder s MLR block and carries the ladder s intelligence Specifies whether to create a one phase or three phase ladder If you select to create a three phase ladder the Width and Draw Rungs options are grayed out Phase Specifies how to draw the rungs No Bus just draws the line re...

Page 492: ...t Tagging Retag Com ponents to update component tags to match the new line ref erence number 5 Select Wires Insert Wire Numbers to update the wire numbers Select Tag retag ALL If off page wire connections are involved make sure that you click Cross reference Signals on the Wire Tagging dialog box 6 Click Pick Individual Wires and select the wires to retag Change the size of a ladder You can use th...

Page 493: ...2 Select the ladder s vertical rail and pull it out or push it in 3 Select Components Align to put components back into neat columns 4 Select the components to align and press Enter Reposition a ladder You can reposition an existing ladder on your drawing using the AutoCAD Move command 1 Select the AutoCAD Move command from the menu 2 Select the ladder making sure to include the very first line re...

Page 494: ...Rung tool 2 Select a blank space anywhere between the hot and neutral bus wires to add the rung During rung insertion the current wire type displays at the command prompt You can override this by typing in the hotkey T and selecting a new wire type from the Set Edit Wire Type dialog box The new wire type becomes the current wire type and the command continues with the rung insertion If the new run...

Page 495: ... numbers does not update existing components or wire numbers Access Click the arrow on the Insert Ladder tool to access the Revise Ladder tool From the Wires menu select Ladders Revise Ladder On the Conversion toolbar click the Convert Ladder tool Select the top line reference number and press Enter From the Projects menu select Conversion Tools Convert Drawing Convert Ladder Select the top line r...

Page 496: ... its own layer You can assign a different color to each of these layers so you can easily tell them apart There are 4 types of wire numbers Normal Fixed Extra and Signal Wire numbers that are free to update when you rerun the Insert Wire Numbers command Normal Wire numbers that are fixed to their current value They do not update with subsequent runs of the Insert Wire Numbers com mand Fixed Extra ...

Page 497: ...t wire number tag format are Drawing s sheet number S Drawing number D Sequential or reference based number applied to the component N Suffix character position for reference based tagging not present end of tag X IEC style project code default for drawing P IEC style installation code default for drawing I IEC style location code default for drawing L Examples Wire beginning on line reference 100...

Page 498: ...o access the Show Wires tool 2 Click the Show Wires tool 3 Select whether to show the wires All lines wires on wire layers are highlighted in bright red 4 Select whether to show the origin point for each wire number attribute text entity The origin of a wire number block must lie on the wire segment though the text attribute may be moved away from the wire NOTE Do not use the AutoCAD Move command ...

Page 499: ...ntry applied in sequence to the Wire Numbers section shown at the right hand side of the dialog box 5 Set the hold and increment options for each of the edit box values as required Pay attention to the proposed generated wire numbers in the right hand side of the dialog box 6 Set the number of wire numbers needed in the bottom right hand side of the dialog box TIP Select None to potentially genera...

Page 500: ...s one at a time Automatically insert wire numbers This tool quickly processes and tags wires on the current drawing wires in the project or individually picked wires 1 Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool 2 Select to tag all wires or only new wires 3 Select to process and tag wires with sequential wire numbers or with wire numbers based upon the wire network s line ref erence location 4 Optional Set...

Page 501: ...the default wire number format set in the Layers section of the Drawing Properties Drawing Format dialog box by using layer defined formats Use wire layer format overrides Forces all wire numbers to be fixed they do not up date if wire number retagging is run again at a later date Insert as fixed Updates cross reference text on wire signal source and destination symbols Cross reference Signals Upd...

Page 502: ...Wire Numbers page 493 dialog box A starting wire num ber must be assigned for each draw ing Allows you to type in a starting wire number and increments from there Sequential consecutive drawing to drawing ignoring the defined setting of the starting wire number Sets the wire number based on the line reference value Reference based tags Specifies to process all the wiring or just the untagged new w...

Page 503: ...e projectname is the name of your active project or default 3ph and put the file in any folder that is part of AutoCAD Electrical s search path list Access Click the arrow on the Insert Wire Numbers tool to access the 3 Phase Wire Numbers tool From the Wires menu select Wire Numbers Miscellaneous 3 Phase Wire Numbers Specifies the prefix value for the wire numbers Enter a value or click List to ch...

Page 504: ...rs section automatically Maximum updates with a preview based on the value selected in relation to the options specified for the prefix base and suffix values TIP Select None to potentially generate a continuous list of increment ing wire numbers Set wire number placement You can set the wire number placement for new wires inserted in a single drawing or for the entire project This does not update...

Page 505: ...low 3 In the Project or Drawing Properties dialog box click the Wire Numbers tab 4 In the Wire Number Placement section select how you want to automatically place new wire numbers above below or inline of the wire Above Wire Places the wire number above the physical wire In Line Places the wire number in line with the wire Click Gap Setup to define the spacing between the wire number and the wire ...

Page 506: ...erties Drawing Settings dialog box NOTE For reference based wire number tagging individual items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep multiple wires in the same reference location unique These are added to the end of the tag but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format Use the Suffix position parameter X in the component tag...

Page 507: ...fix This list is used to create unique reference based wire number tags for multiple wire Line Reference networks beginning at the same reference location such as wire network beginning at a location per line reference number X Y grid reference or X Zone reference Displays a suffix list List suffix characters for wire numbers beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone Suffix Setup to...

Page 508: ...ers the wire number text bumps into something it does not check if the leader itself will overlay another object Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders As Required Always or Never NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already present on the drawing Project properties wire numbers tab Modify your project default settings for wire numbers All information defined...

Page 509: ...r example X N NOTE AutoCAD Electrical provides a predefined format for you to use or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters page 126 Specifies to use PLC I O address values for wires that con nect to an addressed I O point This overrides both Sequen Search for PLC I O address on insert tial and Reference based tagging New wires or wire renum bering on the current drawing will s...

Page 510: ...reference or in the same zone Suffix Setup to keep wire numbers unique Select one of the 4 pre defined suffix lists or enter your own custom suffix list Wire Number Options Assigns a different wire number format based on the wire layer Based on Wire Layer Overrides the default wire number format by using layer defined formats Change the wire layer name wire number format starting wire sequence and...

Page 511: ...ample 1000 1099 2500 2599 You can also use 2 4 6 or 2 4 6 for val ues not in a range New Wire Number Placement NOTE The Insert Wire Number tool does not take the current wire number setting in line above or below into account when updating existing wire numbers this setting is used only when inserting new wire numbers Use the Toggle Wire Number In Line tool for flipping existing wire numbers among...

Page 512: ...t bumps into something it does not check if the leader itself overlays another object Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders As Required Always or Never NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already present on the drawing WireType Displays the Rename User Columns dialog box that is used for renaming User1 to User20 header columns in the Set Wire Type Create Ed...

Page 513: ...t anywhere within the wire number text string 4 Enter up to three different Find Replace values and then click Go 5 Choose to process the project the current drawing or selected wire numbers on the current drawing AutoCAD Electrical scans the selection looking for all the AutoCAD Electrical wire number text values and replacing text as instructed Find or replace wire numbers Use this tool to find ...

Page 514: ...nd value Substring match Specifies that only the first occurrence within the text value should be replaced First occurrence only Specifies the value you wish to find Find Specifies the text string to replace the find value with Replace Encode wire color gauge information into wire numbers Use the Wire Layer Format Overrides tool to have wire numbering automatically insert with wire color gauge and...

Page 515: ... AutoCAD Electrical to automatically append a RD 14 suffix to the wire number For wire numbers gener ated on wires drawn on layer BLK_10_XHHN you want Auto CAD Electrical to automatically append a BLK 10 suffix to the wire number 5 In the Assign Wire Numbering Formats by Wire Layers dialog box enter RED_14_THHN in the Wire Layer Name box and enter N RD 14 in the Wire Number Format For Layer box 6 ...

Page 516: ...ess Click the Insert Wire Numbers tool Click Use Wire Layer Format Overrides Setup From the Wires menu select Insert Wire Numbers Click Use Wire Layer Format Overrides Setup NOTE You can also access this dialog box by selecting Based on Wire Layer and then clicking Layer Setup in the Wire Number Options section of the Project Properties Wire Numbers dialog box Lists all defined wire layer formats ...

Page 517: ...wing number D Drawing s wire layer name G Sequential or Reference based number applied to the component N Suffix character position for reference based tagging not present end of tag X IEC style project code default for drawing P IEC style installation code default for drawing I IEC style location code default for drawing L Project drawing list s SEC value for active drawing A Project drawing list...

Page 518: ...mbers must be preassigned These might include motor wiring that needs to include special suffix values or other wiring such as instrumentation that might not follow the default numbering convention Manually edit the wire number and flip it to fixed 506 Chapter 8 Wire Wire Number Tools ...

Page 519: ...e wire number visible or hidden 5 If you want the wire number to be fixed select Fixed and click OK If the wire number is already fixed and you want to turn it back into a regular wire number clear the check box and click OK Fix all wire numbers There may be times when you want to fix all or many wire numbers on a drawing at their current values Use the Fix Wire Numbers tool and identify all of th...

Page 520: ...h are normal The layer name for fixed wire numbers is entered in the Define Layers dialog box from the Drawing Properties Drawing Format dialog box Access Click the Edit Wire Number tool From the Wires menu select Edit Wire Number Specifies the wire number to edit Use the arrows to scroll through possible wire numbers Wire Number If you enter an existing wire number during the insert edit process ...

Page 521: ...n wire reports Visible Hidden Restores the previous screen view a zoom extents may be done to follow an untagged wire that travels off screen Zoom Project wide utilities You can have multiple drawings open at any time However in order to maximize performance and memory usage you may want to minimize the number of open drawings when running project wide commands Access Click the Project Wide Utilit...

Page 522: ...current project or to purge all blocks Change Attribute Click Setup to select the attributes to change and then enter the height and width definitions for the selected at tributes Change Attribute Size NOTE If you do not want the attribute height or width to change do not enter a value definition Click Setup to select a text font to apply to the text style used on component attributes Change Style...

Page 523: ...s the selected items 3 Move your cursor to the desired position and click your mouse button The items scoot and reconnect Move a wire number If you want to move an existing wire number from one segment of the network to another use the Move Wire Number command 1 Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the Move Wire Number tool 2 Click the Move Wire Number tool 3 Select the wire segm...

Page 524: ...he wire number Right click or press Enter to position the wire number NOTE You can type C at the command prompt to collapse the wire leader back to the wire number block You can do this imme diately after inserting a leader if you determine that you don t want the leader or you can rerun the command if you want to remove the leader from existing wire numbers Move the wire number without use of a l...

Page 525: ... attribute position editing command so that you reposition the wire number attribute but not its underlying block insertion point Swap wire numbers Swap wire numbers between two wire networks by selecting the Swap Wire Numbers tool Select on the From and the To wire networks or pick right on the existing wire number text 1 Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to access the Swap Wire Number...

Page 526: ...nd fixed wire number layers then it is easy to tell them apart from the network s main wire number 1 Click the Copy Wire Numbers tool 2 Select the wire location where you want the extra wire number to insert Position wire numbers in line with the wire 514 Chapter 8 Wire Wire Number Tools ...

Page 527: ...Label Gap tool 8 Type S and press Enter to open the In Line Wire Label Gap Setup dialog box 9 Adjust the values as necessary to define the adjustment for the gap size A Specifies the width between the end of the wire and the text The second option for setting A is the snap setting for the width The width stays constant until the text grows to a point where the Text A A gets past the current gap wi...

Page 528: ...low and inline If the selected wire number is inline it switches to above or below based on the default Wire Number Placement setting in the Drawing Properties Wire Numbers dialog box If it starts as above or below the selected wire number toggles to in line NOTE If there isn t room for a wire number to become an inline wire number it remains an above or below line wire number TIP Use the Flip Wir...

Page 529: ... Properties Drawing Settings dialog box NOTE For reference based wire number tagging individual items in the suffix list are applied to the wire tags to keep multiple wires in the same reference location unique These are added to the end of the tag but you can force AutoCAD Electrical to insert the suffix character somewhere within the tag format Use the Suffix position parameter X in the componen...

Page 530: ...This list is used to create unique reference based wire number tags for multiple wire Line Reference networks beginning at the same reference location such as wire network beginning at a location per line reference number X Y grid reference or X Zone reference Displays a suffix list List suffix characters for wire numbers beginning on the same line reference or in the same zone Suffix Setup to kee...

Page 531: ...the wire number text bumps into something it does not check if the leader itself will overlay another object Select the method for inserting new wire numbers as leaders As Required Always or Never NOTE This change does not affect wire numbers that are already present on the drawing Modify Wire Numbers Increment wire numbers You can force new incremental wire numbers as opposed to line referenced n...

Page 532: ...symbol library is in use and open drawing wd_wnh dwg in AutoCAD 2 Change the text size of the WIRENO attribute definition 3 Save the drawing 4 Open drawings wd_wnv dwg wd_wch dwg and wd_wcv dwg 5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each NOTE You won t see these new resized wire numbers on existing drawings unless you erase all of the wire numbers and purge the drawing of the old block inserts Make wire numbe...

Page 533: ...k 3 Press Enter The wire number is automatically deleted Extra wire number copies can also be deleted Erase all wire numbers project wide 1 Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Project Wide Utilities tool 2 Click the Project Wide Utilities tool 3 Select to remove all wire numbers or keep fixed wire numbers and click OK 4 Select which drawings you want to process and click OK T...

Page 534: ...number is no longer visible on the screen The new hide layer is created from the wire number layer name with a _HIDE suffix For example if the wire number text layer is called WIRENO then the hide layer name is called WIRENO_HIDE The layer is created automatically when needed and you are asked if you want to freeze this layer Unhide wire numbers 1 Click the arrow on the Edit Wire Number tool to ac...

Page 535: ...box through the properties dialog boxes Specifies the origin for the X Zone grid Click pick to select the origin on the drawing or enter X and Y values Origin NOTE The Pick button is not available when accessed through the properties dialog box Specifies the spacing between the grid columns Enter the horizontal value Spacing only available when accessed from the toolbar or menu Specifies the label...

Page 536: ...e when accessed through the properties dialog box Specifies the spacing between the grid columns Enter the horizontal and vertical values Spacing Specifies the order that is used from the X Y grid in determining the N part of the tag If this is set to Horizontal the horizontal values X Y Format of the grid are used as the first part and the vertical value as the second If Vertical is selected then...

Page 537: ...Miscellaneous PLC I O Wire Numbers Specifies the wire tag format for the plc wire I O Wire Tag Format Uses an exact wire number match on the address The options are I n or O n Predefined NOTE For automatic wire numbering based strictly on the actual I O address open the Drawing Properties dialog box and click the Wire Number tab In the Wire Numbering section select Search for I O address on insert...

Page 538: ...ientation a three digit attribute value named WDWSEQ carried on the symbol The 90 degree turn or the straight through section depending on the style of the angled tee symbol indicates the beginning of the sequence while the 45 degree turn is the secondary connection AutoCAD Electrical reports each wire connection as it is shown This method of influencing from to reporting may fail to give expected...

Page 539: ...onal secondary Direct to Terminal sequences can be defined so that the third device can be sequenced directly to the terminal you can also directly sequence two terminals together The result is that the From To connection reporting shows all three devices tied directly to the terminal NOTE The limit of Direct to Terminal sequences that you can define in a single wire network is 50 Level Routing Me...

Page 540: ...ratch database file and how from to connection information is output to various reports or annotated on to physical footprint representations using the Panel Layout Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint tool NOTE The next to a wire in the Wire Connection Sequence portion of the Edit Wire Connection Sequence dialog box indicates that the device wire connection is on another drawing A t indicates that ...

Page 541: ...TE Pick Mode is unavailable when you are working with a wire network that crosses multiple drawing files If you are working with wire networks that jump to one or more additional drawings click Freshen to update the wire connectivity database with any out of date files 5 Optional To directly connect additional components to a given terminal select the components and the terminal marked with a t in...

Page 542: ...his tool by right clicking on any wire segment in the wire network 3 Press the Space bar to step through the defined wire sequence NOTE If the wire sequence crosses multiple drawings and you try to view the sequence as an animation a dialog box listing the off drawing wire connection information displays so that you can indicate to go to the other drawing s to continue viewing the sequence Insert ...

Page 543: ...he Wiring Style section of the Drawing Properties Styles dialog box 1 Click the arrow on the Wire Tee Markers tool to access the Insert Dot Tee Markers tool 2 Click the Insert Dot Tee Markers tool 3 Select at or near the intersection point NOTE If you want to change the tee symbol s orientation after insertion right click on the marker and select Insert Angled Tee Marker or Toggle Angled Tee Marke...

Page 544: ... tee symbol s orientation after insertion right click on the marker and select Toggle Angled Tee Markers or select the tool from the toolbar To customize the appearance of these symbols edit the tee symbols stored in the selected schematic symbol library These tee symbol names are HT0_ dwg and VT0_ dwg where combinations of 1 2 4 and 8 Be aware that each symbol carries attribute WDWSEQ with a thre...

Page 545: ...utput to various reports or annotated on physical footprint representations using the Panel Layout Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint tool Access Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Edit Wire Sequence tool Click Wires Wire Miscellaneous Edit Wire Sequence NOTE You can also access this by right clicking on any segment of a wire network and selecting Wire Sequence Edit Wire Sequenc...

Page 546: ...does not change the wire number through it Defines the sequence by actual picks at or very near each wire connection point Pick near each wire Pick Mode connection in the order of how you want the wiring sequence to proceed from component to compon ent NOTE Pick Mode is unavailable when you are working with a wire network that crosses multiple drawing files Automatically sorts the wire connection ...

Page 547: ...nnection reported on the external side of the terminal E If selected an I or E displays in the PD1 or PD2 column Point Description of the Wire From To report Updates the wire connectivity database the WFRM2ALL table with wire connection information from any out of date files Freshen NOTE If all drawings are up to date this button is disabled If not the button is enabled and the count of out of dat...

Page 548: ... following name definition A_STYLExh bmp where x is the arrow style 1 9 NOTE If the resulting bitmap is too small or off center open the source drawing in AutoCAD again Resize your AutoCAD graphics window so that it is more square Center the image and resave Repeat until you are satisfied with the result Insert destination code The wire number for a destination arrowed wire network is retrieved fr...

Page 549: ...ists of all source destination codes used so far Drawing Displays project wide pick lists of all source destination codes used so far Project Picks on an existing wire network AutoCAD Electrical searches it for an existing source arrow and retrieves its signal code for use on this new destination arrow Pick Specifies the arrow style to use for the destination signal There are currently 9 styles to...

Page 550: ...ified value into the code box This is useful for using the next number in a sequence Use optional Specifies the description for the source signal Description Opens an ASCII text file from which you can quickly pick standard descriptions Defaults Picks from recently inserted codes Recent Displays drawing wide pick lists of all source destin ation codes used so far Drawing Displays project wide pick...

Page 551: ...s From the Projects menu select Project Project Manager In the Project Manager right click the project name and select Properties Specifies the default wire signal arrow style Select from the 4 predefined styles or a user defined style You can override the default style setting at insertion time Arrow Style TIP For instructions on how to add custom wire arrow styles see Add custom signal arrow sty...

Page 552: ...hat are maintained inside the drawing s WD_M block Access Click the Project Manager tool In the Project Manager right click the drawing name and select Properties Drawing Properties From the Projects menu select Project Project Manager In the Project Manager right click the drawing name and select Properties Drawing Properties Specifies the default wire signal arrow style Select from the 4 predefi...

Page 553: ...fault mode of operation when wires cross each other insert gap with no loop insert gap and loop or solid no gap Wire Cross Specifies the default wire tee marker none dot angle1 or angle2 Wire Tee Wire signal or stand alone reference report There are 2 types of reports that can be generated one on wire signal source destination codes and one on stand alone reference codes Access Click the arrow on ...

Page 554: ...report type Continues surfing on problems related to the selected report Surf Edit the cable conductor database You can edit the cable conductor database table _W0_CBLWIRES in the default_cat mdb file just like any other AutoCAD Electrical catalog table The main Access database catalog file can be named either default_cat mdb or project _cat mdb You can open it in Microsoft Access or you can edit ...

Page 555: ...ble has 15 records one for each conductor in that cable type The Manufacturer and Catalog fields for all 15 records are marked BELDEN and 8486 The Conductor field carries each conductor s unique color id Show source and destination markers on wires There may be times when you want to show source and destination markers on the individual wires of a cable but you want to show the wires coming togeth...

Page 556: ... special layer If you are inserting a source marker then the wire coming out of the marker is changed If it is a destination marker the wire coming into the marker is changed You can use the AutoCAD Electrical Fan In Out Single Line Layer command to change a wire to one of these layers 544 Chapter 8 Wire Wire Number Tools ...

Page 557: ...e pick lists of all source destination codes used so far Follow the selected wire network looking for a destination arrow at the other end If found repeat its signal code for this new source ar row Pick on an existing wire network AutoCAD Electrical searches it for an existing destination arrow and retrieves its signal code for use on this new source arrow 7 Specify the arrow style to use for the ...

Page 558: ...NOTE If the destination wires are nearby it may be easiest to insert them right away If they are on another drawing you can wait until later to insert them 546 Chapter 8 Wire Wire Number Tools ...

Page 559: ...estination markers have been inserted Set marker styles and layers The AutoCAD Electrical Fan In Out feature relies on layering to work You can select the default Fan In Out marker style here along with defining the layers for the wires 1 Click the Drawing Properties tool 2 In the Drawing Properties dialog box click the Style tab If you have an older drawing you may be warned about an older versio...

Page 560: ...the fly 4 Select whether to make the layer current 5 Check the box to change the existing fan in out lines only if you want to make sure that you only change the layers of wires that are already defined as Fan In Out wires Otherwise Auto CAD Electrical can convert any selected lines to the Fan In Out layer Add custom fan in out marker styles The icon menu graphics that display for the various Fan ...

Page 561: ...n update or Auto Wire Number command then makes the match up annotation whether the fan in fan out are on the same or different drawings Access Click the arrow on the Source Destination Signals tool to access the Fan In Out Source tool From the Wires menu select Signal References Fan In Out Source Specifies the style for the source marker Some op tions are Solid wire num desc Break wire num Source...

Page 562: ... Break medium gap desc and Break wide gap desc Specifies the orientation for the markers Options are above below right or left Wire connection orientation Fan in out single line layer A special layer or set of layers can be defined for the wires going out of a Fan In Out source marker and the wires coming into a destination marker Access Click the arrow on the Source Destination Signals tool to ac...

Page 563: ...t any selected lines to the Fan In Out layer Changes all of the wires to the selected layer that is associated with the selected wire network If this option is not selected only the selected wire changes One pick gets all connected wires Makes the selected layer the current layer Make selected layer current Show source and destination markers on wires 551 ...

Page 564: ...552 ...

Page 565: ...hapter Overview of connection sequencing Insert terminals and connectors Multi Level Terminals Edit terminal jumpers Resequence terminal numbers View terminal wire connections Terminal Strips Terminal Properties Lookup 9 553 ...

Page 566: ...ed on the symbol WD_1_TAGSTRIP Attribute to carry first terminal strip number 16 character maximum WD_1_TERMNO Attribute to carry optional terminal number WD_1_INFO Attribute to carry additional information such as installation location catalog and item number assignments and any connected cable information WD_2_TAGSTRIP Same as above but for second terminal in the sequence WD_2_TERMNO Same as abo...

Page 567: ...Sequence Terminal Symbol dialog box select one of the six series connected entries and click Edit From the Components menu select Insert Component Enter H 1_MULTI_CONN_NOCHG in the Type It box and click OK Specify the insertion point on the drawing In the Edit Multi Connection Sequence Terminal Symbol dialog box select one of the six series connected entries and click Edit This in line component l...

Page 568: ...eate location specific BOM and component lists later Location Code Changes the location codes You can search the current drawing or entire project for location codes A quick read of all the current or selected drawing file is done and a list of location codes used so far is returned Select from the list to automatically update the component with the location code Assign short location codes to com...

Page 569: ...drawings in the current project are scanned and the results are listed in a dialog box Select from the list to assign your new component with a catalog number that is consistent with other similar components in the pro ject Other project Scans each listed drawing in a previous project for the target component type and returns the catalog inform ation in a sub dialog box Make your catalog assignmen...

Page 570: ...inal in the se Wire number quence this wire number assignment is ignored and the actual wire number connecting the right hand side of the symbol is used Manually define the wire layer assignment If this is the last ter minal in the sequence this value is ignored Wire layer Manually define the cable marker tag ID If this is the last terminal in the sequence this value is ignored Cable Manually defi...

Page 571: ... Component toolbar icon to display AutoCAD Electrical s icon menu and then select Terminals Connectors There are four types of terminal behavior that you can select from and five main terminal styles square round hexagon diamond and triangle Each type of terminal behavior is controlled by the terminal block name Non intelligent terminals These do not show up in reports Terminals that take on a ter...

Page 572: ...inal numbers and terminal strip ID names have been used so far Access Click the Insert Component tool Select Terminals and Connectors select the terminal to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing Click Components Insert Component Select Terminals and Connectors select the terminal to insert and specify the insertion point on the drawing Click the Edit Component tool and select the t...

Page 573: ...s an existing name it appears in the edit box if not you can enter a specific ID name Tag Strip Click the and buttons to increment or decre ment the last digit character in the Tag Strip value Specifies the terminal number If there isn t PINLIST information the and buttons increment or Number decrement the terminal number You can also click Pick to select a text object or an attribute on the activ...

Page 574: ...e Pan or Zoom to find the terminal symbol to select Removes the terminal being edited out of the defined association The properties from the original association and the terminal s levels are maintained Break Out Displays the Block Properties dialog box where you can define and maintain terminal block properties Block Properties NOTE This is disabled if the active drawing is not part of the active...

Page 575: ...data is entered into the PinL LnnPINL attribute if present otherwise it is placed into xdata Lists the pin numbers defined on the right side of the terminal block This data is entered into the PinR LnnPINR attribute if present otherwise it is placed into xdata Lists the terminal symbol s reference location in the project The syntax is Sheet Reference based on the drawing configuration Reference Pr...

Page 576: ...om the Catalog lookup Catalog Lists the assembly code for the terminal The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together Assembly Specifies a unique identifier assigned to each terminal The value can be manually typed in the edit box Item Opens the terminal s catalog database from which you can select the Manufacturer and Catalog values Search the database for a Catalog Lookup speci...

Page 577: ...rrespond ing category and then to the Insert Edit dialog box once OK is clicked Inserts or edits extra catalog part numbers on to the selected terminal You can add up to 10 part numbers to any terminal Multiple Catalog These multiple BOM part numbers appear as sub assembly part numbers to the main catalog part number in the various BOM and terminal reports Extracts the details from the catalog dat...

Page 578: ... left The terminal block properties are maintained on every terminal symbol in its association Access Click the Insert Component tool Select Terminals and Connectors from the dialog box and specify the insertion point on the drawing In the Insert Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box click Block Properties Click Components Insert Component Select Terminals and Connectors from the dialog box and specify ...

Page 579: ...edit and maintain properties of the terminal block here Terminal Block Property Definition grid Level Description Specifies the description for the levels of the terminal block Text you enter here displays in the Insert Edit Terminal Symbol and Multiple Level dialog boxes This is a ter minal property that is maintained on every symbol in its association Wires per Connection Specifies the number of...

Page 580: ...hips for terminals schematic to schematic and schematic to panel Schematic to Schematic The schematic to schematic relationship defines separate schematic terminal symbols as one multi level also referred to as multi tier or multi stack terminal block On the schematic drawing each schematic terminal symbol represents one level of the multi level terminal block NOTE Multiple terminal symbols for on...

Page 581: ...symbol into an association with the picked terminal Clicking Add Modify on the Insert Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box This adds the edited symbol into an association with any schematic terminal in the project Prebuilt circuits may contain associated terminals These relationships are maintained when the circuit is inserted Copying a circuit also maintains these relationships within the copied circu...

Page 582: ...minal Strip Editor are automatically associated to the schematic representation Additionally you can click the Components Terminals Associate Terminals tool to select terminals to associate or click Add Modify on the Panel Layout Terminal Insert Edit dialog box to add the panel terminal to an association with a schematic terminal on any drawing in the project Associate terminals Use the Associate ...

Page 583: ...ata block properties Tagstrip value Installation code and Location code are copied from the master terminal and added to the terminals in the association NOTE If the number of selected terminals exceeds the total number of levels defined in the block properties an alert displays and the extra terminals are not added to the association Tips and Hints This tool works on terminal symbols on the same ...

Page 584: ...of an existing association Schematic terminals are removed from any multi tier relationship and any schematic panel relationships Panel terminals are removed from any schematic panel relationships NOTE The properties of the existing terminal association are maintained on each symbol 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Break Apart Terminal Associations tool 2 Click the Break A...

Page 585: ...can be on the same drawing or span multiple drawings within the same project Choose one of the following workflows for editing terminal jumpers Workflow 1 1 Select Components Terminals Edit Jumper 2 Select the primary terminal 3 Do one of the following Select the secondary terminal on the drawing to create a jumper to the primary terminal You cannot select a terminal that is part of another jumper...

Page 586: ... the command prompt and Optional Select additional terminals in the drawing to add to the jumper Press Enter to create the jumper or enter Edit E to edit the existing jumpers Optional If you selected to edit the jumpers make modifications in the Edit Terminal Jumpers dialog box and click OK Optional Enter Show s at the command line to draw temporary broken lines between the primary terminal and se...

Page 587: ...mand prompt Jumper Terminals The button copies the selected terminals to the Jumper Terminals list the selected terminals are then bolded in the Schematic Terminals list or The button removes the selected terminals from the Jumper Terminals list and unbolds the terminal in the Schematic Terminals list Creates a jumper across the selected terminals and displays the Edit Terminal Jumpers dialog box ...

Page 588: ... and then enter Edit E Lists all of the jumpers grouped by Jumper ID at tached to the selected terminal Jumpers to Terminals Specifies the catalog data for the jumper between the primary terminal and the selected terminal If Catalog Data the selected terminal is not jumpered these options are disabled Manufacturer Specifies the manufacturer name Catalog Specifies the catalog name Assembly Specifie...

Page 589: ...e no remain ing terminals in the group the jumper is de leted Single terminal Deletes the terminal from the jumper If this is the last terminal to be deleted the entire jumper is deleted Displays the selected terminal in a preview window at the bottom of the dialog box View By default the preview window is hidden This can be switched using Show and Hide once a terminal has been viewed Switches the...

Page 590: ... to exit the command Terminal Renumber Project Wide The Project wide Schematic Terminal Resequence dialog box displays Follow these steps 3 Enter the terminal strip tag ID and the starting terminal number 4 If you want to refine the search enter an installation or location code to use when searching the drawings Click Project or Drawing to select an installation or location code from existing term...

Page 591: ... by including a location value Location code Specifies the number to begin the terminal strip with you can use alphanumeric values The default value is 1 Starting terminal number After you click OK select the drawings to process from the active project View terminal wire connections Schematic and panel layout wiring diagram terminal symbols can carry TERMDESC attribute values used to control which...

Page 592: ... a group of objects using a boundary box Mark internal connections This tool marks attributes with an I for internal wiring 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Terminal Show Internal External Connections tool 2 Click the arrow on the Show Terminal Connection Codes tool to access the Terminal Mark Internal Connections tool 3 Click the Terminal Mark Internal Connections tool 4 S...

Page 593: ...The attribute will be marked with an arrow to indicate whether it is an ex ternal value Erase connection codes 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Terminal Show Internal External Connections tool 2 Click the arrow on the Terminal Show Internal External Connections tool to access the Terminal Erase Internal Extern al Connections tool 3 Click the Terminal Erase Internal External...

Page 594: ...ext 3 Press Enter to end the selection The Terminal Strip Representation dialog box displays 4 In the Terminal Strip Representation dialog box sort add remove and re arrange the terminal strip layout 5 Click OK The Terminal Strip Representation Setup dialog box displays Set the text size terminal height and width sizes and terminal strip orientation 6 Make your selections and click OK 7 Select the...

Page 595: ...ist of terminals in descending order Reverse sort Moves the selected terminal up one spot in the terminal list Move up Moves the selected terminal down one spot in the terminal list Move down Creates a new terminal to add to the terminal strip Specify the terminal name number the number of terminals to insert and indicate whether to make the new terminal the spare terminal Insert new Opens the Edi...

Page 596: ...TerminalText Specifies to align the text to the left center or right side of the ter minal strip Text Sets the height of the terminal strip Height Sets the width of the terminal strip Width Specifies the layer for the table text The selected layer is displayed next to the button on the dialog box Layer Terminal pitch andTerminal width Sets the spacing between entries in the terminal strip Terminal...

Page 597: ...ng product shipment while at other times they can be used to distribute power to other devices The Terminal Strip Editor defines the locations for these connected devices during the system design process Terminal strip editing is primarily used towards the end of the control system design cycle to expedite the labeling numbering and rearranging of terminals on a terminal strip A document that is c...

Page 598: ...nts is the limitation of the number of wires that can be connected to a particular device for example terminal When modifying terminals you can assign the number of wires allowed for each side of the terminal in the Wires Per Connection section of the Terminal Block Properties dialog box Extra terminals get placed only when editing a terminal using the Terminal Strip Editor Once you define the Wir...

Page 599: ...minals accessories multi level terminals and destination locations Catalog Code Assignment tab In addition to what can be done in the Terminal Strip tab you can assign delete copy or paste catalog part numbers to terminal blocks Cable Information tab View the terminal destination locations based on the cable assignments Modify the terminal block properties spare terminals and terminal tag or numbe...

Page 600: ... of the selected terminal strip You can preview the terminal in the Preview window before inserting or updating the terminal strip in the current drawing 4 Modify the terminal strip and click OK To place the terminal strip on the current drawing click Insert Terminal Strip on the Preview Layout tab You can also click Rebuild or Refresh to update the edited graphical or table object terminal strip ...

Page 601: ...terminal strip definition that has not been placed into the schematic Some of the properties are written to each terminal symbol on the graphical terminal strip layout drawing Specifies the Installation code value for the new terminal strip Click Browse to display a list of exist Installation ing installation values found in the active drawing entire project or an external list default inst Pick f...

Page 602: ...g box and click Edit or New Click the Terminal Strip tab You can sort the terminal blocks inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box by selecting the column headers The first click on the header sorts the column in ascending order The second click sorts in descending order The sort criteria applies to all tabs inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box so you do not have to sort again if y...

Page 603: ... line entry terminal block has only two wires connected with its destinations on opposing sides left right Use the terminal block properties to connect more wires to the terminal block which changes the block into a multiple line terminal entry Properties Defines or edits terminal block properties When a multi level terminal block is selected the properties Edit Terminal Block Properties are edite...

Page 604: ...rip dialog box specify the new starting number and other options for renumbering the terminal NOTE You cannot renumber a terminal that uses a wire number as its terminal number Additionally duplicate terminal numbers are not restricted Moves an entire terminal including all levels and any extra terminals created due to wiring constraints on Move Terminal the terminal strip You can move the termina...

Page 605: ...nals Accessories Destinations Toggles an entire location code from an Internal des tination to an External destination or from an External Toggle Location destination to an Internal destination You don t have to select any terminal blocks from the terminal listing Toggles an entire installation code from an Internal destination to an External destination or from an Ex Toggle Installation ternal de...

Page 606: ...ne of the levels in the new asso ciation Separates one or more levels from the multiple level terminal block into separate terminal blocks When Break Apart Terminal Associations the new terminal definitions are created they retain the same properties as the original terminal One terminal Breaks the selected levels from their original association and adds them into a new association together Separa...

Page 607: ...al Destination Terminal Block Information and External Destination The bold vertical grid lines make it easier to determine the differences in these sections The horizontal grid lines delineate between wires connected to the terminal blocks each row indicates one wire per side The bold horizontal grid lines make it easier to distinguish separations between terminal blocks on the strip Select the t...

Page 608: ...es are assigned to every terminal symbol in its association You can define up to 99 terminal levels in the block properties Copies terminal block properties from one terminal to be pasted into another terminals Copy Terminal Block Properties Pastes the previously copied terminal block properties into the selected terminals Paste Terminal Block Properties Terminal Modifies the selected terminal blo...

Page 609: ...nsert Spare Terminal dialog box to Insert Spare Terminal define a terminal block number or name specify the number of spares to be inserted and to insert the spare terminals above or below the highlighted ter minal You can add up to 10 000 spare terminals into the terminal block NOTE Spare terminal assignments are temporary for the current session of the Terminal Strip Editor Place the graphical t...

Page 610: ...xternal right or from External to Internal Toggle Terminal Destinations Switches both destination values for the highlighted terminal block The Internal destinations switch to the Switch Terminal Destinations External right destinations while all External destin ations switch to Internal destinations Moves the destinations within the terminal level definition All the selected destinations are move...

Page 611: ...minals are assigned the same properties as the original definition from which they were originally associated in Catalog Assigns catalog part numbers to the selected terminal blocks spare terminals or accessories The catalog Assign Catalog Number number assignments are written back to the schematic and panel drawings This displays the Parts Catalog dialog box Once the catalog number is selected fr...

Page 612: ...g box by selecting the column headers The first click on the header sorts the column in ascending order The second click sorts in descending order The sort criteria applies to all tabs inside of the Terminal Strip Editor dialog box so you do not have to sort again if you switch between tabs Terminal Listing There are three sections to the grid Internal Destination Terminal Block Information and Ex...

Page 613: ...ion A single line entry terminal block has only two wires connected with its destinations on opposing sides left right Use the terminal block properties to connect more wires to the terminal block which changes the block into a multiple line terminal entry Properties Defines or edits terminal block properties When a multi level terminal block is selected the properties Edit Terminal Block Properti...

Page 614: ...mber and other options for renumbering the terminal NOTE You cannot renumber a terminal that uses a wire number as its terminal number Additionally duplicate terminal numbers are not restricted Moves an entire terminal including all levels and any extra terminals created due to wiring constraints on Move Terminal the terminal strip You can move the terminal block up or down one row in the listing ...

Page 615: ...nals Accessories Destinations Toggles an entire location code from an Internal des tination to an External destination or from an External Toggle Location destination to an Internal destination You don t have to select any terminal blocks from the terminal listing Toggles an entire installation code from an Internal destination to an External destination or from an Ex Toggle Installation ternal de...

Page 616: ...he Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit or New Click the Layout Preview tab GraphicalTerminal Strip TabularTerminal Strip Table Object Terminal Strip Specifies the type of terminal strip to generate The dialog box options change depending on whether you are creating a graphical or tabular terminal strip You can insert an AutoCAD table object as a tabular terminal strip This allows fo...

Page 617: ...ale on Insert Specifies the angle to use when inserting the graphical representation onto the drawing file Select from the list of pre defined angles Angle on Insert Tabular Layout Generates a tabular representation including terminal numbers wiring information and terminal destination information The table created is a grouping of AutoCAD block files with specific attributes to display the termin...

Page 618: ... Electrical places each symbol in the drawing at a relative distance based upon the height of the geometry in the block file Specifies the number of rows per section Dividing the total number of rows by the rows per section Rows Per Section with the excess falling into the last section determ ines the total number of sections Specifies which section to display in the preview window and then insert...

Page 619: ...use for the tabular report Select from the list or click Browse to browse to and Table Style select another drawing file whose table styles you want to use NOTE If the selected table style is not in the TableStyle dwg file it is added Defines the columns for the tabular report The se lections are stored in the table when it is inserted Define Columns and the next time the terminal strip is edited ...

Page 620: ...e User folder in the Documents and Settings location Uses the default settings for creating the tabular report Default Update Preview Refreshes the preview window with any changes made with the preview controls or the Terminal Strip Editor If you modify the total number of sections in the terminal strip or change the number of terminals per section you can refresh the preview Use icons or the righ...

Page 621: ...the In sert Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box click Block Properties Click the Edit Component tool and select the terminal to edit In the Insert Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box click Block Properties Click Components Edit Component and select the terminal to edit In the Insert Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box click Block Properties NOTE You can also access this dialog box by clicking Edit Terminal Bl...

Page 622: ... connection point NOTE These properties do not limit the number of connections allowed on the schematic Pin Left Pin Right Specifies labels for pin numbers associated to the terminal destina tions These fill in the LnnPINL and LnnPINR attributes on the terminal block when its level is selected This is a terminal property that is maintained on every symbol in its association Terminal block property...

Page 623: ...nstallation values found in Installation Code the active drawing entire project or an external list default inst Pick from the list to automatically update the component with the installation code Changes the location codes Click Browse to display a list of existing location values found in the active Location Code drawing entire project or an external list de fault inst Pick from the list to auto...

Page 624: ...olbar click the Terminal Strip Editor tool Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit On the Ter minal Strip Catalog Code Assignment or Cable Information tab select the terminal to modify In the Terminals section click Reassign Terminal Click Panel Layout Terminal Strip Editor Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit On the Te...

Page 625: ...strip if you renumber a terminal that has one or more levels still available NOTE You cannot renumber a terminal that uses a wire number as its terminal number Additionally duplicate terminal numbers are not restricted Access On the Panel Layout toolbar click the Terminal Strip Editor tool Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit On the Ter minal Strip Catalog ...

Page 626: ...r click the Terminal Strip Editor tool Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit On the Ter minal Strip Catalog Code Assignment or Cable Information tab select a ter minal from the list In the Spare section click Insert Spare Terminal Click Panel Layout Terminal Strip Editor Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit On the Ter...

Page 627: ... from the Catalog lookup Catalog Lists the assembly code for the spare terminal The Assembly code is used to link multiple part numbers together Assembly Opens the spare terminal s catalog database from which you can manually enter or select the Manu Catalog Lookup facturer or Catalog values Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected spare terminal Database queries a...

Page 628: ...ent if you want to incre Number ment the terminal ID when the accessory is inserted If the quantity is set to less than 2 you cannot in crement the ID Specifies a numeric value for the number of accessor ies to insert The default value is 1 Use or to increment the value by a single step Quantity Lists the manufacturer number for the accessory Enter a value or select one from the Catalog lookup Man...

Page 629: ...n tab Destinations section click Toggle Location Click Panel Layout Terminal Strip Editor Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit On the Terminal Strip Catalog Code Assignment or Cable Information tab Destinations section click Toggle Loca tion NOTE If components are present that have a blank value for the location code question marks display in the dialog box...

Page 630: ...he terminal Internal Destination Lists connections to the terminal that reside in a different location than the terminal External Destination Toggles moves locations from one side of the ter minal to the other Select the installation value to move in either list and click the appropriate button Toggle External to Internal Toggle Internal to External Associate terminals Use this tool to combine two...

Page 631: ...al prop erties The panel symbol s level numbering is a pound symbol Label Lists the level description defined in the terminal block properties Number Lists the terminal numbers defined in the association Only one terminal number is allowed per level and each level displays its re spective terminal number or text Panel termin al symbols do not display terminal numbers Terminal levels with an assign...

Page 632: ...in the terminal definition Move Up Move Down Select row cell styles Defines row styles to be used in the table style The selections are stored in the table when it is inserted and the next time the terminal strip is edited the settings are read back in Access On the Panel Layout toolbar click the Terminal Strip Editor tool Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Ed...

Page 633: ...rminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit On the Layout Preview tab select Tabular Terminal Strip Table Object Click Define Columns From the Panel Layout menu select Terminal Strip Editor Make your selection on the Terminal Strip Selection dialog box and click Edit On the Layout Preview tab select Tabular Terminal Strip Table Object Click Define Columns Lists the available fields for format...

Page 634: ...e numeric value in the edit box Width Available Fields Left Installation column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Installation1 Left Location column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Location1 Left Device column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Device1 Left Pin column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Pin1 Left Wire column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Wire1 Left Type column in the Termi...

Page 635: ... column in the Terminal Strip Editor Cable Information grid Cable2 Right Type column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Type2 Right Wire column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Wire2 Right Pin column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Pin2 Right Device column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Device2 Right Location column in the Terminal Strip Editor grids Location2 Right Installation column in...

Page 636: ...template file to use 6 Select whether to create the table as blocks or an AutoCAD table object 7 Specify the table layout settings If you selected Table Blocks specify the header block row block an notation format scale angle and rows per section If you selected Table Object specify the table style row style table title and layer Select whether to insert the tables in a new drawing rebuild an exis...

Page 637: ... be selected using either the Shift or Control keys while highlighting rows or by clicking and dragging the mouse Drawing Information forTable Output Specifies a starting drawing file location and file name to use for the automatic creation of the First Drawing Name drawing files The drawings are automatically added to the active project and display at the end of the drawing list in the Project Ma...

Page 638: ...s TERM LAY_ROW DWG Click Browse to search for a row block to be used in this tabular terminal strip layout NOTE You can leave this field blank if you do not want the table rows added to the drawing However we do not recommend it because the table will be empty Tabular layout AutoCAD block files insertion points are required to be in line with one another in the Y axis AutoCAD Electrical places eac...

Page 639: ... 40 then 3 sections drawing files are created Table Layout forTable Objects Specifies the table style to use for the table Select from the list or click Browse to browse to and select Table Style another drawing file whose table styles you want to use NOTE If the selected table style is not in the TableStyle dwg file it is added Defines the columns for the table The selections are stored in the ta...

Page 640: ...y saved settings in a tsl file that you previously created Browse Saves the settings to an external file with extension tsl that you can later reuse The default folder Save As location is the User folder in the Documents and Settings location Uses the default settings for creating the table Default Specifies the exact location of the table for each drawing being created Section Placement Creates a...

Page 641: ...If you click No the terminal strip is not inserted The terminal strips that were found are updated Overview of terminal properties database The terminal properties database file _TERMPROPS table in the default_cat mdb can be viewed edited and expanded using the Terminal Properties Database Editor tool The terminal properties table holds the terminal properties based on the manufacturer catalog and...

Page 642: ... label definition for the left side of the terminal 255 characters maximum TPINL Pin label definition for the right side of the terminal 255 characters maximum TPINR Definition of the wiring constraints 255 characters maximum WIRESPERCONNECTION NOTE When dealing with a multi tier terminal a comma is used as a delimiter for the LevelDescription WiresPerConnection TPINR and TPINL fields For example ...

Page 643: ...r create a new record in the Edit Record dialog box specify the values to assign to the record and click OK 5 In the Edit dialog box click Save Exit Select terminal properties table Use this tool to select the relevant _TERMPROPS table to edit or create a new one Access Click Components Terminals Terminal Properties Database Editor Lists all of the TERMPROPS tables that are in the catalog database...

Page 644: ...de to a terminal Use this to edit the terminal properties database Access Click Components Terminals Terminal Properties Database Editor Specify the table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit This lookup database table is a table within the catalog lookup Access mdb file The default file name is default_cat mdb table _TERMPROPS and comes populated with a sample of ...

Page 645: ...record to make a new record You cannot have two duplicate copies in the database Add Copy Removes the selected record from the database Delete Edit record Access Click Components Terminals Terminal Properties Database Editor Specify the table to create and click Create or select the table to edit and click Edit In the Edit dialog box click Add New Add Copy or Edit Microsoft Access internal use REC...

Page 646: ... definition for the right side of the terminal 255 characters maximum TPINR Definition of the wiring constraints 255 characters maximum WIRESPERCONNECTION When dealing with a multi tier terminal a comma is used as a delimiter for the LevelDescription TPINL TPINR and WiresPerConnection fields For example the LevelDescription may be UPPER LOWER and the WiresPerConnection may be 2 2 634 Chapter 9 Ter...

Page 647: ...s In this chapter Working with Connectors Bend wires at right angles Insert multiple bus wiring Import data fromAutodesk Inventor Professional Cable Harness Overview of the spreadsheet import file structure Insert splices 10 635 ...

Page 648: ...e Insert Connector toolbar contains connector insertion and editing tools Ladder Style Schematic Point to Point Style Schematic In addition to the tools specifically related to connectors found on the Connector toolbar you can utilize other AutoCAD Electrical tools for editing your point to point wiring diagrams Use the Edit Component tool to edit the pin assign ments on the parametrically generat...

Page 649: ...ert Wires tool to route single wire connec tions Use the Multiple Wire Bus tool Component mode to insert and route multiple wires in one tool Insert Wires NOTE A wire connection point should only have up to 3 wire connections tied to it Adding more wires to a single point prevents the angled wire connection to tie uniquely to the wire connection point Use point to point wiring tools 637 ...

Page 650: ... the connector display options 6 Optional Click Details for more options to define settings for the size shape and display of the parametrically built connect or symbols 7 Click Insert A preview outline of the connector displays for placement on the drawing It shows rounded corners for the plug side of the connector An x indicates the insertion point of the connector and the arrow indicates the pl...

Page 651: ...ess V at the command prompt to switch between vertical and horizontal orientations Based on where the outline is in the flip process the Tab keystroke reverses the connector either about its long axis or end for end When in its horizontal orientation a series of Tabs cycles the image through these four orientations TAB 3 TAB 2 TAB 1 Start point Switch layout using the X key Press X at the command ...

Page 652: ... connector exceeds the total number of wires underlying the connector the remaining pins follow the specified fixed spacing value Rotate connectors Use this tool to rotate the connector about its insertion point in 90 degree increments The wire connections do not reroute with each rotation of the connector You must resolve wiring using the wire editing tools 640 Chapter 10 Point to Point Wiring To...

Page 653: ... Connector tool 2 Click the Rotate Connector tool 3 Specify whether to hold the current attribute orientation If you select Yes default the attribute text orientation does not rotate as the connector rotates 4 Select the connector to rotate The connector automatically rotates 90 degrees 5 Keep clicking on the connector until the appropriate position is reached 6 Press Enter or Esc to exit the comm...

Page 654: ...econd Rotate First Rotate Original Reverse connectors Use this tool to reverse the orientation of the connector about its horizontal or vertical axis Any existing wire connections don t automatically reroute to 642 Chapter 10 Point to Point Wiring Tools ...

Page 655: ...es depending on its original orientation NOTE For a single receptacle connector with no rounded corners the appearance of the graphics appears unchanged but the wire connection attributes actually move to the other side of the con nector 4 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command Stretch connectors Use this tool to increase or decrease the connector s overall shell length You might do this to make r...

Page 656: ...ormation 5 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command Tips and Hints Stretch Connector does not support window selection Turn Snap ON The stretch begins at the end of the connector There is not a first point of displacement If the stretched connector end runs over the top of the connector s tag ID attribute attribute name TAG1 or TAG2 then this attribute along with attributes INST LOC DESC1 DESC2 and ...

Page 657: ...block The de fault is preset to be in line with the first set of pins on the split off piece If you do not want to accept the default you can enter the coordinates or click Pick Point and then select the origin point on the drawing 6 Optional Set the break type no lines straight lines jagged lines or draw it The default is set to jagged lines 7 Optional Select to reposition the child block to move...

Page 658: ... optional pin list associated to the selected connector The PINLIST values defined on the parent symbol are queried in the project database to determine the next available pin number on the connector component This checks across the entire project to find the pin numbers used on both parent and any child connector symbols If a PINLIST value is not defined then the next available sequential pin num...

Page 659: ...he Object Snaps options select Insert and click the pin to align the new pin to The new pin is inserted onto the selected component and is lined up with the pin on the other connector Delete pins from connectors Once the connector is inserted onto the drawing you can edit the connector pins found inside of the connector Use this tool to remove a pin from an existing connector and if the connector ...

Page 660: ...he connector They are renamed so that they are effectively ig nored If the connector is subsequently stretched or split then these deleted pin attributes are purged from the connector block instance 4 Press Enter or Esc to exit the command Tips and Hints Deleting a pin that has a connected wire does not remove the wire In this case the wire no longer is connected to the connector It appears to be ...

Page 661: ...ins are swapped between the two selections 5 Select another set of pins to swap or press Enter or Esc to exit the command Move pins Use this tool to reposition pins within an existing connector 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Connector tool to access the Move Pins tool 2 Click the Move Pins tool 3 Select the connector pin to move 4 Specify the new location for the pin The pin relocates along the c...

Page 662: ...on enter a new pin number value in the edit boxes or click the arrows to either increase or decrease both plug and receptacle values by one 6 Optional Enter a description for the plug or receptacle termin al 7 Click OK Insert connector Use this tool to generate a connector symbol from user defined parameters The symbol is created on the fly and inserted as a block insert into your active drawing f...

Page 663: ...e 5 On the other hand if you select endpoints in empty space the total number of pins is based upon dividing the distance between the two pick points by the Pin Spacing value Generates the connector with a fixed spacing from one pin to the next This is the Pin Spacing value If the Pin Spacing Fixed Spacing edit box is left blank the fixed spacing value defaults to the drawing s ladder default spac...

Page 664: ... box that Allow Spacers Breaks prompts you for the insertion of each connector pin prior to committing the connector block definition to the draw ing file The running count of pins inserted versus total pins defined for the connector is listed at the top of the dialog box Select an option for inserting the other pins Insert Next Connection Continues building the con nector by inserting the next pi...

Page 665: ...ponent and link to parent using any of the normal methods Creates the child symbol with a jagged or broken top If unselected the child symbol has a rounded corner determ Start with Break ined by the radius dimension defined in the Size section of the dialog box Orientation Use to quickly change the connector s orientation prior to placing it into the drawing file This orientation change also modif...

Page 666: ...tacle This line becomes part of the block definition for the connect or Creates the connector as a single block file showing the plug representation only Plug Only Creates the connector as a single block file showing the receptacle representation only Receptacle Only Display Use to define the connector s placement on the drawing relative to other connectors and the drawing border This controls whi...

Page 667: ...s assigned to the hidden pins will still show up in various wire connection from to reports You can unhide hidden attributes using the Move Show Attribute tool Size The values in the edit boxes define the parameters used to build the graphical outline that represents the shell of the connector Specifies the width of the receptacle side of the connector This value can be the same as the plug side R...

Page 668: ... Connector dialog box select Allow Spacers Breaks and click Insert In the Custom Pin Spaces Breaks dialog box click Break Symbol Now From the Components menu select Insert Connector Insert Connector In the Insert Connector dialog box select Allow Spacers Breaks and click Insert In the Custom Pin Spaces Breaks dialog box click Break Symbol Now Selecting Break Symbol Now on the Custom Pin Spaces Bre...

Page 669: ...he connector block definition to the drawing file The running count of pins inserted versus total pins defined for the connector is listed at the top of the dialog box Select an option for inserting the other pins Insert Next Connection Continues building the connector by inserting the next pin repeated prompting until all pins are inserted Add Spacer Adds a spacer in place of a pin on the connect...

Page 670: ...for the connector The first column is the value assigned to TERM01 or TERM01P while the second column assigns its number to TERM02 or TERM02J Select the pin from the list to populate the grid The Pin list table in the catalog database default_cat mdb supports connectors drawn in the ladder diagram or connector diagram schematics Displays an x for all pins that are displayed since they are part of ...

Page 671: ...he selected row Enter a new value in the edit box or click the arrows to increment or decrement both numbers on the plug and receptacle Pin Numbers NOTE If you replace pin numbers through editing the replaced pin numbers may go back into the Pin List if they were originally defined in the Pin List range Edits the plug and receptacle terminal descriptions The value you enter in the edit box display...

Page 672: ...k the arrow on the Insert Wires tool to access the Multiple Wire Bus tool 2 Click the Multiple Wire Bus tool 3 Set the horizontal and vertical spacing for the wires 4 Select the mode for defining the starting at position Starting at component wire connection points Select the radio button and click OK Select or window select the wire connection points on the component Starting from another bus Sel...

Page 673: ...indicating the direction and number of wires to be placed on the drawing You can turn a corner by moving your cursor out of line with the bus To reverse or flip the turn s phase sequence press F Enter The phantom wire display displays in red when it detects that the routing approaches within a wire connection trap distance of another wire 5 Click a point on the screen to set the endpoint of the wi...

Page 674: ...d the wire types in the XML file are applied to the Wire Layer in the AutoCAD Electrical drawing Additionally wire numbers and cable marker symbols are inserted onto the drawing The wire numbers are inserted following the drawing s wire number setting above wire in line with wire or below wire The first cable marker listed in the XML file is inserted as the parent and the subsequent markers of the...

Page 675: ...anufacturer Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Definition VENDOR Save on component Xdata in Auto CAD Electrical Definition Custom STRIP LENGTH Defined in the component library definition part editing Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Definition Custom Various user defined Defined in the harness occurrence level Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Occurrence Custom Various user defined Wire Properties Unique wire numbe...

Page 676: ...attrib ute in AutoCAD Electrical Definition Cable Wire Name Defined in the cable library definition part editing Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Definition Custom Various user defined Defined in the harness occurrence level Xdata in AutoCAD Electrical Occurrence Custom Various user defined Splice Properties Unique splice ID TAG1 attribute in AutoCAD Electrical Occurrence Splice ID Splice library defin...

Page 677: ...ten into a log file so you know AutoCAD Electrical was unable to resolve the wire connections in the drawing The log file name is drawing file name LOG and is found in the same folder as the drawing file 1 In Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable Harness define wire names and connections for your assembly file 2 Define cable tags and conductor IDs and their connections in the assembly file 3 Select...

Page 678: ...at once or to insert it manually pin by pin with an option to insert spacers or to break the connector into 2 or more pieces Optional Click the Rotate or Flip buttons to change the display of the connector symbol Optional Click Details for more options to define settings for the size shape and display of the parametrically built connector symbols 9 Select the connectors to insert from the list and...

Page 679: ...or list file xml xls mdb and csv in the Connector List File Selection dialog box and click Open The connector list file is retained in memory for subsequent selections of this tool NOTE If you select to open a spreadsheet or database that contains multiple sheets or tables the Select Input Source dialog box displays where you can select the sheet or table to open Connector List Columns are not edi...

Page 680: ...The static text shows the total number of connector components listed in the grid control Connectors Displays all splices found in the import file in the grid display The static text shows the total number of splices listed in the grid control Splices NOTE If there is a selection active when filtering the list and one or more of the selected rows drops out of the display a warning message displays...

Page 681: ...prompts you for the insertion of each connector pin prior to committing the Allow Spacers Breaks connector block definition to the drawing file The number of pins inserted in the block definition out of the total number of pins defined in the connector is indicated at the top of the dialog box Select an option for inserting the other pins Insert Next Connection Continues adding pins to the con nec...

Page 682: ...ol to change the wire number through the connector symbol By Wire Number Change default the wire numbering is the same on both sides of the connector Creates the connector with a line down the middle of the block to indicate the separation of the plug Add Divider Line and receptacle This line becomes part of the block definition for the connector Creates the connector as a single block file with t...

Page 683: ...are still defined in the block definition on the drawing file If you selected Plug Only or Receptacle Only for the Type the pin display options are show or hide only These show or hide the pin numbers on a single plug or receptacle symbol Size Defines the outside shell size for the connector The values in the edit boxes build the graphical shell that represents the connector on the point to point ...

Page 684: ...insertion point The distance is used for the entire connector or breaking the connector Specifies the radial dimension of the rounded portion of the plug representation If left blank a radius is not created on the plug Radius connector If you enter a value that exceeds the overall plug side distance the radius value is erased and the radius is not created on the plug connector Pick File Displays t...

Page 685: ... a time and returns to the Connect or Selection dialog box with the connector row marked as x Single row selection Places the selected connectors in consecutive order Steps through the list of connectors previously selected in the Multiple row selection dialog box placing them in the drawing one at a time After the connectors are created the Connector Selection dialog box displays with the connect...

Page 686: ...IN1 5 Text Description of CMP1 DESC1 6 Text Catalog number for CMP1 CAT1 7 Text Manufacturer of CAT1 MFG1 8 Text Assembly code for CMP1 ASM1 9 Text CMP2 C Connector S Splice TYPE2 10 Text Installation Code of CMP2 INST2 11 Text Location Code of CMP2 LOC2 12 Text Component 2 CMP2 13 Text Connected pin on CMP2 PIN2 14 Text Description of CMP2 DESC2 15 Text Catalog number of CMP2 CAT2 16 Text Manufac...

Page 687: ...ble are not important but the position is Import connector wire lists Use the Insert Connector from List tool to import a connector wire list from another application such as Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable Harness NOTE If the AutoCAD Electrical drawing is missing one end of the connector or if a connection was not found wiring information is displayed next to the pin and the information is w...

Page 688: ...wser and select Export Harness Data from the Cable and Harness panel You are prompted to select a file name and location for the export of harness component and wiring data An XML file is created for import into AutoCAD Electrical 4 In AutoCAD Electrical create a new drawing file 676 Chapter 10 Point to Point Wiring Tools ...

Page 689: ...ce or to insert it manually pin by pin with an option to insert spacers or to break the connector into 2 or more pieces Optional Click the Rotate or Flip buttons to change the display of the connector symbol Optional Click Details for more options to define settings for the size shape and display of the parametrically built connector symbols 9 Select the connectors to insert from the list and clic...

Page 690: ...the connector list file xml xls mdb and csv in the Connector List File Selection dialog box and click Open The connector list file is retained in memory for subsequent selections of this tool NOTE If you select to open a spreadsheet or database that contains multiple sheets or tables the Select Input Source dialog box displays where you can select the sheet or table to open Connector List Columns ...

Page 691: ...atic text shows the total number of connector components listed in the grid control Connectors Displays all splices found in the import file in the grid display The static text shows the total number of splices listed in the grid control Splices NOTE If there is a selection active when filtering the list and one or more of the selected rows drops out of the display a warning message displays where...

Page 692: ...g box that prompts you for the insertion of each connector pin prior to committing the Allow Spacers Breaks connector block definition to the drawing file The number of pins inserted in the block definition out of the total number of pins defined in the connector is indicated at the top of the dialog box Select an option for inserting the other pins Insert Next Connection Continues adding pins to ...

Page 693: ... change the wire number through the connector symbol By Wire Number Change default the wire numbering is the same on both sides of the connector Creates the connector with a line down the middle of the block to indicate the separation of the plug Add Divider Line and receptacle This line becomes part of the block definition for the connector Creates the connector as a single block file with the pl...

Page 694: ... its value are still defined in the block definition on the drawing file If you selected Plug Only or Receptacle Only for the Type the pin display options are show or hide only These show or hide the pin numbers on a single plug or receptacle symbol Size Defines the outside shell size for the connector The values in the edit boxes build the graphical shell that represents the connector on the poin...

Page 695: ...tion point The distance is used for the entire connector or breaking the connector Specifies the radial dimension of the rounded portion of the plug representation If left blank a radius is not created on the plug Radius connector If you enter a value that exceeds the overall plug side distance the radius value is erased and the radius is not created on the plug connector Pick File Displays the Co...

Page 696: ...ing filename LOG and is found in the same folder as the drawing file Insert Upon selection of one or more rows in the grid display this button is enabled Once selected the parametric connector program launches to create a connector image in the drawing Places one connector at a time and returns to the Connect or Selection dialog box with the connector row marked as x Single row selection Places th...

Page 697: ... the splice to insert from the icon menu enter the splice name in the Type it box or click Browse to browse to and select the symbol from another location 4 Click OK 5 Pick the insertion point on the drawing Place the symbol on an existing wire causing the symbol to break the wire or place it in empty space where you can later draw a wire through the symbol or connect one or more wires to each end...

Page 698: ...686 ...

Page 699: ...ove from reference to reference Move between drawings Plot one or more drawings Create a project wide script file Project wide update or retag Track drawing changes Translate description text Publish to the web Title Block Utility 11 687 ...

Page 700: ... Surfer tool to move from reference to reference across the project drawing set A new window opens and the original window closes when Surf is selected unless you hold the Shift key while running the command 688 Chapter 11 Project Wide Tools ...

Page 701: ...or all other reports AutoCAD Electrical looks for the Tag field first then the Catalog Number field If a non surfable cell is selected it looks for the component tag then a wire num ber and finally a catalog number All references relating to the component including panel layout and panel nameplate references display in the Surf dialog box 3 Double click any reference listed in the Surf dialog box ...

Page 702: ...re drawings each drawing is opened automatically 3 Using the Surf dialog box edit the component display a BOM listing for each reference or select a different component refer ence 4 Click Close Surf Move from reference to reference across the project drawing set In addition to surfing on a component tag catalog number or wire number on the current drawing you can surf on a report table cell contai...

Page 703: ...cription Displays the extra non Installation Location matching references when in IEC tagging mode If Show more unselected only the exact surf matches display in the list NOTE This is unavailable if there aren t any non Installation Location matching references or if you are not in IEC tagging mode Makes changes on the active drawing visible to the surfing tool Freshen Edits a reference using the ...

Page 704: ...y displayed Delete NOTE Child and other related devices will not be deleted Changes the component terminal or signal refer ence you want to surf Pick New List Reduces the apparent magnification of the drawing area Zoom Out Goes directly to the reference of the highlighted entry Go to Special codes in the surf list box Component symbol c Parent or standalone schematic symbol p Terminal t Wire numbe...

Page 705: ...Move between drawings Use Next and Previous to move among the drawings inside of the active project A new window is opened and the original window is closed when Move between drawings 693 ...

Page 706: ...he Project Manager and selecting Close from the context menu Plot one or more drawings Batch plot the full drawing set or a subsection of the drawing set 1 On the Project Manager click the arrow on the Publish Plot tool and select Plot Project 2 Select one or more drawings to plot 3 Click OK 4 In the Batch Plotting Options and Order dialog box select the layout tab to plot 5 Select the output devi...

Page 707: ...wings 10 Click OK Project Batch plotting options and order Batch plot the full drawing set or a subsection of the drawing set Access On the Project Manager click the arrow on the Publish Plot tool and select Plot Project Select the drawings to process and click OK Layout tab to plot Selects the layout tab to plot Change the tab by selecting from the pick list Optional For each drawing Run an optio...

Page 708: ...tion file contains information such as the device driver and model the output port to which the device is connected and various device specific settings Use an existing plotter configuration file pc3 Use plot config pc3 Use the default plotter configuration Use layout tab s default Detailed plot configuration mode Turns detailed plot configuration options on or off Enter an optional page setup nam...

Page 709: ...extents 1 Create an ASCII text script file called model_ext scr 2 Add the following AutoCAD commands and AutoLISP functions setvar TILEMODE 0 ZOOM EXT load c myprograms chktitle lsp NOTE Double backslashes must be used CHKTITLE QSAVE 3 Test the script for proper operation On the current drawing issue the SCRIPT command followed by the script file name If the script runs properly it is ready for pr...

Page 710: ...er other options such as component retag or ladder resequencing is performed Wire Number and SignalTag Retag Sets options for wire number retagging Click Setup to display the Wire Tagging project wide dialog box Here you can insert or update wire numbers associated with wire line networks across a project Ladder References Renumbers each ladder sequentially Defines options for starting reference n...

Page 711: ...ences down Sheet S value Automates resequencing the sheet value on consecutive drawings Enter a number to start the resequencing Resequence Start with Select to move the current sheet value up or down by a given count Bump Up Down by Drawing D value Performs a project wide update of the drawing s D DWG NAME parameter Other Configuration Settings Updates the drawing parameters related to component ...

Page 712: ...if a component or wire number is deleted it must reference the MARKVERIFY table that is saved in the project s database file If the project database file is erased after the Mark option is run then a subsequent Verify command cannot report deleted items since it is limited to reporting only changes involving new inserts copies and edited components and wire numbers The Verify command detects and r...

Page 713: ...to detect changes to any lines or wires in the drawings 5 Click OK 6 Enter your initials and any comments about the drawing set and then click OK This information along with the current time and date is included in later reporting Invisible flags are placed on the wire numbers and component tags These flags do not change the appearance or functioning of the drawings However they may increase the d...

Page 714: ...gs must be named and part of the active project to use this command Access Click the arrow on the Project Manager tool to access the Mark Verify Drawings tool From the Projects menu select Mark Verify Drawings Specifies to mark or verify the active drawing or process all drawings in the current project Mark verify drawing or project Places invisible information on all AutoCAD Electrical components...

Page 715: ...rsion tool 3 Select to run the command on the entire project the active drawing selected drawings or on selected objects in the drawing 4 Select the From and To languages to use 5 Specify if multiple lines of the component description text are translated based on exact or partial matches By default the conversion will look for exact matches on the description labels you select with partial match a...

Page 716: ...o Translates the selected item What to do Determines if multiple lines of the component description text is translated based on exact or partial matches Translation on NOTE By default translation is performed on exact matches only Edit language lookup file Opens the current language table for review and modification The default table is wd_lang1 mdb Access Click the arrow on the Project Manager to...

Page 717: ...f each language list Copy phrase Deletes all translations of the selected phrase from the database Delete phrase Displays phrases from the selected language Double click a phrase to edit Translations for phrase above Select to edit Publish to the web Create a web page of selected drawings in the current project 1 Select Projects Publish to Web 2 In the Publish to Web dialog box select a location t...

Page 718: ...back to the project drawing list by Section sub section Selects drawings by sections and subsections 6 Click OK 7 Enter a name for the project banner for the web page 8 Enter one or more project titles for the web page 9 Select the method to output drawing images to the web page 10 Click OK 11 Enter an output device name 12 Press ENTER to select no as the default when prompted to select to write t...

Page 719: ...perts Group files are raster based This format is not recommended for large files that contain text JPEG Portable Network Graphics files are raster based like JPEG images but PNG provides a higher quality output PNG AutoCAD Electrical publish to web banner title text options Access On the Project Manager click the arrow on the Publish Plot tool and select Publish to Web Specify or create a folder ...

Page 720: ...e DWG files or creates DXF file copies of the drawings and posts them on the Web page You can drag these files from the Web page into an AutoCAD session Allow drag and drop Use drawing title blocks If your existing drawing title block consists of an AutoCAD block with attributes AutoCAD Electrical can be linked into it for automated project wide title block updates The AutoCAD Electrical project w...

Page 721: ...ribute name LINEx where x is a project data line number for example LINE1 or attribute name xx where xx can be any of these sheet number value the S value SHEET number of drawings in the active project the N value in title block SHEET x of N SHEETMAX drawing name value the D value DWGNAM the drawing descriptions assigned in the Project De scription dialog box DD1 or DWGDESC DD2 DD3 optional sectio...

Page 722: ...R for the customer text all of which come from the project s first 3 defined description lines Include these mapping entries T1 LINE1 T2 LINE2 CUSTOMER LINE3 SH SHEET DSTAMP PLOTDATE TSTAMP PLOTTIME This xx value can also be any fixed text within quotes such as DRAWNBY Joe Engineer NOTE If the title block s target attribute tag name contains one or more wild card characters the name must be preced...

Page 723: ...or example if your title block has 3 description attributes TITLE 1 TITLE 2 and TITLE 3 and you want the text entered into the AutoCAD Electrical project DWGDESC entry split across these three attributes Set up your wdt title block mapping file with this entry TITLE 1 TITLE 2 TITLE 3 DWGDESC Now in the AutoCAD Electrical Project Descriptions dialog box split the drawing s DWGDESC description text ...

Page 724: ...eed to be updated on the title block along with SHEET and SHEETMAX if new drawings have been added to your project NOTE If you want to save these selections click Save The settings are stored in the default wdu file 7 Optional Select Resequence sheet S value This renumbers the sheet values and changes the sheet max value This is commonly used when drawings are added to the project drawing set 8 Cl...

Page 725: ...ecting Descriptions The prompt text for each line is controlled by the default_wdtitle wdl file or _wdtitle wdl file if you placed one in the project folder If AutoCAD Electrical can t find a _wdtitle wdl file in the project folder it looks for the default_wdtitle wdl file in the User folder Access Click the Project Manager tool Right click the project name and select Title Block Update From the P...

Page 726: ...wing Section The drawing subsections in the project Drawing Sub section The file name without an extension Filename The file name with the appropriate extension File extension The full file name and the pathname where the file is located Full Filename The project value for the drawing P The installation value for the drawing I The location value for the drawing L The D value of the drawing setting...

Page 727: ...rawing set Project and drawing specific property settings are linked to one or more attributes contained in the title block The link between AutoCAD Electrical and the title block is defined by either an external text file wdt or by an invisible WD_TB attribute added to your existing title block If the WDT method is used you can use a project specific file or the Default wdt file In either case th...

Page 728: ...tribute on the title block of the drawing The attribute s value gives the mapping information in the format of a semi colon delimited text string For example TITLE 1 LINE1 TITLE 2 LINE2 SH SHEET SH_TOTAL SHEET_MAX where project wide values for LINE1 and LINE2 codes update attributes TITLE 1 and TITLE 2 The S sheet value is copied to the title block attribute SH and the number of drawing files in t...

Page 729: ...ibutes to text constants or AutoLISP values User Defined Title block setup user defined Assigns text constants and AutoLISP expressions to a title block attribute Access From the Project menu select Title Block Setup Specify the title block link method enter a block name and click OK Click User Defined on the Title Block Setup dialog box Lists the attributes and assigned text constant or AutoLISP ...

Page 730: ...ing an attribute mapping file A text file DEFAULT WDT defines what AutoCAD Electrical values are mapped to the drawing title block attributes Use any text editor to create or edit file default wdt BLOCK TITLE PROJ_TITLE LINE1 DRAW_TITLE1 LINE2 DRAW_TITLE2 DWGDESC PROJ_NUM LINE4 STATUS LINE5 STATUS_DATE LINE6 REV LINE7 SX SHEETMAX SH SHEET PLOTTIME PLOTTIME PLOTDATE PLOTDATE When you instruct AutoC...

Page 731: ...faults to DEFAULT WDT For example if the current active project is ACME99 WDP and you instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a title block update AutoCAD Electrical looks for mapping file ACME99 WDT If not found AutoCAD Electrical then looks for DEFAULT WDT and if not found AutoCAD Electrical aborts the command Map information embedded on the title block An invisible attribute on your drawing s title b...

Page 732: ...t Title 1 LINE2 Title 2 LINE3 Title 3 LINE4 Project Number LINE5 Date LINE6 Engineer LINE7 Drawn By LINE8 Checked By LINE9 Scale 3 Save and exit the ASCII text file 4 Open AutoCAD and test Search sequence for wdl files You may create different wdl files for different projects The search sequence is as follows 1 Look in the same directory as the project s WDP file for a file called PROJNAM_WDTITLE ...

Page 733: ...lick View to view and edit the file Click Overwrite to create a new file Click Edit to modify the existing file NOTE If no existing file is found you must identify the title block s AutoCAD block name 4 In the Title Block Setup dialog box select the attribute from each list to map to its corresponding AutoCAD Electrical value 5 Click Drawing Values to assign drawing specific and plotting values 6 ...

Page 734: ...EFAULT WDT Create a default mapping file in the default AutoCAD Electrical subdirectory that is referenced if a project specific file is not found and if a WD_TB attribute is not present in the title block DEFAULT WDT Method 2 The title block contains an invisible attribute with a value that defines the mapping between the title block and AutoCAD Electrical No external WDT file is required because...

Page 735: ...ks to the project Enter a block name For multiple blocks separate with a comma For example DEMOTBLK DEMOTBLK2 DEMOTBLK3 Add New Edits the selected title block Edit Removes the selected title block Remove Selects an attribute directly on the drawing if you do not know the name of attribute Pick on Specifies the attribute to use for the drawing project or plotting value Select an attribute from the ...

Page 736: ...t Update list Map AutoLISP values to the title block You can vector to the title block system variable values or values extracted by AutoLISP programs For example let s say that your system s environment variable USERNAME contains a value that must show up on the drawing title block You set up your default wdt file to map the AutoCAD Electrical LINE12 value to attribute DWGBY on your standard titl...

Page 737: ...dded to your existing title block If the WDT method is used you can use a project specific file or the Default wdt file In either case the title block attribute names are mapped to the project wide LINEx values and to several drawing specific setting values Access From the Projects menu select Title Block Setup Method 1 Create a project specific mapping file that only references for drawings in th...

Page 738: ...ute SH and the number of drawing files in the project is written out to attribute SH_TOTAL Title block setup Defines attribute mappings The lines that follow the title block name list the attribute names on that block and what pieces of AutoCAD Electrical project data or drawing specific data that AutoCAD Electrical should copy to that attribute Access From the Project menu select Title Block Setu...

Page 739: ...nk method enter a block name and click OK Click User Defined on the Title Block Setup dialog box Lists the attributes and assigned text constant or AutoLISP expression Current User Defined Assignments Modify an existing link by selecting it from the attrib ute list To clear an existing link select none from the attribute list Attributes Enter a text constant or an AutoLISP expression to assign to ...

Page 740: ...728 ...

Page 741: ...Icon Menus In this chapter Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard Use alternate icon menus Modify Icon Menu File Directly 12 729 ...

Page 742: ...ed by the WD_SLB is created if it does not already exist and new images are saved here If the WD_SLB value is N Electrical Menu then the folder N Electrical Menu Images is created and used If you browsed to an existing image the image is copied to the Images folder NOTE You can enclose the image path within quotation marks if you do not want the images copied to the Images folder The dat file save...

Page 743: ... that cascade down to other new menu pages Use this dialog box to add an icon that is then used for inserting components or circuits onto the drawing running an AutoCAD Electrical command or opening a submenu page to the icon menu You can also change the properties of existing icons Overview of the Icon Menu Wizard 731 ...

Page 744: ...utoCAD Electrical command when selected New Circuit Creates a new circuit and adds the icon that is created from a new circuit that inserts the circuit into the drawing Add Circuit Adds an icon created from an existing circuit that inserts the circuit into the drawing New Submenu Adds an icon that opens a submenu page when selec ted You can then select an icon from the submenu to insert the spe ci...

Page 745: ...ess the Icon Menu Wizard tool 3 Click the Icon Menu Wizard tool 4 On the Select Menu File dialog box select the menu file to modify and click OK 5 On the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box right click the icon to edit and select Properties 6 On the Properties Component Command Circuit or Sub menu dialog box edit the required information such as symbol file name image file and block name for the icon menu...

Page 746: ...displayed nodes are based on the order of arrangement of submenus defined in the dat file Menu Tabs Menu Changes the visibility of the Menu tree view Up one level Displays the menu that is one level before the current menu in the Menu tree view Views Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window The current view option is indicated with a check mark Options include Icon with text Icon onl...

Page 747: ...menu number 100 and paste it into another submenu page the pasted menu page is still menu number 100 Copy available for submenus only Makes a copy of the highlighted submenu and stores it in the Paste clipboard You can then paste the submenu and its contents into another submenu or a main menu NOTE A new menu number is created for the pasted submenu The next available menu number greater than 99 i...

Page 748: ...roperties dialog box to modify the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name image or block names The existing data in the dat file is overwritten with your changes once you click OK Add icon component The icon name and symbol block name are saved in the active dat file such as ACE_JIC_MENU DAT once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box The icon then displays at the end of the e...

Page 749: ...on the cur rent drawing to use as the image file name For example if you select block HPB11 the image file name edit box displays HPB11 Active This is unavailable if the drawing is a new drawing and has not been saved Selects the active drawing name to use as the Image file For example if the active drawing name is demo005 then the image file edit box has demo005 listed as the file name The browse...

Page 750: ... con trol_relay It is also unavailable if the Image File edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selected Zooms in on the current screen Zoom image using the AutoCAD Pan command Once you exit Pan mode and press Enter the dialog box redis plays so you can finish defining the new icon This appears once the Image...

Page 751: ...rigger insertion of multi pole schematic symbol assemblies and panel footprints are examples that require encoding of special AutoCAD Electrical commands The icon name and symbol block name are saved in the active dat file such as ACE_JIC_MENU DAT once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in the Symbol Preview window of the I...

Page 752: ... an existing block name on the current drawing to use as the image file name For example if you select block HPB11 the image file name edit box displays HPB11 Active This is unavailable if the drawing is a new drawing and has not been saved Selects the active drawing name to use as the Image file For example if the active drawing name is demo005 then the image file edit box has demo005 listed as t...

Page 753: ...age file location where the new images are created or the Location browsed images are copied to If you entered a file name with the syntax slide_library or dll file slide or png for the image file the path of the dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here Command to Execute NOTE If you select an AutoCAD Electrical command you must manually enter the additional parameters as indicated Specifies to...

Page 754: ...ngs tab Library and Icon Menu Paths section expand the Schematic Icon Menu File option This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the wdp file Icon Details Defines the icon name and image Displays an image preview of the specified image file Preview Specifies the name to appear in the icon the description text and the tool tip for the icon Name Specifies the image file to use for the new icon ...

Page 755: ... The image file name cannot contain invalid charac ters such as and only png and sld image files are supported Creates the png image file from the current screen image If the specified image file does not exist this option is selec Create PNG from current screen image ted by default If you do not want to create the icon from the current drawing s displayed image deselect the check box NOTE This op...

Page 756: ... defined by this code is used as the user circuit folder Add existing circuit The icon name and circuit drawing name are saved in the active dat file such as ACE_JIC_MENU DAT once you click OK on the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box The icon then displays at the end of the existing icon images in the Symbol Preview window of the Insert Component dialog box Access Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous to...

Page 757: ...rawing is a new drawing and has not been saved Selects the active drawing name to use as the Image file For example if the active drawing name is demo005 then the image file edit box has demo005 listed as the file name If the circuit drawing file name contains the path of the drawing file referring to the User folder or the wd_userckt_dir defined folder the browsed image is copied to the User fold...

Page 758: ...from current screen image is selec ted Zooms in on the current screen image using AutoCAD Pan Zoom command Once you exit Pan mode and press Enter the dialog box redisplays so you can finish defining the new icon This appears once the Image file is specified Indicates the full path of the image file location where the new images are created or the Location browsed images are copied to If you entere...

Page 759: ... Schematic Icon Menu File option This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the wdp file Icon Details Defines the icon name and image Displays an image preview of the specified image file Preview Specifies the name to appear in the icon the description text and the tool tip for the icon Name Specifies the image file to use for the new icon You can enter the image file name or complete path or ...

Page 760: ...select the check box NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an image file name with the syntax slide_library or dll file slide or png For example S2 pb or S7 control_relay It is also unavailable if the Image File edit box contains the image file path instead of the image file name Available only when Create PNG from current screen image is selec ted Zooms in on the current screen image using...

Page 761: ...ous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool Select the menu file to modify and click OK In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box right click the menu file to modify for example JIC Symbols and select Properties From the Components menu select Symbol Library Icon Menu Wizard Select the menu file to modify and click OK In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box right click the menu file to modify for example JIC...

Page 762: ...tion expand the Schematic Icon Menu File option This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the wdp file Icon Details Defines the icon name and image Displays an image preview of the specified image file Preview Specifies the name to appear in the icon the descrip tion text and the tool tip for the icon Name Specifies the image file to use for the new icon You can enter the image file name or c...

Page 763: ...from the current screen image Create PNG from current screen image If the specified image file does not exist this option is selected by default If you do not want to create the icon from the current drawing s displayed image deselect the check box NOTE This option is unavailable if you enter an im age file name with the syntax slide_library or dll file slide or png For example S2 pb or S7 con tro...

Page 764: ... exist Active Inserts the active drawing as a block Properties command Use this tool to modify the existing symbol icon properties such as changing the icon name image or block name Your changes overwrite the information in the dat file Access Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool Select the menu file to modify and click OK In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box...

Page 765: ...age file edit box has demo005 listed as the file name The browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a relative path in the dat file However you can enclose the image path in quotation marks if you do not want the image copied to the Images folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative path in the dat file The entered image file name can be names like PB1 or CONTROL R...

Page 766: ...ed to If you entered a file name with the syntax slide_library or dll file slide or png for the image file the path of the dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here Command to Execute Defines the command to execute when you click the icon NOTE If you select an AutoCAD Electrical command you must manually enter the additional parameters as indicated Specifies to execute an AutoCAD command or Auto...

Page 767: ...tion This is the schematic icon menu file listed in the wdp file Icon Details Defines the icon name and image Displays an image preview of the specified image file Preview Specifies the name to appear in the icon the description text and the tool tip for the icon Name Specifies the image file to use for the new icon You can enter the image file name or complete path or select it using one of the f...

Page 768: ...le names with an extension such as pb1 png or it can follow the syntax slide_library or dll file slide or png For example S2 pb or S7 control_relay NOTE The image file name cannot contain invalid charac ters such as and only png and sld image files are supported Available only when you edit the image file Creates the png image file from the current screen image If the spe Create PNG from current s...

Page 769: ...his code is used as the user circuit folder Properties submenu Use this tool to modify the existing symbol icon properties such as changing the icon name image or block name Your changes overwrite the information in the dat file Access Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool Select the menu file to modify and click OK In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box right c...

Page 770: ...he image file edit box has demo005 listed as the file name The browsed image is copied to the Images folder and saved as a relative path in the dat file However you can enclose the image path in quotation marks if you do not want the image copied to the Images folder and to save the complete path instead of the relative path in the dat file The entered image file name can be names like PB1 or CONT...

Page 771: ...slide or png for the image file the path of the dat file or the WD_SLB folder displays here Submenu This section displays the menu number of the submenu page and allows you to define the submenu title Displays the menu number of the submenu page for refer ence Menu Number Specifies the submenu title that is used in the Insert Com ponent dialog box This is automatically specified but you can edit t...

Page 772: ...h click Browse to search for and select an icon menu or click Default to use the default icon menu 4 Click OK NOTE If you make custom images or libraries for the menu copy them to the same subdirectory as the menu file since AutoCAD Electrical looks for menu images in the active icon menu file s directory Overview of the icon menu file AutoCAD Electrical supplies several default icon dat menus for...

Page 773: ...con menu s page structure Each menu page starts with a menu number line preceded by two asterisks The next line is an AutoCAD Electrical code which defines the menu page format such as how many rows how many icon buttons per row This is used for dat files that are used prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2008 The next line is the title with optional column labels for the menu page The rest of the lines de...

Page 774: ...or push buttons S M3 This is used to develop the Menu tree structure in the Insert Component dialog box Icon function submenu trigger Submenu number M3 Used for dat files prior to AutoCAD Electrical 2008 Indicates the number of rows in the menu In D5W AutoCAD Electrical 2008 you can have any number of rows or columns in your menu This value is only used to structure dat files in older versions of ...

Page 775: ...ath as HPB11 defined by the Project Properties dialog box and is inserted into the drawing Each entry consists of three parts separated by characters The first part will be the text that is displayed in the Menu tree structure view or as a tool tip in the Symbol Preview window The second part is the slide or png name You should include the path to the SLD If the slide is contained within a slide l...

Page 776: ...s a command Image information with the syntax slide_lib rary_name slide or png In this example the slide s1 shds13 library or resource dll library is s1 and the slide file or png image is shds13 Code that executes a command The syntax is C command name command parameters In C wd_3unit this example the command wd_3unit is run when the icon is clicked Specifies the command parameters HDS11 764 Chapt...

Page 777: ...BOM and Catalogs In this chapter Use catalog tables Overview of the catalog database table structure Use the merge utility Catalog Assignment Contact Quantity Pin List Lookup 13 765 ...

Page 778: ...alog s subdirectory Catalog information can be carried on parent or stand alone components that have MANUFACTURER CATALOG and optional ASSEMBLYCODE attributes Assigning catalog information to a component s attributes can be done at component insertion time or any time later during an edit of the component Catalog table naming conventions Each primary or stand alone component type can have an assoc...

Page 779: ...tive project s properties are set up to use this catch all table 6 If all of these items fail AutoCAD Electrical stops looking if running a report or prompts you to add a table to the default_cat mdb file if you are inserting or editing a component If your symbol includes the invisible WDBLKNAM attribute with a value of HCRM 1 The symbol is checked for the WDBLKNAM attribute or Xdata It is found T...

Page 780: ...rkers W0 Panel layout symbols must always use the WDBLKNAM attribute or Xdata without the leading H or V character Family tables in the default_cat mdb The list of tables available in the default_cat mdb is shown in the following table All tables are family specific and 1 table is created for each family Description Family Code Table Name Allows starting MFG TYPE RATING combinations to be predefin...

Page 781: ...OMAT AutoCAD Electrical first searches manufacturer specific tables if not found it then searches the default _TERMPROPS table See Edit ter minal properties database page 630 Cable conductors See Edit the cable conductor database page 542 _W0_CBLWIRES Ammeters AM Buzzers horns bells AN Circuit breakers CB Connectors pins C0 Control relays CR Device networks DN Drives DR Disconnect switches DS Encl...

Page 782: ...ters contactors MS Nameplates NP Overloads OL Push buttons PB Photo switches PE Programmable logic controllers PLCIO Power meters PM Pressure switches PS Power supplies PW Proximity switches PX Resistors RE Selector switches SS Surge suppressors SU Toggle switches SW 770 Chapter 13 BOM and Catalogs ...

Page 783: ...ple if you want to add some new components to the catalog table for standard red pilot lights LT1R then either use AutoCAD Electrical to insert a new red pilot light symbol or Edit an existing red pilot light symbol 2 From the Insert Edit dialog box select Catalog lookup Now you have triggered AutoCAD Electrical to open the desired catalog table 3 Select Add New to add a new item or select Edit to...

Page 784: ...Electrical catalog file 4 Save and exit the file NOTE AutoCAD Electrical looks for a project specific MDB file first called project _cat mdb in the project s subdirectory Parts catalog Opens the component s catalog database from which you can manually enter or select the Manufacturer or Catalog values Search the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the selected component Database quer...

Page 785: ... is not selected the query ignores the check on the WDBLKNAM field and returns all catalog in formation Displays more information about your component than can be held in the catalog database such as Web View pictures or specifications Use the 15th field in the catalog database to set up the WEBLINK If the WEBLINK field for the selected part is a Web URL your Internet browser launches and displays...

Page 786: ...sh button HPB11 and VPB11 reference the same component specific catalog look up table PB11 NOTE If you select to create a component specific catalog table and then cancel out of the dialog box before adding any data to the table the blank table is deleted References a table called MISC_CAT This general catalog table is set up in the mdb file with all com Miscellaneous ponent types in it If found t...

Page 787: ...rts Catalog dialog box click Add or Edit AutoCAD Electrical uses the first 10 fields for its own use plus reserves an additional 3 user fields for your use You can insert additional fields but AutoCAD Electrical ignores them when it constructs various reports Below are the character fields accessed by AutoCAD Electrical they must appear in this order in the database records Specifies the catalog n...

Page 788: ... it is an image file pdf spreadsheet or some other document type then the application associ ated with that file s extension for example Open With displays the file NOTE For pdf display you can include the page number to display upon document open Add a space and the page number after the pdf file name in the WEBLINK field value for example c rockwell 700series pdf 13 Specifies the schematic block...

Page 789: ... first 10 fields for its own plus reserves an additional 3 user fields for your use You can insert additional fields beyond the fourteenth one if you want but they are ignored when generating reports Here are the 15 fields accessed by AutoCAD Electrical They must appear in this order in the database records Description Width Field Name Catalog number 60 CATALOG First query field manufacturer code ...

Page 790: ...er s use 100 USER3 Optional user defined RATING miscellaneous attribute values 255 TEXTVALUES Associate pdf files or Web URL to component 255 WEBLINK AutoCAD Electrical block name minus the first character of the block name since the first char 60 WDBLKNAM acter is the orientation of block H Horizontal V Vertical TEXTVALUES rating and miscellaneous attribute value assignment An optional fourteenth...

Page 791: ... part number and click Edit 4 On the Edit Record dialog box type a value into the TEXTVALUES edit box and click OK If the TEXTVALUES field did not exist in the selected catalog table it is added to each record in the database If it did exist your new value is saved in the TEXTVALUES field for the selected catalog number s record WEBLINK assignment Sometimes you may want to see more information abo...

Page 792: ... block name HTD1_xxx and the Symbol Name Filtering option is selected the only records that display are those listed in the TD table of the catalog database file that have a blank WDBLKNAM value or a value in the WDBLKNAM field that matches your symbol s block name For example performing a catalog lookup on an on delay coil HTD1N dwg or VTD1N dwg displays all blank WDBLKNAM entries and all entries...

Page 793: ...talog mapping file After the merge is complete a Merge Report dialog box displays showing the full path of the report files The report files contain detailed information about the merge These report files are saved in the same directory as the destination database panel folder and are overwritten for each subsequent merge If the selected databases folders are not compatible for merging the followi...

Page 794: ...ings To consolidate all the timer relay TD tables into one table use the mapping file It controls which tables to take from the source database and place into the destination database under a single table Table map SRC_TABLE DEST_TABLE TD1N TD TD1NT TD TD1NF TD TD1FT TD Wildcard mapping for catalog database tables is allowed on the source left database side of the mapping file For example TD TD Wh...

Page 795: ...elect to merge all of the database folder information for Catalog databases you can also specify to maintain user fields the text value field or the Web link field 8 Click Next if you selected to merge multiple databases or click Finish A status window opens listing the tables or folders that are being merged how many records are being added or copied and the number of records to still be processe...

Page 796: ...s the footprint database footprint_look up mdb Footprint Content merges the panel symbol content inside the panel folder Panel Content Next is disabled until you select content to merge The subsequent dialogs appear in the order of this list depending on what content was selected for the merge Source Specifies the database folder from which to copy the data This is generally database or symbol con...

Page 797: ...nformation is carried on a parent or stand alone component Each component can carry up to 10 different catalog assignments allowing for subassemblies You can define exactly where AutoCAD Electrical should look to get this catalog information allowing great flexibility in how you keep your catalog information There are a number of ways to assign your catalog information to a component Use the Compo...

Page 798: ...he default assuming a previous one was made during the current editing session Perform a drawing or project wide search In the Insert Edit dialog box Catalog Data section click Project to instruct AutoCAD Electrical to do a drawing wide or project wide listing of similar components with their catalog assignments Pull information from another project AutoCAD Electrical quickly scans a previous proj...

Page 799: ...nd modify catalog information Vendor catalog parts lookup and assignment is crucial to enabling AutoCAD Electrical to automatically create various detailed BOM reports It is also a key step in the workflow between control schematic wiring diagrams and derived physical panel layouts Catalog parts lookup is through a multitable Microsoft Access database file default_cat mdb shipped with AutoCAD Elec...

Page 800: ...EMBLYCODE attribute values AutoCAD Electrical then formats and outputs a detailed BOM report Catalog values This lists the catalog part number information for any all component or footprints that have the same family block name WDBLKNAM value as that of the component being edited Displays its bill of materials description Catalog Check Copies the highlighted catalog info to the component being ed ...

Page 801: ...lt_cat mdb catalog lookup file and select table _LISTBOX_DEF Insert a record with these field values TABLENAME CR MANUFACTURER SIEMENS and LIST2 600V MAX AC The text you enter must exactly match existing field values in the target table Save and exit Now when you insert a relay coil and select Catalog Lookup the dialog box opens with these defaults displayed In order to browse catalog codes for ac...

Page 802: ...alog dialog box for the selected component type and click OK Find Drawing Only Select from the catalog part number information for any all component footprints that have the same family block name as that of the component being edited Click OK Multiple Catalog Insert extra catalog part numbers onto the currently selected component or footprint You can add up to 99 additional part numbers to any sc...

Page 803: ...e saved on the symbol as MFGn CATn ASSYCODEn attribute values where n is the sequential code value 01 through 10 selected in the top list box If these attributes are not present on the symbols AutoCAD Electrical saves the information as Extended Entity Data Xdata on the symbol s block insert Sequential code Adds up to 99 extra part numbers in addition to the main catalog part number Pick which one...

Page 804: ...Quickly performs a Bill of Material check and displays the result Multiple catalog part number assignments This displays the order in which the extra part numbers will appear in the various AutoCAD Electrical reports You can add up to 99 additional part number assignments to a component Access On the Insert Edit Component or Panel Layout Component Insert Edit dialog box Catalog Data section click ...

Page 805: ...utoCAD Electrical can automatically track how many contacts have been assigned to a device like a relay or timer coil When a newly inserted contact exceeds a predefined limit AutoCAD Electrical can alert you AutoCAD Electrical can also track available terminal pin number pairs as you insert each new contact and automatically give you the next available pair as a default To enable this feature maxi...

Page 806: ...on the parent When AutoCAD Electrical annotates a parent coil or other device with the pin list information AutoCAD Electrical inserts it on the following attributes if present The pin list format string of 3 element groups one for each available contact PINLIST Maximum N O contact count blank means undefined 0 means none allowed MAXNO Maximum N C contact count MAXNC Maximum convertible contact co...

Page 807: ...er or Find to search for the record to edit Select the record from the list and click Edit To create a new record click Add New or select an existing record and click Add Copy to create a new record based on an existing one To delete an existing record select the record in the list and click Delete 4 To edit or create a new record in the Edit Record dialog box specify the values to assign to the r...

Page 808: ...d from the list Opens the Edit Table _PINLIST_manufac Edit turer dialog box so you can edit the selected PIN LIST table Edit AutoCAD Electrical consults a pin list database table when a part number is added or an existing part number is changed on a parent schematic symbol If AutoCAD Electrical finds a match on the part number s MFG CAT and optional ASSYCODE values in this database table then the ...

Page 809: ... blank entry in the list removes the filter for that field After you define the values to filter apply the filter in the database editing window Filter Displays the Edit Record dialog box for modifying the existing record in the database Edit Displays the Edit New Record dialog box for entering a new record into the database Add New Displays the Edit Copied Record dialog box for modifying and copy...

Page 810: ... Edit dialog box click Add New Add Copy or Edit MANUFACTURER Specifies the Manufacturer code value must be consistent with the catalog lookup files CATALOG Specifies the Catalog number use wildcards as much as possible ASSEMBLYCODE Specifies the AutoCAD Electrical internal assembly code must be consistent with the catalog lookup files COILPINS Specifies the terminal pin numbers for coil This is ge...

Page 811: ...r To add description labels encode the _PINLIST database table entry using a format like this 1 A1X A1Y 1 A2X A2Y aux contact 2 B1X B2Y NC where the optional comment is always the last element of the sublist and is preceded by an asterisk character if no asterisk then the comment is interpreted as another pin number The previous example would display in the pin list pick list dialog as A1X A1Y aux...

Page 812: ...tied to a given terminal tag ID For filtering of special contact use You can set up subcategories of type 4 pin combinations so that some will apply to specific contact types and other pin combinations to other contact types Encode the Pin List entries with a 4 plus a character to provide further filtering of what contacts are available for a given child contact At the contact end make sure that a...

Page 813: ... s say you have a fixed 6 pole terminal strip unit with a manufacturer code of AB and a catalog part number 1492 HJ86 with pin markings on the terminal strip that are identified as 1 through 6 Set up the _PINLIST database with the AB and 1492 HJ86 combo defining a PINLIST of 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 In the schematic insert the first terminal of a 6 pole terminal strip with a TAG ID of TB 1 and do a...

Page 814: ...802 ...

Page 815: ... this chapter Generate reports Schematic Reports Panel Reports Overview of format files Run automatic reports Modify spreadsheet data Create user defined attributes Export to Autodesk Inventor Professional 14 803 ...

Page 816: ...ation values edit the report change the report format post process the report with your own programs save the report out to a file print the report and put the report on your drawing as a table AutoCAD Electrical provides a number of Schematic page 897 and Panel page 923 reports Reports can be formatted from the Report Generator dialog box or preformatted using Format Files set files Modify report...

Page 817: ...t New not updatable This inserts a report table without the intelligence so that when you run the same report again the table is not updated Break report tables You may want to break a report into multiple tables You can do this from the Table Generation dialog box without having to run the report multiple times or clicking Put on Drawing multiple times You can break the report table by specifying...

Page 818: ...ne report using the AutoCAD Electrical Edit Component command Table generation setup This displays your report as a table on your drawing Once you select OK from the Table Generation Setup dialog box your cursor will look like a box with a small x in the corner The box is the size the table will be when generated This allows easy placement of the table on your active drawing file To use object sna...

Page 819: ...he value adjusts to the minimum value Column Labels Defines whether to include the column heading the color of title text labels and the visibility of the column labels Uses the column headings as the first row of the table Include Column Labels To define the title text color click the Label Color box The standard AutoCAD color selection dialog box opens displaying the color selections Label Color...

Page 820: ...ed the labels will be shown on all table sections Show Title on First Section Only Layer Specifies which layer to place the table on Column Width Specifies the method to use for calculating the width of the columns You can either have AutoCAD Electrical automatically calculate the column width based on text values for each field or you can define a width for each column The text will word wrap if ...

Page 821: ...are 15 different manufacturers in the report your report will be broken into 15 sections Specifies the maximum number of rows for the table or section determining when to split the table Rows for Each Section Rows Directs AutoCAD Electrical to add blank lines at the end of a table section if necessary until the number of rows equals the Rows Force to Maximum Rows setting Individual records cannot ...

Page 822: ...eport is displayed at the top of the dialog box Passes the report file to a script file This provides a link to post processing the data or automatically passing it on to another application Run Script Closes the dialog box without creating a script file Close no script Script file options reference Displays if the report file was created and saved The report filename and location are displayed in...

Page 823: ...log box for selecting which catalog lookup table to open From this catalog table you can select a part to add to the report Add New Creates a new report line entry Enter the values in the input boxes and click OK Add Copy Creates a copy of the selected line entry Modify the values in the input boxes and click OK Edit or Delete lines Edit Opens a sub dialog box for editing the values for the select...

Page 824: ...d names LOC1 and LOC2 LOC1 is the location code for the component at one end of the wire and LOC2 is the location code for the component at the other end This feature swaps the values of these fields Report generator Displays the results of the report generation The dialog box options that are available depend on which report you are creating Access Select to create any schematic or panel report S...

Page 825: ...e to the header For ex ample if you select a special break of Installation Loc Add special break values to header ation the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header Suppress subcatalog entries for Component Report only The component report displays all components and their related catalog numbers A component can have one or many catalog numbers ...

Page 826: ...s that are being reported You can then display the 5 spare pin connections by selecting this check box and identifying the first pin number as 1 and the last as 9 Label for spares displays a text string under the wire number column in the report Internal external codes left right for Terminal Plan Report only Allows the Terminal Plan report to take advantage of terminals that have the optional I I...

Page 827: ... list User Post Sets up options for running a post process report before saving the report to a file or inserting as a table onto your drawing When you click User Post the viawd wd comp lsp LISP routine runs a function against the data and returns to the Report Generator Window The LISP routine can be modified to meet your needs It has a dialog that you can customize and call your own programs Dis...

Page 828: ...ments and Wire Annotation Exception reports Edit Mode Edit Wire Label Edit Cable Label Modifies the report before you insert it to your drawing You can move data up or down in the report add lines from a catalog and delete lines Put on Drawing Not applicable for Wire Label reports Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing NOTE ...

Page 829: ...t Generator dialog box Lists the available fields for formatting the report including user defined attributes Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Field...

Page 830: ...G Catalog part number assignment CAT Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups ASSYCODE Wire number WIRENO Wire layer WIRELAY Wire type description WIREDESC Wire gauge or diameter WIREDIA Type of spare or unused wires SPARES Count of spare or unused wires SP CNT Description attribute values 1 2 DESC1 2 Entity handle number HDL Sheet the S value SH Length c...

Page 831: ...cable core color CBLWC Drawing list data fields to display Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear Access In the Project Manager right click the project name and select Drawing List Report Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box In the Project Manager right click the project name and select Drawing List Report Run the report...

Page 832: ... only used for the Put on Drawing report feature For example if you select Top Right the report is right justified during the display printing and when saved to a file the top portion is ig nored If you put the report on the drawing the report justification is top right Available Fields NOTE Additional fields may display if the drawing or project is set up with a title block association The title ...

Page 833: ...ser defined attributes Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report...

Page 834: ...h 2 LOC2 To device s component tag ID must end with 2 CMP2 To device s wire connection terminal pin number must end with 2 PIN2 Wire layer From device must end with 1 WLAY1 Wire layer To device must end with 2 WLAY2 Line or grid reference location for From device must end with 1 REF1 Line or grid reference location for To device must end with 2 REF2 Sheet assignment for From device must end with 1...

Page 835: ...vice s drawing section assignment must end with 1 SEC1 From device s drawing sub section assignment must end with 1 SUB1 To device s drawing section assignment must end with 2 SEC2 To device s drawing sub section assignment must end with 2 SUB2 From device s installation code must end with 1 INST1 To device s installation code must end with 2 INST2 From device s IEC tag name must end with 1 IECCMP...

Page 836: ...ted in FILETIME table of project scratch database must end with 1 DWGIX1 To device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database must end with 2 DWGIX2 From device s drawing D value must end with 1 DWGNAM1 To device s drawing D value must end with 2 DWGNAM2 Cable entity s handle value CBLHDL Cable installation assignment CBLINST Cable s drawing DWGIX value as listed...

Page 837: ...lue must end with 1 PNLZ1 Panel wire From connection point s direction i e 4 connects from left 1 right 2 above 8 below must end with 1 PNLXDIR1 To wire connection s physical X coordinate value must end with 2 PNLX2 To wire connection s physical Y coordinate value must end with 2 PNLY2 To wire connection s physical Z coordinate value must end with 2 PNLZ2 Panel wire To connection point s direction...

Page 838: ...y in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field na...

Page 839: ...ssembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups ASSYCODE Multi line description column DESCRIPTION General description line of text DESC 2nd query field middle pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box QUERY2 3rd query field right hand pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box QUERY3 Catalog lookup data field MISC1 2 User field in catalog lookup database USER1 3 Catalog Database ...

Page 840: ... into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justificatio...

Page 841: ...tribute is different between the Panel Layout and Schematic components Value of the problem area on the component shows the value on the schematic drawing i e If the Comment is SCHEM Mismatch LOC the LOC attribute is different between the Panel Layout and Schematic components Entity handle number HDL Sheet the S value SH Drawing name the D value SHDWGNAM AutoCAD drawing file name dwg with complete...

Page 842: ...rt Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification column label ...

Page 843: ...ute value INST Location attribute value LOC Mount attribute value panel layout optional attribute for user defined panel mounting assignment MOUNT GROUPWITH attribute value panel layout optional attribute for user defined group with assignment GROUP Rating 1 12 attribute values RATING1 12 Catalog one line description text CATDESC QUERY1 field pulled from catalog lookup and formatted into output re...

Page 844: ...e value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups ASSYCODE Sheet the S value SH Drawing name the D value SHDWGNAM Drawing section assignment SEC Drawing sub section assignment SUBSEC Component family FAMILY Related tag ID of device on alternate drawing type WDTAGALT Alternate type of symbol i e PN for pneumatic HYD for hydraulic WDTYPE AutoCAD drawing file name dwg FILENAME Panel miss...

Page 845: ...elds to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification c...

Page 846: ... J plug jack connector P PLC I O C cable marker CATEGORY Description attribute values 1 3 DESC1 3 Sheet the S value SH Drawing name the D value SHDWGNAM AutoCAD drawing file name dwg FILENAME Panel wire annotation exception data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear Access Click the Panel Reports tool Select Wire Annotation Exception from the rep...

Page 847: ...o Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification column label default is Top Left The vertical portion of the justification Top Middle Bottom is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature For example if...

Page 848: ...ne end of wire must end with 2 END2 WDBLKNAM attribute value used for the linking of symbols to tables in the Default CAT database BLKNAME From device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database DWGIX Entity handle number HDL Type of component J plug jack connector P PLC I O C cable marker FP Panel Footprint FPT terminal footprint CATEGORY Wire connection point de...

Page 849: ...nto the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification ...

Page 850: ...te tied in with this footprint device tag WITH Location attribute value LOC Mount attribute value panel layout optional attribute for user defined panel mounting assignment MOUNT GROUPWITH attribute value panel layout optional attribute for user defined group with assignment GROUP Installation attribute value INST Sheet the S value SH Drawing name the D value SHDWGNAM Item number assignment ITEM R...

Page 851: ...tributes Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Dow...

Page 852: ...mment is Mismatch LOC PNL the LOC attribute is different between the Panel Layout and Schem atic components Value of the problem area on the component shows the value on the schematic drawing i e If the Comment is Mismatch LOC the SCHEM LOC attribute is different between the Panel Layout and Schematic components Entity handle number HDL Sheet the S value SH Drawing name the D value SHDWGNAM AutoCA...

Page 853: ...ves the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification column label default...

Page 854: ...on on one end of wire must end with 1 END1 Component and connection information on one end of wire must end with 2 END2 Manufacturer or vendor name i e Siemens MFG Catalog part number assignment CAT Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups ASSYCODE WDBLKNAM attribute value used for the linking of symbols to tables in the Default CAT database BLKNAME Item ...

Page 855: ...inate X Y coordinate Y Z coordinate Z Cable tag CBL Wire annotation text TEXT Autodesk Inventor Professional wire list data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear Access Click the Schematic Reports tool Select Autodesk Inventor Professional Wire List from the report list Run the report Select the location codes for the report and click Change Repo...

Page 856: ...ot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification column label default is Top Left The vertical portion of the justification Top Middle Bottom is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature For example if you select Top Right the report is right justified during...

Page 857: ...ation for From device must end with 1 REF1 Line or grid reference location for To device must end with 2 REF2 Sheet assignment for From device must end with 1 SH1 Sheet assignment for To device must end with 2 SH2 Cable tag CABLE ID Cable wire or cable core color CONDUCTOR ID Cable location attribute value CBLLOC Cable manufacturer attribute value CBLMFG Cable catalog part number CBLCAT Cable ASSY...

Page 858: ...NST1 To device s installation code must end with 2 INST2 From device s IEC tag name must end with 1 IECCMP1 To device s IEC tag name must end with 2 IECCMP2 From device s wire connection TERMDESC value must end with 1 PD1 To device s wire connection TERMDESC value must end with 2 PD2 From device s wire connection sequence value must end with 1 SEQ1 To device s wire connection sequence value must e...

Page 859: ...nstallation assignment CBLINST Cable s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database CBLDWGIX From device s connected wire line entity handle value must end with 1 WIREHDL1 To device s connected wire line entity handle value must end with 2 WIREHDL2 From device s wire connection point direction i e 4 connects from left must end with 1 XDIR1 To device s wire connection...

Page 860: ...t calculated wire length CLEN Bill of material data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear Access Click the Schematic Reports tool Select Bill of Material from the report list Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box Click Projects Reports Schematic Reports Select Bill of Material from the report list Run th...

Page 861: ...nd when saved to a file the top portion is ig nored If you put the report on the drawing the report justification is top right The Description field can be multilined If you include the Description field in your report choose which lines make Lines for description up this field Switch on and off the specific fields to define the Description Available Fields The fields that are available depend on ...

Page 862: ... pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box QUERY2 3rd query field right hand pull down on Catalog Lookup dialog box QUERY3 Catalog lookup data fields MISC1 2 User fields in catalog lookup database USER1 3 Catalog database table name TABNAM Component tag names TAGS or TAG Installation attribute value INST Location attribute value LOC Entity handle number HDL DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of p...

Page 863: ...t Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justificati...

Page 864: ...og part number query CBLQ1CAT Cable BOM query2 value pulled from the catalog lookup file for the cable s catalog part number query CBLQ2CAT Cable BOM miscellaneous fields pulled from the catalog lookup file for the cable s catalog part number query CBLMISC1CAT CBLMISC2CAT Cable BOM user fields pulled from the catalog lookup file for the cable s catalog part number query CBLUSER1CAT CBLUSER3CAT Lin...

Page 865: ...field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the ve...

Page 866: ...ction terminal number must end with 2 PIN2 Wire layer From device must end with 1 WLAY1 Wire layer To device must end with 2 WLAY2 Line or grid reference location for From device must end with 1 REF1 Line or grid reference location for To device must end with 2 REF2 Sheet assignment for From device must end with 1 SH1 Sheet assignment for To device must end with 2 SH2 Cable tag CBL Cable wire or c...

Page 867: ...e for the cable s catalog part number query CBLMISC1CAT CBLMISC2CAT Cable BOM user fields pulled from the catalog lookup file for the cable s catalog part number query CBLUSER1CAT CBLUSER3CAT Cable description attribute values 1 3 DESC1CBL DESC3CBL Cable parent or child parent 1 child 2 CBLP1C2 From device s component tag and component terminal pin number CMP PIN1 To device s component tag and com...

Page 868: ...WDLEV value must end with 1 PNLWDLEV1 To device s panel equivalent level WDLEV value must end with 2 PNLWDLEV2 From device s entity handle value must end with 1 CMPHDL1 To device s entity handle value must end with 2 CMPHDL2 From device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database must end with 1 DWGIX1 To device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of...

Page 869: ...n i e 2 connects from above must end with 2 XDIR2 From wire connection s physical X coordinate value must end with 1 PNLX1 From wire connection s physical Y coordinate value must end with 1 PNLY1 From wire connection s physical Z coordinate value must end with 1 PNLZ1 Panel wire From connection point s direction i e 4 connects from left 1 right 2 above 8 below must end with 1 PNLXDIR1 To wire conn...

Page 870: ...the report list Run the report and click Cable Label on the Report Generator dialog box Lists the available fields for formatting the report including user defined attributes Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Re...

Page 871: ...ion data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear Access Click the Schematic Reports tool Select PLC I O Component Connection from the report list Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box Click Projects Reports Schematic Reports Select PLC I O Component Connection from the report list Run the report and click ...

Page 872: ...ort feature For example if you select Top Right the report is right justified during the display printing and when saved to a file the top portion is ig nored If you put the report on the drawing the report justification is top right Available Fields Wire number associated with PLC I O point PLCWNUM PLC tag ID value attribute TAG or TAG1 PLCTAG PLC I O point address attribute TAGAxx where xx is 01...

Page 873: ...value miscellaneous text such as Rack or Slot PLCLINE1 PLC I O module s LINE2 attribute value miscellaneous text such as Rack or Slot PLCLINE2 Connected component tag ID attributes TAG1 TAG2 TAGSTRIP CMPTAG Connected component description attribute values 1 3 CMPDESC1 3 Connected component Installation attribute value CMPINST Connected component Location attribute value CMPLOC Connected component ...

Page 874: ...erminal s Installation attribute value TERMINST Connected terminal s Location attribute value TERMLOC Connected terminal s TERM or TERM01 attribute value TERMTERM Connected terminal s TERMDESC01 attribute value TERMTERMDESC Connected terminal s Manufacturer attribute value TERMMFG Connected terminal s catalog part number TERMCAT Connected terminal s ASSYCODE attribute value TERMASSYCODE Connected ...

Page 875: ...ld from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the verti...

Page 876: ...re layer name WLAY parent 1 child 2 P1C2 Line reference or X Y grid reference or X Zone reference REF Sheet the S value SH Drawing name the D value SHDWGNAM Block name BLKNAME Entity handle number HDL Wire connection X TERMxx suffix for example for attribute X4TERM05 the value would be 05 XTERM Cable CBL Cable wire or cable core color CBLWC Contact attribute value Normally Open NO or Normally Clos...

Page 877: ...E Rating 1 12 attribute values RATING1 12 Wire connection X TERMxx attribute s entity handle name XTERMHDL Wire connection X TERMxx attribute s direction code and suffix XDIR From device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database DWGIX Connector details data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear Access Click the...

Page 878: ...rt list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification column label default is Top Left The vertical portion of the justification Top Middle Bottom is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature For example if you s...

Page 879: ...erence or X Zone reference REF Installation attribute value INST Location attribute value LOC Sheet the S value SH Drawing name the D value SHDWGNAM Entity handle number used internally for programming or customiz ation HDL Rating 1 12 attribute values RATING1 12 From device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database used internally for programming or custom izat...

Page 880: ...Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification...

Page 881: ...ing name the D value SHDWGNAM Block name BLKNAME Entity handle number HDL Wire connection X TERMxx attribute s direction code and suffix XDIR Cable CBL Cable wire or cable core color CBLWC Drawing section assignment SEC Drawing sub section assignment SUBSEC Component wire connection TERMDESCxx value TERMDESC Installation attribute value INST Description attribute values 1 3 DESC1 3 Manufacturer or...

Page 882: ...eport and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box Click Projects Reports Schematic Reports Select Connector Summary from the report list Run the report and click Change Report Format on the Re port Generator dialog box Lists the available fields for formatting the report including user defined attributes Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report li...

Page 883: ...t the report on the drawing the report justification is top right Available Fields Tag ID of plug jack connector CONNECTOR Maximum number of pins MAX Count of used or in use pins USED List of wire connection pin number in use PINSUSED Pin numbers repeated REPEATS Installation attribute value INST Location attribute value LOC Manufacturer or vendor name i e Siemens MFG Catalog part number assignmen...

Page 884: ...lds to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column Change fie...

Page 885: ...signment CAT Description attribute values 1 3 DESC1 3 Line reference or X Y grid reference or X Zone reference REF Installation attribute value INST Location attribute value LOC Rating 1 12 attribute values RATING1 12 Catalog one line description text CATDESC QUERY1 field pulled from catalog lookup QUERY1 2nd query field middle pulldown on Catalog Lookup dialog box QUERY2 Catalog lookup data field...

Page 886: ...g SUBSEC assignment SUBSEC Component family FAMILY Tag ID of device on alternate drawing type WDTAGALT Alternate type of symbol for example PN for pneumatic HYD for hydraulic WDTYPE AutoCAD drawing dwg file name with full path FILENAME Missing bill of material data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear Access Click the Schematic Reports tool Sele...

Page 887: ...o Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification column label default is Top Left The vertical portion of the justification Top Middle Bottom is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature For example if...

Page 888: ... From To from the report list Run the report Select the location codes for the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box Click Projects Reports Schematic Reports Select Wire From To from the report list Run the report Select the location codes for the report and click Change Report Format on the Report Generator dialog box Lists the available fields for formatting th...

Page 889: ...ed during the display printing and when saved to a file the top portion is ig nored If you put the report on the drawing the report justification is top right Available Fields Wire number WIRENO From device s location code must end with 1 LOC1 From device s component tag ID must end with 1 CMP1 From device s wire connection terminal number must end with 1 PIN1 To device s location code must end wi...

Page 890: ... values 1 3 DESC1CBL DESC3CBL Cable parent or child parent 1 child 2 CBLP1C2 From device s component tag and component terminal pin number CMP PIN1 To device s component tag and component terminal pin number CMP PIN2 From device s drawing section assignment must end with 1 SEC1 From device s drawing sub section assignment must end with 1 SUB1 To device s drawing section assignment must end with 2 ...

Page 891: ...DLEV1 To device s panel equivalent panel WDLEV value must end with 2 PNLWDLEV2 From device s entity handle value must end with 1 CMPHDL1 To device s entity handle value must end with 2 CMPHDL2 From device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database must end with 1 DWGIX1 To device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database must e...

Page 892: ...ical X coordinate value must end with 1 PNLX1 From wire connection s physical Y coordinate value must end with 1 PNLY1 From wire connection s physical Z coordinate value must end with 1 PNLZ1 Panel wire From connection point s direction i e 4 connects from left 1 right 2 above 8 below must end with 1 PNLXDIR1 To wire connection s physical X coordinate value must end with 2 PNLX2 To wire connection...

Page 893: ... Format on the Report Generator dialog box Lists the available fields for formatting the report including user defined attributes Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up o...

Page 894: ...assignment ADDR Terminal or terminal number assignment not the STRIP ID value TERM Component wire connection TERMDESCxx value TERMDESC PLC I O point description attribute values lines 1 5 DESCA DESCE Line reference LREF Wire number WIRENO Installation attribute value INST Location attribute value LOC Manufacturer or vendor name for example Siemens MFG Catalog part number assignment CAT Optional as...

Page 895: ...t the I value IEC_I Drawing s IEC Location default the L value IEC_L Drawing section assignment SEC Drawing sub section assignment SUBSEC From device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database DWGIX Terminal numbers data fields to report Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear Access Click the Schematic Reports tool Select Termina...

Page 896: ...o Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification column label default is Top Left The vertical portion of the justification Top Middle Bottom is only used for the Put on Drawing report feature For example if...

Page 897: ...er or vendor name i e Siemens MFG Catalog part number assignment CAT Optional assembly code value used in catalog lookup query to get part number groups ASSYCODE Description attribute values 1 3 DESC1 3 Rating 1 12 attribute values RATNG1 12 Entity handle number HDL From device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of project scratch database DWGIX PLC modules used so far data fields t...

Page 898: ...rt Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justificat...

Page 899: ...e description text LINE2 Installation attribute value INST Location attribute value LOC Line reference or X Y grid reference or X Zone reference REF Sheet the S value SH Drawing name the D value SHDWGNAM Drawing section assignment SEC Drawing sub section assignment SUBSEC General description line of text DESC Entity handle number HDL From device s drawing DWGIX value as listed in FILETIME table of...

Page 900: ...Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column Change field name justification and the column la...

Page 901: ...C1 Wire number tied to device component 1 must end with 1 WNUM1 Layer of wire connecting to terminal side 1 must end with 1 LAYTRM1 Terminal strip TAGSTRIP ID name STRIP ID Terminal pin TERMDESC value for the first wire connection must end with 1 TD1 Terminal or terminal number assignment not the STRIP ID value TERM Terminal pin TERMDESC value for the second wire connection must end with 2 TD2 Ter...

Page 902: ...ID must end with 2 CMP2 To device s installation code INST2 To device s location code must end with 2 LOC2 Sheet the S value SH Line reference or X Y grid reference or X Zone reference REF Entity handle number HDL From device s wire connection point direction i e 4 connects from left must end with 1 XDIR1 To device s wire connection point direction i e 2 connects from above must end with 2 XDIR2 F...

Page 903: ...isplay in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the special character to separate the selected fields Enter a special character to separate the selected field...

Page 904: ... Generator dialog box Lists the available fields for formatting the report including user defined attributes Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the selected field or all fields from the Fields to Report list Remove Remove All Moves the selected field up one spot in the Fields...

Page 905: ...d with 1 INST1 From device s location code must end with 1 LOC1 From device s component tag ID must end with 1 CMP1 From device s wire connection terminal number must end with 1 PIN1 To device s installation code must end with 2 INST2 To device s location code must end with 2 LOC2 To device s component tag ID must end with 2 CMP2 To device s wire connection terminal number must end with 2 PIN2 Wir...

Page 906: ... Reference section Select Component override and click Setup In the Cross reference component override dialog box select Table Format and click Setup Lists the available fields for formatting the report including user defined attributes Select a field from the list to transfer it into the Fields to Report list Available Fields Lists the fields to display in the report Fields to Report Removes the ...

Page 907: ...ined and come from the Contact attrib ute on the child symbol this gets overwritten from the contact mapping in the dialog box TYPE Terminal pin number second wire connection TERM02 T2 Wire number second wire connection TERM02 W2 Line reference or X Y grid reference or X Zone reference REF Sheet the S value SH Drawing name the D value SHDWGNAM AutoCAD drawing file name dwg FILENAME AutoCAD drawing...

Page 908: ...ted field up one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Up Moves the selected field down one spot in the Fields to Report list Move Down Specifies the vertical and horizontal justification Top Left Middle Center Bottom Right of any column and the Change field name justification column label default is Top Left The vertical portion of the justification Top Middle Bottom is only used for the Put on ...

Page 909: ...dwg with complete path FULLFILENAME Generate schematic reports AutoCAD Electrical has multiple schematic reports that you can run To access the schematic reports click the Schematic Reports tool on the main Electrical toolbar or select Projects Reports Schematic Reports from the menu Bill of Materials reports The Bill of Material reports report only components with assigned BOM information These r...

Page 910: ...ound on the drawing set are listed on each side of this dialog Location is also included in the list if AutoCAD Electrical found any component or stand alone terminal that didn t have an assigned location code Component Wire List report This report extracts the component wire connection data and displays it in a dialog Each entry shows a connection to a component the wire number component tag name...

Page 911: ... point is the one that shows up in the report column PLC Modules Used So Far report For this report AutoCAD Electrical quickly scans the wiring diagram set It returns in a few moments and displays the I O modules it finds Each entry shows the module s beginning and ending address Terminal Numbers report This project wide stand alone report lists all instances of terminals Each entry includes infor...

Page 912: ...ed wire is on Cable Summary report This project wide cable conductor report gives a report listing all of the cable marker tags parent tags found Cable From To report This project wide cable conductor report lists the from to for each cable conductor along with the conductor s parent cable number conductor color code and wire number if present Wire Label report This report lists wire markers label...

Page 913: ...o display your report as a table on your drawing Save to File Saves the report to a file Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box You can define multiple file outputs Choose from ASCII report Comma Delimited Excel spreadsheet Access database and XML format User Post Switch specific functions against the data in the report When you select a switch the LISP routine runs...

Page 914: ...ude connector information in the report Include Connectors Specifies to include jumper information in the re port Include Jumpers Specifies to cable connector and jumper informa tion in the report All the above Lists each individual Tag ID and terminal number combination if selected If unselected default the List terminal numbers terminals are combined on the same Tag ID strip into a single entry ...

Page 915: ...entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick Named Installation type the installation code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used installation codes You can also create a report from multiple installation codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named installation search Location Codes to Extract Extract...

Page 916: ...nly components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick Named Installation type the installation code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used installation codes You can also create a report from multiple installation codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for th...

Page 917: ...e report list From the Projects menu select Reports Schematic Reports Select Cable From To from the report list Specify whether to process the project the active drawing or selected cables Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out of date drawing files Format Changes the format of the extracted data The dialog box lists the format f...

Page 918: ... click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used installation codes You can also create a report from multiple installation codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named installation search Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values Indicate to process all components that carry part num...

Page 919: ...ect Compon ent Wire List from the report list Specify whether to process the project active drawing or select components Options Specifies to include stand alone terminals or plug jack connectors in the report Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values Indicate to process all components that carry part number values components witho...

Page 920: ...gs that appear to be out of date with the project s wire connection table Freshen Wire ConnectionTable Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include any out of date drawing files Format Changes the format of the extracted data The sub dialog box lists the format files to select from Schematic connector details AutoCAD Electrical extracts the component wire connect...

Page 921: ...code that matches that entered in the edit box For example BOM report for components marked OP STA 2 Wild cards are supported After you click Named Location type the location code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used location codes You can also create a report from multiple location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for ...

Page 922: ... select from a list of used installation codes You can also create a report from multiple installation codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named installation search Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values Indicate to process all components that carry part number values components without a locati...

Page 923: ...ject or a single pick Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values Indicate to process all components that carry part number values components without an installation code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported After you click Named Installation type the instal...

Page 924: ...plays it in a dialog Each entry shows a connection to a component the wire number component tag name terminal pin number component location code if present and the layer that the connected wire is on Access Click the Schematic Reports tool Select Component from the report list From the Projects menu select Reports Schematic Reports Select Compon ent from the report list Specify whether to process ...

Page 925: ... the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used location codes You can also create a report from multiple location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named location search Freshen Project Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out of date drawing files Format Changes the format ...

Page 926: ...to process all components that carry part number values components without a location code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box For example BOM report for components marked OP STA 2 Wild cards are supported After you click Named Location type the location code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used location...

Page 927: ...he active drawing or selected wires List Lists drawings that appear to be out of date with the project s wire connection table Freshen Wire ConnectionTable Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the wire connection table to include any out of date drawing files Format Changes the format of the extracted data The dialog box lists the format files to select from Schematic PLC I O address and des...

Page 928: ...list for the named installation search Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values Indicate to process all components that carry part number values components without a location code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box For example BOM report for components marked OP STA 2 Wild cards are su...

Page 929: ...rawing or List Project to select from a list of used installation codes You can also create a report from multiple installation codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named installation search Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values Indicate to process all components that carry part number values co...

Page 930: ...he edit box Wild cards are supported After you click Named Installation type the installation code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used installation codes You can also create a report from multiple installation codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named installation search Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the...

Page 931: ... PLC Modules Used So Far from the report list From the Projects menu select Reports Schematic Reports Select PLC Modules Used So Far from the report list Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values Indicate to process all components that carry part number values components without an installation code or only components marked with a...

Page 932: ...ect Database Specifies for AutoCAD Electrical to update the project database to include any out of date drawing files Format Changes the format of the extracted data The dialog box lists the format files to select from Schematic wire label This report lists wire markers labels and can be used to create physical wire or cable labels Access Click the Schematic Reports tool Select Wire Label from the...

Page 933: ...ocation type the location code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used location codes You can also create a report from multiple location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named location search List Lists drawings that appear to be out of date with the project s wire connection table Freshen Wire ConnectionTable Spe...

Page 934: ...comma delimited file to import into a spreadsheet or database program or insert it on to a drawing in table format Displays the from left hand list and to location codes right hand list found on the drawing s Location codes Clicking a location code moves the selected code from these lists to the Report From To list in the center of the dialog box Displays the combination of location codes you sele...

Page 935: ...l Layout toolbar or select Projects Reports Panel Reports from the menu Bill of Material report This report parallels the Schematic BOM report but deals with panel component and terminal footprint symbols and nameplates Optionally it can include schematic items that are not referenced on the panel layouts for example field devices You can customize the scope of the report by filtering on certain l...

Page 936: ...Mxx attributes AutoCAD Electrical reports their XYZ wire connection location The location is offset by the value defined in Panel Configuration dialog box Component Exception report This report provides error checking between the schematics and panel layout drawings AutoCAD Electrical looks at the selected components both schematic and panel looking for a match in the project For each schematic co...

Page 937: ...ubleshooting mechanism to aid in the assignment of wiring annotation End1 is the end of the wire that contains the annotation and End2 is the end of the wire that was annotated on End1 but is not found in the range of drawings selected Missing Level Sequencing Assignments report This report lists which component symbols do not have leveling and sequencing information already assigned to them This ...

Page 938: ...splay your report as a table on your drawing Save to File Saves the report to a file Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box You can define multiple file outputs Choose from ASCII report Comma Delimited Excel spreadsheet Access database and XML format User Post Switches specific functions against the data in the report When you select a switch the LISP routine runs a...

Page 939: ...e report list Click Projects Reports Panel Reports Select Bill of Material from the report list Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing Include options Specifies to include nameplate information in the report Include Nameplates Specifies to include connector information in the report Include Cable Connectors Specifies to cable connector and nameplate inform ation in the report...

Page 940: ...es to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values Indicate to process all components that carry part number values components without an installation code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick Named Installation type the installation code in the box or click List Dra...

Page 941: ...a match in the project For each schematic component selected it tries to find a matching panel component based on tag location and installation information If a match is found it compares catalog and description information looking for any discrepancies AutoCAD Electrical then looks at each selected panel component looking for a matching schematic component in the same way Access Click the Panel R...

Page 942: ...edit box For example BOM report for components marked OP STA 2 Wild cards are supported After you pick Named Location type the location code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used location codes You can also create a report from multiple location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named location search Redisplay Las...

Page 943: ...cards are supported Once you pick Named Installation type the installation code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used installation codes You can also create a report from multiple installation codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named installation search Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for co...

Page 944: ...rom the report list In the Missing Level Sequence Assignments dialog box click Show to display temporary graphics around the insertion point of the panel layout symbols or click Report to run the report Specify whether to process the project or the active drawing Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values Indicate to process all com...

Page 945: ...mbol doesn t have a From and a To for wire annotation information For wire annotation the panel component symbols contain wiring information as either attributed or Mtext data This is used as a troubleshooting mechanism to aid in the assignment of wiring annotation End1 is the end of the wire that contains the annotation and End2 is the end of the wire that was annotated on End1 but is not found i...

Page 946: ...t from a list of used location codes You can also create a report from multiple location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named location search Format Changes the format of the extracted data The sub dialog box lists the format files to select from Panel nameplate This report is similar to the panel component report but filters out all but nameplate sym...

Page 947: ...rt from multiple location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named location search Redisplay Last Run Displays the previously extracted report Format Changes the format of the extracted data The dialog box lists the format files to select from Panel terminal exception This report provides error checking between the schematic terminals and panel layout ter...

Page 948: ... You can also create a report from multiple installation codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named installation search Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values Indicate to process all components that carry part number values components without a location code or only components marked with a locat...

Page 949: ... without an installation code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported After you pick Named Installation type the installation code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used installation codes You can also create a report from multiple installation codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically cr...

Page 950: ...file is used for both manual and automatic reports When running automatic reports the format file can also contain information for saving the report to file s and or putting the report on the drawing s as a report table The Report Format File Setup dialog box allows you to create or modify your format files You can enter in X Y coordinates for the first section or click Pick to select a location I...

Page 951: ...pe available for the selected report and enter one file name per type If multiple file types are selected when the report is run using the Automatic Reports each file is created from that report data Overview of format files 939 ...

Page 952: ...file in automatic reports you should define either the Save Report to File options and or Put on Drawing options since the reports are not displayed in the Report Generator dialog box Save Report to File Saves the report to a file Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box You can define multiple file outputs Choose from ASCII report Comma Delimited Excel spreadsheet Ac...

Page 953: ...n the panel layout Display option Normal Tallied Format identical component or component assemblies are tallied and reported as single line items Ex Red pushbutton operator 800EP F4 with 800E A3L latch and two 800E 3X10 N O contact blocks Normal Tallied Format Group by Installation Location identical component or component assemblies with the same installation location codes are tallied and report...

Page 954: ...s Save Report to File Saves the report to a file Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box Choose from ASCII report rep Comma Delimited csv Excel spreadsheet xls Access database mdb and XML xml format The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option such as title line or time and date on...

Page 955: ...ied to the report prior to generating the report to screen printer file or automatic generation The format files are saved to the Documents and Settings user name sub directory Open Format File Selects format files to edit The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files set in the user sub directory Select a file to edit from the list and click OK Sav...

Page 956: ...thout a location code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick the Named Location button you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List Drawing or List Project button to select from a list of used location codes Report options Save Report to File Saves the report to a file Select the type of ...

Page 957: ...er Adds the special break value to the page header For example if you select a special break of Installation Location the values provided for these devices in the panel are displayed in the report section header Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen printer file or automatic generation The format files are saved to the Docu...

Page 958: ...pick the Named Installation button you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List Drawing or List Project button to select from a list of used installation codes Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values Indicate to process all components components without a location code or only components marked with a location c...

Page 959: ...med format file you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made Breaks Special breaks Specifies the value that controls the section break The drop down list displays the report specific content to apply to the special break Add Special break values to header Adds the special break value to the page header For example if you select a special break of Insta...

Page 960: ...ou pick the Named Installation button you can type the installation code in the box or click the List Drawing or List Project button to select from a list of used installation codes Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values Indicate to process all components components without a location code or only components marked with a location code ...

Page 961: ...eport as a table on your drawing Sort Fields Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK in the dialog boxes If you are working in an unnamed format file you must save the data after you select Done to keep the changes Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to...

Page 962: ... to process all components components without a location code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported After you click the Named Location button you can type the location code in the box or click the List Drawing or List Project button to select from a list of used location codes Report options Save Report to File Saves the r...

Page 963: ...printer file or automatic generation The format files are saved to the Documents and Settings user name subdirectory Open Format File Selects format files to edit The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files set in the user subdirectory Select a file to edit from the list and click OK Save Format File Saves a format file on the hard disk for later ...

Page 964: ...ing this dialog box Choose from ASCII report rep Comma Delimited csv Excel spreadsheet xls Access database mdb and XML xml format The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option such as title line or time and date on the first section of the report if multiple sections are used If not selected the selected options will be shown on all report sections Change Report Fields C...

Page 965: ...x opens and displays a list of format files set in the user sub directory Select a file to edit from the list and click OK Save Format File Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and usage when generating reports Save As Format File Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a different name Report format file setup panel terminal exception Access Click the drop down a...

Page 966: ...om a list of used location codes Report options Save Report to File Saves the report to a file Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box Choose from ASCII report rep Comma Delimited csv Excel spreadsheet xls Access database mdb and XML xml format The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected...

Page 967: ...enerating the report to screen printer file or automatic generation The format files are saved to the Documents and Settings user name sub directory Open Format File Selects format files to edit The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files set in the user sub directory Select a file to edit from the list and click OK Save Format File Saves a format...

Page 968: ...om a list of used location codes Report options Save Report to File Saves the report to a file Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box Choose from ASCII report rep Comma Delimited csv Excel spreadsheet xls Access database mdb and XML xml format The First Section Only button indicates to only show the selected...

Page 969: ... printer file or automatic generation The format files are saved to the Documents and Settings user name sub directory Open Format File Selects format files to edit The Report Format Settings File Selection dialog box opens and displays a list of format files set in the user sub directory Select a file to edit from the list and click OK Save Format File Saves a format file on the hard disk for lat...

Page 970: ...e Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing Sort Fields Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub dialog boxes If you are working in an unnamed format file you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made Format Fi...

Page 971: ...nd reported as single line items Display in Tallied Purchase List Format each part becomes its own line item for example no longer any subassembly items and each is tallied across all component types For example all 800E 3X10 N O contact blocks for all components are reported as a single line item Display in By TAG Format all instances of a given component ID or terminal tag are processed together...

Page 972: ...s Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear You can change the justification of any column and the column label The Description field can be multi lined If you include the Description field in your report you choose which lines make up this field Toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description Put on Drawing Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box...

Page 973: ...tic report list From the Projects menu select Reports Report Format File Setup Select Cable From To from the Schematic report list Report options Save Report to File Saves the report to a file Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box Choose from ASCII report rep Comma Delimited csv Excel spreadsheet xls Access...

Page 974: ...e if you select a special break of Installation Location the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen printer file or automatic generation The format files are saved to the Documents and Settings user name sub directory Open Format Fi...

Page 975: ... to process all components components without a location code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick the Named Location button you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List Drawing or List Project button to select from a list of used location codes Report options Save Report to File Saves ...

Page 976: ...lues to header Adds the special break value to the page header For example if you select a special break of Installation Location the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen printer file or automatic generation The format files are s...

Page 977: ...ject button to select from a list of used installation codes Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values Indicate to process all components components without a location code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick the Named Location button you can simply...

Page 978: ...ial breaks Specifies the value that controls the section break The drop down list displays the report specific content to apply to the special break Add Special break values to header Adds the special break value to the page header For example if you select a special break of Installation Location the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header For...

Page 979: ...mponents components without an installation code or only components marked with an installation code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick the Named Installation button you can simply type the installation code in the box or click the List Drawing or List Project button to select from a list of used installation codes Location Codes to Extract Extracts on...

Page 980: ...report you choose which lines make up this field Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description Put on Drawing Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing Sort Fields Controls the sorting order of the fields in the report NOTE The options are saved in the format file after you click OK on the sub dialog boxe...

Page 981: ...etails Access Click the drop down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool Select Connector Details from the Schematic report list From the Projects menu select Reports Report Format File Setup Select Connector Details from the Schematic report list Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values In...

Page 982: ...er in which they appear You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label If you include the Description field in your report you choose which lines make up this field Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description Put on Drawing Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing Sort Fi...

Page 983: ...le Setup tool Select Connector Plug from the Schematic report list From the Projects menu select Reports Report Format File Setup Select Connector Plug from the Schematic report list Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values Indicate to process all components components without an installation code or only components marked with an...

Page 984: ...cation of any column and even the column label If you include the Description field in your report you choose which lines make up this field Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description Put on Drawing Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing Sort Fields Controls the sorting order of the fields in the re...

Page 985: ...e Setup tool Select Connector Summary from the Schematic report list From the Projects menu select Reports Report Format File Setup Select Connector Summary from the Schematic report list Installation Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific installation values Indicate to process all components components without an installation code or only components marked wi...

Page 986: ...cation of any column and even the column label If you include the Description field in your report you choose which lines make up this field Just toggle on and off the specific fields to define the Description Put on Drawing Opens the Table Generation Setup dialog box for specifying how to display your report as a table on your drawing Sort Fields Controls the sorting order of the fields in the re...

Page 987: ... on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool Select Component from the Schematic report list From the Projects menu select Reports Report Format File Setup Select Component from the Schematic report list Options Specifies whether to include components cable markers or connectors in the report You can also indicate to include the children for any of the selected option...

Page 988: ...e on the first section of the report if multiple sections are used If not selected the selected options will be shown on all report sections Change Report Fields Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear You can also change the justification of any column and even the column label If you include the Description field in your report you choose which lines make up this...

Page 989: ...rieval and usage when generating reports Save As Format File Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a different name Report format file setup schematic missing bill of material Access Click the drop down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Report Format File Setup tool Select Missing Bill of Material from the Schematic report list From the Projects menu select Reports ...

Page 990: ...t Section Only button indicates to only show the selected option such as title line or time and date on the first section of the report if multiple sections are used If not selected the selected options will be shown on all report sections Change Report Fields Changes what data fields are reported and the order in which they appear You can also change the justification of any column and even the c...

Page 991: ...ays a list of format files set in the user sub directory Select a file to edit from the list and click OK Save Format File Saves a format file on the hard disk for later retrieval and usage when generating reports Save As Format File Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a different name Report format file setup schematic wire from to Access Click the drop down arrow on the Schemat...

Page 992: ...g boxes If you are working in an unnamed format file you have to save the data after you select Done in order to keep the changes you have made Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen printer file or automatic generation The format files are saved to the Documents and Settings user name sub directory Open Format File Selects ...

Page 993: ... are supported Once you pick the Named Location button you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List Drawing or List Project button to select from a list of used location codes Report options Save Report to File Saves the report to a file Select the type of output file from the Save Report to File dialog box You can define multiple file outputs using this dialog box Choose fro...

Page 994: ...if you select a special break of Installation Location the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen printer file or automatic generation The format files are saved to the Documents and Settings user name sub directory Open Format File...

Page 995: ...ate to process all components components without a location code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick the Named Location button you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List Drawing or List Project button to select from a list of used location codes Report options Save Report to File Sav...

Page 996: ... Add Special break values to header Adds the special break value to the page header For example if you select a special break of Installation Location the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen printer file or automatic generation T...

Page 997: ... to process all components components without a location code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick the Named Location button you can simply type the location code in the box or click the List Drawing or List Project button to select from a list of used location codes Report options Save Report to File Saves ...

Page 998: ...lues to header Adds the special break value to the page header For example if you select a special break of Installation Location the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header Format File Format files define specific criteria applied to the report prior to generating the report to screen printer file or automatic generation The format files are s...

Page 999: ...tton to select from a list of used installation codes Location Codes to Extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location values Indicate to process all components components without a location code or only components marked with a location code that matches that entered in the edit box Wild cards are supported Once you pick the Named Location button you can simply type t...

Page 1000: ...ial breaks Specifies the value that controls the section break The drop down list displays the report specific content to apply to the special break Add Special break values to header Adds the special break value to the page header For example if you select a special break of Installation Location the values provided for these devices in the schematic are displayed in the report section header For...

Page 1001: ...s in the specified format Display Cable Label Change Report Fields Changes which data fields are reported and the order in which they appear You can change the justification of any column and the column label There are two categories that you can change the report format for wire label or cable label Once you modify the report format you can save it for future use The wire and cable label formats ...

Page 1002: ... use the AutoCAD table edit command to edit the table Breaks Specifies the value that controls the section break The list displays the report specific content to apply to the special break Special Breaks Adds the special break value to the page header For example if you select a special break of Installa Add Special Break Values to Header tion Location the values provided for these devices in the ...

Page 1003: ...OK Saves a format file on the hard drive for later retrieval and usage when generating reports Save Format File Saves a format file that you opened and modified with a different name Save As Format File Run automatic reports The Automatic Report Selection tool allows you to run multiple reports at one time The Report Generator dialog box is not displayed for each report and no user input is requir...

Page 1004: ...reports then click Save Report Grouping The information about the format files is saved in a Report Grouping file with an rgf extension The next time you want to run that report set open the Automatic Reports Selection dialog box click Open Report Grouping and select the rgf file you previously saved you are ready to run the reports When you click OK the reports run in the selected order If the fo...

Page 1005: ...rt name and format file are selected 6 Continue adding more reports to the Selected Reports list For the File and Table Output options an X indicates that the automatic generation will run that portion while an O indicates that it will not run that portion 7 Modify the output of a report type by selecting the report in the Selected Reports list and then clicking the Modify Output button Make chang...

Page 1006: ...le Setup button to create and save a format file The Browse button allows you to search for a specific format file that is not displayed in the list Control buttons Modify Output Changes the output types for individually selected reports Each format file definition can determine whether the report is set to a file or table on the drawing or both Select a file in the Selected Reports list click the...

Page 1007: ...tension Open Report Grouping Opens a previously saved grouping of report names and format files Save Report Grouping Saves a file that contains the list of report names and format files for later retrieval and usage You may define a list of reports based upon which customer is using the report data and the format that customer would like to see the reports in Drawing Information forTable Output Sp...

Page 1008: ... to edit component tags descriptions catalog assignments wire numbers or PLC I O descriptions from a spreadsheet and then have your edits update your drawings Your spreadsheet database edits can update existing 996 Chapter 14 Reports ...

Page 1009: ...mat Microsoft Excel Access file Tab delimited ASCII or Comma delimited ASCII and the location codes to extract and click OK AutoCAD Electrical creates a file of the data pulled from your wiring diagram drawings 7 Open this file in any spreadsheet or database program for view and edit Caution If you selected a Tab or Comma delimited ASCII format import all fields as text Some spreadsheet programs m...

Page 1010: ...ns and click OK The project or drawing s data automatically updates to match the edits on the spreadsheet All spreadsheet update changes are automatically logged complete with time and date in a text file saved to the Auto CAD Electrical user subdirectory If you edit the BLOCK field in the spreadsheet and assign a different block name AutoCAD Electrical tries to find the new block during the updat...

Page 1011: ...Access Click the arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread sheet tool Select Component from the list From the Projects menu select Export to Spreadsheet Export to Spreadsheet Select Component from the list Data export for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet Location Code...

Page 1012: ... Named Location type the location code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used location codes You can also create a report from multiple location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named location search PLC I O header information export This utility copies PLC I O header information to a comma delimited Excel XLS or ...

Page 1013: ...tic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread sheet tool Select PLC I O wire connections from the list From the Projects menu select Export to Spreadsheet Export to Spreadsheet Select PLC I O wire connections from the list Data export for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet Location Codes to e...

Page 1014: ...ith specific location values After you pick Named Location type the location code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used location codes You can also create a report from multiple location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named location search Panel layout data export This utility copies panel components to a comma...

Page 1015: ...n the Schematic Reports tool to access the Export to Spread sheet tool Select Panel terminals from the list From the Projects menu select Export to Spreadsheet Export to Spreadsheet Select Panel terminals from the list Data export for Specifies to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project Output format Specifies the format for outputting the spreadsheet Location Codes to extract...

Page 1016: ... Named Location type the location code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used location codes You can also create a report from multiple location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named location search Update drawings per spreadsheet data Access Click the drop down arrow on the Schematic Reports tool to access the U...

Page 1017: ...oxes The Project Database Service PDS saves all non AutoCAD Electrical aware attributes from block files into the project for processing The PDS maintains these database entries when the drawing file is saved and monitors them in real time as if they are normal components in the project Once the PDS successfully places the attribute values of all blocks from the drawing files into the AutoCAD Elec...

Page 1018: ...ste contents from one cell into another If left blank default values are used 6 Repeat for any additional attributes 7 Click OK If this is the first time the grid content is being saved the Save As dialog box displays Enter the file name and click Save This is generally project_name wda or default wda NOTE Click Save As if an existing file needs to be saved in a dif ferent location or with a diffe...

Page 1019: ...te Tag in the list Enter text click in the cell to edit or right click in the cell to pick copy cut or paste a value NOTE An attribute tag is required and must be specified before you can edit any of the other fields in its row Edits and displays the column width for the attribute tag Enter a number click in the cell to edit or right click in the cell to copy or cut a value Column Width NOTE If le...

Page 1020: ...is is available only for the Attribute Tag Pick Copies the cell contents to paste in another Copy Removes the cell contents to paste in another Cut Places the copied or cut cell contents in a new cell Paste NOTE You can also copy cut and paste entire row contents from one row to another one at a time however you cannot paste the row contents into a single cell Set up for export toAutodesk Inventor...

Page 1021: ...ventor Professional These attributes can be component definition catalog database or component occurrence specific Use the Edit Component tool to edit the occurrence of a component Upon selection of a catalog number from the AutoCAD Electrical catalog database component definition properties can be applied to the component occurrence and the information exported into the XML file NOTE When you app...

Page 1022: ...Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable Harness If a wire that is included in the custom report output file is not recognized as a library wire in the Cable Harness Library during the Import Wire List process the wire occurrence will not be imported The layers defined in AutoCAD Electrical must first be defined as valid wire layers Each AutoCAD Electrical wire layer must then correspond to a valid li...

Page 1023: ...r from the AutoCAD Electrical catalog database splice definition properties can be applied to the component occurrence and the information exported into the XML file NOTE When you apply additional parts to the component occurrence their respective splice definition properties can also be applied in the overall component occurrence Up to 10 additional part numbers can be applied to the occurrence o...

Page 1024: ...1 TAG2 Descriptions used to describe the component Occurrence DESC1 DESC3 Main AutoCAD Electrical catalog number Part Number property name in Autodesk Inventor Professional Occurrence CAT Manufacturer Vendor of Part Number property name in Autodesk Inventor Professional Occurrence MFG Assembly code for part if part is a subset of an assembly Occurrence ASSYCODE Multiple BOM part numbers Occurrence...

Page 1025: ...CAD layer Definition custom Definition Layer Name Wire Proper ties Xrecords properties on the wire number in Autodesk Inventor Professional Wire attributes on wire number block file Occurrence custom properties on Occurrence WIRENO attributes WIRENO01 10 the wire number in Autodesk Inventor Professional Cable ID Properties Installation and Location code associ ated to the component tag RefDes Occu...

Page 1026: ...bset of an assembly Occurrence ASSYCODE Multiple BOM part numbers Occurrence CAT01 10 Multiple BOM Manufacturer associ ated to the Multiple BOM part num bers Occurrence MFG01 10 Multiple BOM Assembly codes associ ated to the Multiple BOM part num bers Occurrence ASSYCODE01 10 Family code definition FAMILY attrib ute on AutoCAD Electrical block file Definition FAMILY Block name definition used for ...

Page 1027: ...an assembly Occurrence ASSYCODE Multiple BOM part numbers Occurrence CAT01 10 Multiple BOM Manufacturer associ ated to the Multiple BOM part num bers Occurrence MFG01 10 Multiple BOM Assembly codes associ ated to the Multiple BOM part num bers Occurrence ASSYCODE01 10 Rating information associated to the component definition Occurrence RATING1 12 Family code definition FAMILY attrib ute on AutoCAD...

Page 1028: ...ialog box spe cify whether to process the project or current drawing and click OK 4 In the Autodesk Inventor Professional XML File Export dialog box define the location and filename for the export file By default file is saved with a xml extension to the C Documents and Settings username My Documents folder Configure wire numbering for export There are several steps to set up the wire numbering co...

Page 1029: ... name and select Properties In the Drawing Format tab Layers section click Define Set unique wire IDs You need to assign each wire a unique wire ID or number before they can be imported into another application 1 Click the Project Manager tool 2 In the project listing right click the project name and select Properties 3 In the Project Properties dialog box click the Wire Numbers tab 4 In the Wire ...

Page 1030: ...sert wire number dialog box select Make it Fixed to force the wire number to a fixed state 4 Click OK Inserting wire numbers using project wide utilities 1 Click the arrow on the Projects New Existing tool to access the Project Wide Utilities tool 2 Click the Project Wide Utilities tool 3 In the Project Wide Utilities dialog box select Set all wire numbers to fixed 4 Click OK All wire numbers in t...

Page 1031: ... Autodesk Inventor Professional Ex port Select to export the active drawing or the entire project The Autodesk Inventor Professional XML File Export dialog box then displays allowing you to define a location and filename for the export file By default the file is saved with an xml extension to the C Documents and Settings username My Documents folder You can change the location and the last saved ...

Page 1032: ...1020 ...

Page 1033: ...onfiguration and defaults Relationship between schematic drawings and panel layouts Overview of footprint attributes Xdata Footprint Terminal Insertion Layout Wire Connection Annotation Lookup Files Item Numbers Balloons Nameplates Panel Leveling Sequencing Tools 15 1021 ...

Page 1034: ...otprint representations AutoCAD Electrical extracts various reports from these smart panel layout drawings including panel BOM panel component item lists nameplate reports and schematic versus panel exception reports Automatic schematic panel update AutoCAD Electrical allows limited bi directional updating between schematic components and the associated footprint blocks The link is through the com...

Page 1035: ...he Panel Layout toolbar is not visible you can turn it on by right clicking on a toolbar and selecting ACE Panel Layout Main level options on the Panel Layout toolbar include Insert Component Footprint Terminal Strip Editor Copy Footprint Edit Footprint Insert Balloon Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint Overview of panel layouts 1023 ...

Page 1036: ...oCAD s selection mode is set to Noun Verb selection i e system variable PICKFIRST is set to 1 Panel drawing configuration and defaults Configuration settings are saved as attribute values on a non visible block named WD_PNLM If your current drawing does not have this block present when any AutoCAD Electrical panel layout command is invoked AutoCAD Electrical pauses and asks you for permission to i...

Page 1037: ...s a sub dialog box for setting the type of balloon marker circle ellipse polygon text marker size margin and text gap Footprint layers Opens the Panel Component Layers sub dialog box for setting the panel component layers non text graphic layers and nameplate layers Panel footprint layering works in the same way AutoCAD Electrical schematic layering When AutoCAD Electrical inserts a footprint it i...

Page 1038: ...lights as an example each symbol shown on the schematic ladder diagrams needs to map to a scaled physical pilot light representation on the panel layout drawings The physical layout drawing might be a control panel enclosure door layout The door layout shows where each push button component is to be mounted and can indicate the size of the hole in the sheet metal door for mounting Pilot light comp...

Page 1039: ...alog part number and LT412 has the smaller pilot light part number The three red pilot lights are represented as footprints in the panel layout as shown On the physical panel layout drawing these pilot light symbols are inserted as footprint blocks using the Insert Footprint Schematic List tool Notice that LT412 the 22 5mm pilot light appears smaller than the others AutoCAD Electrical knows which ...

Page 1040: ...atic values as standard AutoCAD non visible extended entity data Xdata Some manufacturers provide free to scale mechanical libraries of their control components all in AutoCAD format Or you may have your own in house footprints set up In either case since AutoCAD Electrical doesn t have naming or attribute requirements these libraries can be used as is When AutoCAD Electrical inserts such a block ...

Page 1041: ...ssembly code internal use by AutoCAD Electrical ASSYCODE installation code 24 char max INST location code 16 char max LOC mount location code 24 char max MOUNT group location code 24 char max GROUPWITH schematic symbol block name used for catalog lookup WDBLKNAM rating values 60 char max each RATING1 12 terminal strip ID terminal footprints only P_TAGSTRIP terminal number terminal footprints only ...

Page 1042: ...ate block must carry a minimum of one of the following VIA_WD_NP Xdata name NP blank value Attribute Select Xdata to change to a block attribute This tool converts any piece of non visible extended entity data Xdata into a visible attribute tied directly to the footprint block Access Click the arrow on the Edit Footprint tool to access the Make Xdata Visible tool Select a footprint From the Panel ...

Page 1043: ...AD Electrical to insert smart footprint outlines of electrical components and devices onto layout drawings The most common ways to insert these are semi automatic mode or manually In the semi automatic mode AutoCAD Electrical uses the component s manufacturer and catalog number information goes to a manufacturer look up database table finds a match for the catalog number and selects the associated...

Page 1044: ...Panel Layout Insert Footprint Icon Menu For items that might not be included on the schematics you have 2 options for insertion Pick the item from a vendor icon menu that is preset with specific catalog number data and footprint block names Choosing from this menu supplies AutoCAD Electrical with the manufacturer and catalog information and the footprint block name bypassing any look up Pick a gen...

Page 1045: ...nsert a panel footprint from a list of the schematic components if the MFG and CAT values match it displays the WD_AB icon menu When the icon menu displays make your specific footprint block selection Your menu pick provides AutoCAD Electrical with the footprint block name to use for the target MFG CAT combination You can set up multiple orientations configurations of a single footprint all tied t...

Page 1046: ... file with this name If found AutoCAD Electrical queries this specific vendor table using the selected entry s catalog CAT part number attribute value If a record match is found AutoCAD Electrical returns the block name from the matched record It starts the Insert Footprint com mand and prompts for the insertion point for the footprint block As the block inserts attributes are added in to make the...

Page 1047: ...aits for you to pick from the icon menu selection The specific footprint block path name to use is encoded into the icon menu file page 5 excerpt from example my_lookup_menu dat AutoCAD Electrical icon menu file shown below M5 300 AMP FRAME MCP 2 D plan view mcp_300_2dpv sld MCP300 2Dp dwg 3 D plan insertion mcp_300_3dpv sld MCP300 3Dp dwg 2 D side view mcp_300_2dsv sld C wd_infpx MCP300 2Ds dwg 3...

Page 1048: ...ive drawing as defined by the command in the pnl file 3 Select the insertion point on the screen Insert footprint This icon menu can be modified expanded or replaced with your own custom menu You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Project Properties Project Settings dialog box Select Projects Project Project Manager Right click the project name an...

Page 1049: ...ot find any of the icon menu files listed in the wdp an alert dialog displays Displays the symbol images corresponding to the menu or the sub menu selected in the Menu section Clicking on the icon Symbol Preview window performs one of the following functions based on the icon prop erties as defined by the dat file Executes a command Displays a submenu NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon the...

Page 1050: ...en the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default Specifies the component block insertion scale This defaults to the value set in the Panel Drawing Configuration dialog box Scale schematic Once set this value is remembered until reset or until the drawing editing session ends Specifies the footprint insertion scale This defaults to the value set in the Panel Drawing Confi...

Page 1051: ...ard to change any icon properties Panel layout terminal insert edit Access On the Panel Layout toolbar click the arrow on the Terminal Strip Editor tool to access the Insert Terminal Manual tool Select the method for inserting a terminal strip and place the terminal strip on the drawing Click Panel Layout Insert Terminal Manual Select the method for inserting a terminal strip and place the termina...

Page 1052: ...ompon ent with the location code Specifies the Tag ID given to the terminal strip If there is an existing name it appears in the edit box Tag Strip If not you can enter a specific ID name or click the and buttons to increment or decrement the last digit character in the Tag Strip value Specifies the terminal number If there isn t PINLIST information the and buttons increment or Number decrement th...

Page 1053: ...ox where you can define and maintain terminal block properties Block Properties NOTE This is disabled if the active drawing is not part of the active project Properties Associations The list box displays the current status of the edited terminals association It lists all associated terminal symbols from the schematic and terminal panel footprints If the terminal symbol is being inserted for the fi...

Page 1054: ...e Catalog Data You can do a drawing wide or project wide listing of similar terminals with their catalog assignments During your editing session the last MFG CAT ASSYCODE assignment for each terminal you insert into your wiring diagram is remembered When you insert another terminal of that type the previous terminal s catalog assignment is set as the default assuming a previous one was made during...

Page 1055: ...a sub dialog box Make your catalog assignment by picking from the dialog list External file You can pull catalog assignments from a gen eric ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spreadsheet or database program A dialog box displays the contents of the selected text file Find and highlight the de sired entry AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks it in...

Page 1056: ...rom the list to automatically update the component with the codes Show Edit Miscellaneous View or edit any attributes that are not predefined AutoCAD Electrical attributes External List Assigns information from an external list to specified data in the Panel Layout Terminal Insert Edit dialog box Any existing information from the dialog box appear in the edit box To define the information from the...

Page 1057: ... schematics to create a component or terminal spreadsheet listing This can help drive the new project s panel layout AutoCAD Electrical creates a comma delimited file of the schematic data You can display this data in spreadsheet format open it in comma delimited CSV format edit and then save back out Location Codes to extract Extracts only the information for components with specific location val...

Page 1058: ...lookup to find and select catalog information An attempt will be made to find a match in the manufacturer s footprint lookup or the _PNLMISC miscellaneous lookup file Choice B Skips the catalog assignment Select to draw a simple footprint representation of the selected device browse for a footprint block file pick on an existing block on the current drawing to convert it to AutoCAD Electrical smar...

Page 1059: ...g Add Entry to Manufacturer footprint block or drawing file It will have the same name as the component s manufacturer name Adds a new entry to a miscellaneous catch all footprint lookup table called _PNLMISC This will Add Entry to Miscellaneous add the MFG CAT combination to the footprint lookup table and match it with an existing footprint block or library symbol If the lookup table does not exi...

Page 1060: ...umber values match an existing component that is already assigned an Item number If no existing match is found you can manually enter an item number These item numbers which can be linked to smart balloons display in panel BOM and component lists Scans each listed drawing for the target component type and returns a list of what was found You can make your catalog assignment by picking from the lis...

Page 1061: ... s catalog database from which you can manually enter or pick the Manufacturer or Catalog values Search Catalog Lookup the database for a specific catalog item to assign to the currently se lected component Database queries are set up in the lists across the top of the dialog with the database hits listed in the dialog s main window Lists the part numbers used for similar components in the current...

Page 1062: ... tag from an external list file External list file Description Up to 3 lines of description attribute text can be entered Displays a list of descriptions found in the current drawing so you can select similar descriptions to edit Drawing Displays a list of descriptions found in the project so you can pick similar descriptions to edit Project Opens an ASCII text file from which you can select stand...

Page 1063: ...arious BOM and component reports Access On the Insert Edit Component or Panel Layout Component Insert Edit dialog box Catalog Data section click Multiple Catalog NOTE You can also access this dialog by clicking Multiple Catalog on the Copy Catalog Assignment dialog box Components Component Miscellaneous Copy Catalog Assignment The additional catalog part numbers are saved on the symbol as MFGn CAT...

Page 1064: ...Manufacturer Catalog Assembly combination For each catalog entry you must provide a name for the catalog look up table For the main catalog entry this information is provided on the symbol itself but may not be there for these catalog entries Select List to pick from a list of tables that are contained in your catalog database file or Misc to use the MISC_CAT table Catalog Lookup Checks for and di...

Page 1065: ...erying the footprint_lookup mdb and inserts the panel footprints at your pick point Each line or record in the equipment list represents a single entry into the Equipment in dialog box for schematic component selection The quantity for a selected catalog number is not supported You can select to insert a single panel footprint or multiple footprints from the equipment list Access On the Panel Layo...

Page 1066: ...d upon a match between the footprint symbol s catalog part number and an entry in a schematic lookup file If 0 matches are found you will be prompted to manually draw the footprint add an entry in the lookup file or select an existing footprint drawing file If multiple components are selected in the list the Spacing for Footprint Insertion dialog box displays allowing you to define how you want th...

Page 1067: ...uence is used to locate this file Access Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component Catalog List tool From the Component menu select Insert Component Lists Insert Com ponent Catalog List Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint Catalog List tool From the Panel Layout menu select Insert Footprint Lists Insert Footprint Catalog List...

Page 1068: ...terminal looking for a matching schematic terminal in the same way Access Click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Terminal Schematic List tool From the Panel Layout menu select Insert Terminal Schematic List If you start with panel layouts before you create schematics schematic pick list data is not available to automate footprint selection and annotation If you list your...

Page 1069: ...atabase file for input Access Click the arrow on the Insert Component tool to access the Insert Component Equipment List or click the arrow on the Insert Footprint tool to access the Insert Footprint Equipment List tool Select the spreadsheet file to use and click Open Click the table to edit and click OK From the Components menu select Insert Component Lists Insert Com ponent Equipment List or se...

Page 1070: ...e Vendor Panel Footprint dialog box after a vendor is first selected The vendor icon menu files that are found in AutoCAD Electrical are listed in the dialog box Vendor panel footprint This can save a lot of time if you frequently use the same vendor and panel components You can even apply this method to create client specific menus making it easier to use the vendor or components that each client...

Page 1071: ...n in Symbol Preview window serts the footprint into the active drawing as defined by the command in the pnl file Displays the last components inserted during the current editing session the most recently used icon displays in the top This list Recently Used box follows the view options setting in the symbol preview win dow icon icon with text or list view and the total number of icons displayed de...

Page 1072: ...box Vendor Menu Select Manually type in the component block to insert Type it Browses to and selects the component to insert Browse Right click menus Options for the Menu tree structure view Right click the main menu or submenu in the Menu tree structure view to display the following options Expand Collapse Toggles the visibility of the folders Properties Opens a Properties dialog box to modify th...

Page 1073: ... utility 1 On the Panel Layout toolbar click the Copy Footprint tool 2 Select the panel component to copy 3 Click the drawing to specify the insertion point or enter a value The Panel Layout Component Insert Edit dialog box displays 4 Specify any necessary values such as the component tag catalog information or description 5 Click OK Copy code values to components Use this tool to quickly insert o...

Page 1074: ... the drawing carrying the desired values for the all of the codes you want to copy Enter a value in the edit box Drawing Select a value from a list of values used on the active draw ing Project Select a value from a list of values used in the project Pick Select a panel component from the drawing carrying the desired value for the specific code 6 Click OK NOTE Schematic components only update inst...

Page 1075: ...py Location Code Copy Mount Code or Copy Group Code Retrieves existing values by selecting a panel component from the drawing carrying the desired Installation or Location value you wish to copy Pick master Specifies to copy the installation code that you enter in the edit box Installation Specifies to copy the location code that you enter in the edit box Location Specifies to copy the mount code ...

Page 1076: ...ributes added to any footprint automatically at footprint insertion time This means that using non intelligent footprint representations can insert with smart AutoCAD Electrical attributes added automatically on the fly There are 5 attribute template drawings component footprints wd_ptag_addattr_comp dwg terminal footprints wd_ptag_addattr_trm dwg terminal with wire no as terminal number wd_ptag_a...

Page 1077: ...coming in with that particular attribute tag name If there is no attribute with that name the merged attribute definition stays otherwise AutoCAD Electrical erases the merging one and keeps the existing one AutoCAD Electrical re blocks the added attribute definitions with the existing footprint Finally if there is schematic data to put on the footprint AutoCAD Electrical annotates the attributes i...

Page 1078: ...y and click Open 6 Specify the insertion point for the block 7 Enter a rotation angle or press Enter to use the default Your block is inserted onto the drawing at your picked point You can also insert copies of panel assemblies that are already on your active drawing 1 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Copy Assembly tool 2 Click the Copy Assembly tool 3 Select the...

Page 1079: ... order and have 28 columns of data and be saved in a CSV comma delimited text format Most of the fields can be left blank Component tag id ex PB101 TAG 1 Optional installation code INST 2 Optional location code LOC 3 Optional mount code MOUNT 4 Optional group code GROUPWIDTH 5 Manufacturer code MFG 6 Catalog number CAT 7 Optional catalog assembly code ASM 8 Optional count value CNT 9 Optional unit...

Page 1080: ...ag id ex TB1 TAGSTRIP 1 Optional installation code INST 2 Optional location code LOC 3 Optional mount code MOUNT 4 Optional group code GROUPWIDTH 5 Manufacturer code MFG 6 Catalog number CAT 7 Optional catalog assembly code ASM 8 Optional count value CNT 9 Optional unit of measure UM 10 Optional description text DESC1 DESC3 11 13 Optional schematic block name blank BLOCK 14 Optional rating values ...

Page 1081: ... from the spreadsheet driven pick list Schematic terminals list panel layout insert This report provides error checking between the schematic terminals and panel layout terminals The program looks at the selected terminals both schematic and panel looking for a match in the project For each schematic terminal selected it tries to find a matching panel terminal based on tag location and installatio...

Page 1082: ... delimited list for the named location search Schematic components or terminals AutoCAD Electrical processes the project drawing set It presents a list of all parent components or terminals plus any child components terminals that carry non blank MFG CAT values extracted from the project s schematic wiring diagrams First you pick from this schematic list and then place the equivalent footprint on ...

Page 1083: ...ween the two Displays a o if the tags match but there is mismatch on Catalog and Manufacturer values between the two Display Specifies to show all or hide the existing compon ents or terminals Show All Hide Existing Shows a full listing of the main catalog numbers plus the multiple catalog entries Each multiple Multiple Catalog catalog entry displays in the list as a line entry al lowing you to in...

Page 1084: ...table that matches the device s MFG code This table is set Use Footprint tables up to insert a full mechanical representation of the device Accesses an alternate table in the footprint look up table This table matches the MFG code but at Use Wiring diagram tables taches an _WD suffix The tables with the _WD suffix are set up to insert a symbol that carries the wire connection attributes Convert Ex...

Page 1085: ...he list Specifies the location for each component or terminal using the Insert dialog box Prompt for each location for component insertion only Specifies the location for all of the components Specify the insertion points Fence Insertion on the drawing and right click The Insert Edit dialog box displays Once you click OK on the Insert Edit dialog box the component inserts on the drawing Specifies ...

Page 1086: ... of schematic wire numbers to panel footprint representations There are two ways that this information can be assigned to the panel footprint MTEXT or attributes If the footprint does not carry certain target attributes then AutoCAD Electrical will generate MTEXT to display the wire connection information Before trying this feature make sure you have added wire numbers to your schematics Once this...

Page 1087: ...panel footprint symbols with this information The information can be added to the drawing in two different ways You can build your panel footprint symbols with some target attributes that are used for the wire connection information Access Click the Panel Configuration tool Click Panel wire connection report XYZ offset reference Setup From the Panel Layout menu select Panel Configuration Click Pan...

Page 1088: ...rts For example T W 1 G is not acceptable because there is only a space between the W and 1 and G parameters Acceptable formats include T W 1 G or T W 1 G or T W 1 G NOTE Commas cannot be used in the format They signal multiple wire connection annotations onto a single wire connection attribute Additional options for the To component tag There are additional options that can be included in the tex...

Page 1089: ...information 1 Click the Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint tool 2 Specify to export the data for the active drawing or the entire project and click OK 3 Select the wire numbering format to use 4 Select the layout devices to update with the schematic wire connection information 5 Click OK 6 If you are exporting the data for the entire project select the drawings to process and click OK Schematic wi...

Page 1090: ...code in the box or click List Drawing or List Project to select from a list of used location codes AutoCAD Electrical automatically creates a comma delimited list for the named location search Replaceable parameters for defining wire annotation Terminal pin text P Terminal pin TERMDESC text Q IEC style installation code I IEC style location code L Mount assignment on panel footprint equivalent M G...

Page 1091: ...mponent tag ID You can use only one of the number para meters 1 Equivalent of 1 P component tag term 2 Equivalent of 1 P D component tag term termdesc 3 Equivalent of L 1 IEC component tag 4 Equivalent of L 1 P tag term 5 Equivalent of L 1 P D tag term termdesc 6 Equivalent of I I 1 INST prefix IEC component tag 7 Equivalent of I L 1 P tag term 8 Equivalent of I L 1 P D tag term termdesc 9 The par...

Page 1092: ...rget attributes are not found and MText is inserted The Partial format is used if the target attributes are found described later Each format uses parameters that are then replaced with the specific wire information AutoCAD Electrical provides some pre defined formats for you to select from the list box at the right or you can enter your own format using replaceable parameters page 126 Parameters ...

Page 1093: ...ine the MText insertion point text size and text style on footprint blocks you can do this by inserting an invisible attribute WXREF on your footprint block library symbol Open up each footprint symbol in AutoCAD and insert a blank attribute definition WXREF Put its origin at the point where you want AutoCAD Electrical to insert the block s MText wire connection information Mark this attribute def...

Page 1094: ... symbols that are full size physical representations of the device There may be times you want to insert a footprint that is not necessarily a physical representation but one that carries wire connection attributes With this type of symbol AutoCAD Electrical can annotate the symbol with schematic wire connection data to create a panel wiring diagram drawing From the Insert Footprint from Schematic...

Page 1095: ...onal assembly code value internal AutoCAD Electrical use only ASSYCODE Footprint block name with partial path or geometry definition BLKNAM Optional short description used for display purposes only DESC Block name vs geometry definition You can encode a simple geometry definition in place of a footprint path block name in the lookup file For example if a footprint shape for a given part number is ...

Page 1096: ... to edit and click Edit Record If you decide to add a new record click Add New 6 Add or edit the record values and click OK The Catalog Number and Footprint block name at a minimum must be filled in to provide a key field for the search and a block or geometry definition for the matching footprint Your new record is added to the list You can also immediately see any changes you made to an existing...

Page 1097: ...log box for creating a blank footprint lookup file This option is available if a Footprint_look up mdb file does not exist in the designated location Create empty file Footprint lookup This tool allows you to examine the records and modify delete or add records Access Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Footprint Database File Editor tool Select the Edit Existing Ta...

Page 1098: ...le button select the table to edit and click OK Click Add New or Edit Record on the Footprint Lookup dialog box From the Panel Layout menu select Footprint Database File Editor Select the Edit Existing Table button select the table to edit and click OK Click Add New or Edit Record on the Footprint Lookup dialog box NOTE The Catalog Number and Footprint block name at a minimum must be filled in to ...

Page 1099: ... in the Catalog Number sec tion of the dialog box Icon Menu Enter the menu name or browse for it Once selec ted click List to see a list of the sub menu pages defined within that icon menu to select from or enter the number of the menu page to display and click OK The menu number corresponding to the catalog number is then saved in the footprint lookup table Comment Specifies the optional comment ...

Page 1100: ...T dialog TIP To build up a multiple balloon let s say of a switch and a nameplate combination insert a balloon with leader on the switch Then insert a balloon without leader on the nameplate Use AutoCAD MOVE command to move the second balloon so that it touches the first Both balloons still remain smart Assign an item number to a component s footprint 1 Click the Insert Balloon tool on the Panel L...

Page 1101: ...mber assignments 5 Click OK Panel balloon setup Sets the type of balloon marker for the footprint marker size margin and text gap Access Click the Panel Configuration tool Click Balloon Setup From the Panel Layout menu select Panel Configuration Click Balloon Setup Specifies the type and size of balloon marker to insert Choose from Circle Ellipse Polygon and None Balloon Circle select either Diame...

Page 1102: ...her under a common item number Access Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous Panel Tools tool to access the Resequence Item Numbers tool From the Panel Layout menu select Miscellaneous Panel Tools Resequence Item Numbers Select the beginning item number to use This processes the drawing or project drawing set and assigns incrementing item numbers for each new part number Any old item number assignme...

Page 1103: ...le nameplate symbols The nameplate attribute definitions P_TAG1 and DESC1 through DESC3 are created and saved as drawing npxxtd3 dwg Another drawing _npxxtd3 dwg is created and the first drawing is inserted as a block at 0 0 A polyline rectangle is positioned around the block and then the drawing is saved Now the panel icon menu file wd_pmenu dat is edited with any text editor ex WordPad and the _...

Page 1104: ...insert a stand alone nameplate simply press Enter without first selecting a component 5 Pick the insertion point and move your cursor to rotate the nameplate to the desired alignment Click the left mouse but ton to end the dynamic insertion 6 Specify the nameplate tag description installation and loca tion codes and catalog data in the Panel Layout Nameplate Insert Edit dialog box AutoCAD Electric...

Page 1105: ... Remove Level Routing Sequencing tool 3 Select the terminal strip component or boundary box to re move the assignments from The leveling assignments are automatically removed 4 Press ESC to exit the command Show sequencing assignments You can select a supplementary terminal strip to display its defined leveling assignments to the command line You can also select two panel footprint symbols to disp...

Page 1106: ...d line You will see something similar to LEV4 LEV1 001 001 001 001 3 Press ESC to exit the command Show footprint sequencing assignments 1 On the Panel Level Sequencing toolbar click the Show Foot print Sequencing Assignments tool 2 Select footprint to show the routing path from 3 Select the device to show the path to The wire connection information for the selected footprints display on the scree...

Page 1107: ...nts that share a common set of Level 1 4 level code assignments This coding when present influences the way that AutoCAD Electrical calculates the wire connection from to sequence As it processes the schematic component representations and wiring it checks for any coding found on the panel footprint and panel terminal strip representations When present it adjusts the from to sequencing accordingly...

Page 1108: ...ence Pick Mode to proceed from component to component Picking is limited to components on the active drawing Removes the component sequence information from all listed components Remove All Saves the sequence assignments and writes them out to the panel footprint representations The data is stored on attribute OK new WDLEV or as extended entity data xdata on the symbol if the target attribute is n...

Page 1109: ...enable or disable the edit box for each level category Applicable only the level assignments are to be copied to panel terminal strip representations and Terminal strips only the terminal strips are referenced on the schematics as well as the panel layout drawing In other words they are not supplementary terminal strips that are only represented on the panel layout drawings Select this option and ...

Page 1110: ... information over large control system equipment Access On the Panel Level Sequencing toolbar click the Insert Terminal Strip Repres entation tool Click Panel Layout Panel Level Sequencing Insert Terminal Strip Repres entation Inserts a terminal strip with just the component s tag description text and so on Use generic marker only Draws a rectangle circle or octagon to represent the terminal strip...

Page 1111: ...d directly on the schematics using the Define Wire Sequence command override this Panel level sequencing assignment mechanism Access On the Panel Level Sequencing toolbar click the Insert Edit Panel Level Assign ment tool Select an existing panel terminal strip representation Click Panel Layout Panel Level Sequencing Insert Edit Panel Level Assign ment Select an existing panel terminal strip repre...

Page 1112: ...3 digit values and match up with level codes of panel layout footprints whose wiring is to pass through the terminal strip Multiple code entries are comma separated If codes are not defined in the edit boxes the drawing wide default values displayed in the left hand column of uneditable edit boxes are used if defined Level code location Controls whether the Level 1 edit box displays the 3 digit le...

Page 1113: ...y terminal strip When no match is found the from to calculation through the terminal strip is done in a normal fashion Connection left right Two character code that controls whether the Level 1 assignments show Panel Terminal Strip Report connection information on the internal or external side of the terminal block The first character represents the left side of the terminal strip and the second c...

Page 1114: ...de the terminal strip s allowed range bypass it A blank value in both maximum and minimum edit boxes indicates that this check is not performed A connected wire s size is extracted from the wire line s layer name AutoCAD Electrical simply parses the wire s layer name for the first numeric value found within the name For example a wire layer name based on metric wire sizes of WHITE 2 5MM 2 yields a...

Page 1115: ...tiple valid terminal strip paths that match up with the level code combination of a given from to inter connection the path chosen is influenced by this priority setting Level code edit boundary box Use this tool to view or edit 3 digit level codes for boundary boxes Devices placed within the boundary box take on the boundary s level codes The dialog box lists the number of device footprints found...

Page 1116: ... on the drawing to copy the level codes from Pick Insert edit panel level assignment component Use this tool to view assign or edit 3 digit level codes and 4 digit sequence codes on panel footprint components This coding when present can influence the way that AutoCAD Electrical calculates the wire connection from to sequence As it processes the schematic component representations and wiring it ch...

Page 1117: ...plit section enter 004 for level category 2 for example cubical 002 for level category 3 for example unit and 001 for level category 4 for example highest category shipping section With these defaults in place only the lowest level category 1 needs to be assigned on an individual panel terminal strip basis Level 4 Level 3 Level 2 Level 1 Shows the level code assigned to each of the four level cate...

Page 1118: ...utomatically be included in the from to calculations between this edited component and other connected components identified in other level assignment combinations switch all four bypass options on Sequence on Level 1 Influences the wire connection sequencing of the schematic components whose physical footprints share the same combination of four level category assignments The sequence assignment ...

Page 1119: ...ected either from the list or the active drawing the report displays in the Report Generator dialog box In the Report Generator dialog box click Insert as Terminal Strip to define a graphical representation of the terminal strip for placement on the active drawing file Panel terminal strip graphical report parameters Access On the Panel Level Sequencing toolbar click the Panel Terminal Strip Repor...

Page 1120: ...n and off by pressing CTRL H or SHIFT CTRL A Specifies the orientation for the terminal strip vertical left to right or right to left Orientation Each format uses parameters that are then replaced with the specific wire connection information AutoCAD Electrical Wire connection format provides a predefined default format for you to select from the button You can also enter your own format using the...

Page 1121: ...ConduitTools In this chapter Overview of conduit tools Overview of conduit marker support files Generate a conduit marker report Generate a conduit routing report 16 1109 ...

Page 1122: ...TE To use any of the conduit related utilities you will need to turn on the Conduit toolbar by selecting View Toolbars Select Electrical as the menu group and click the ACE Conduit Marker checkbox The conduit marker is a block inserted to add intelligence to a line or pline representing a conduit on a layout drawing There are 4 blocks called WWAYT WWAYB WWAYL and WWAYR The blocks are identical exc...

Page 1123: ...he Insert or Edit Con duit WirewayLabel dialog box The conduit marker symbol will carry wire information intel ligence pulled from the AutoCAD Electrical drawings 8 Click OK Use the Conduit Marker From To List tool 1 Click the Conduit Marker From To List tool on the Conduit Marker toolbar 2 Select the line that represents the conduit for the marker on the drawing 3 Click points to define the leade...

Page 1124: ...y Label dialog box 4 Click OK Insert or edit conduit wire way label There are two ways to insert a conduit marker depending on where you want to pick the wire information from You can get the wire information from an actual device on your drawing represented by either a schematic symbol or a panel layout footprint symbol You may also pull the wire information out of a wire from to report based on ...

Page 1125: ...tage full for each conduit size available To do this AutoCAD Electrical needs 2 support files page 1116 containing wire size information and conduit size information If there isn t a WW1 file or if the wire sizes aren t in the file the calculations are not made Catalog Area Assign catalog information to the conduit that will be extracted into a bill of materials report You can do a drawing wide or...

Page 1126: ...log list External file You can pull catalog assignments from a generic ASCII file created by a word processor or output from a spread sheet or database program A dialog box displays the contents of the selected text file Find and highlight the desired entry AutoCAD Electrical reads the line of text from the file and breaks it into its component parts These are displayed in the left hand dialog lis...

Page 1127: ... marker report Conduit marker setup The conduit marker is a block inserted to add intelligence to a line or pline representing a conduit on a layout drawing There are 4 blocks called WWAYT WWAYB WWAYL and WWAYR The blocks are identical except for the insert point T top B bottom L left R right The program will pick which block based on the leader drawn Access Click the Conduit Marker Pick tool on t...

Page 1128: ...r by selecting the or buttons Count If you type the quantity you may need to select this button to see the new quantity in the list Update Quantity Overview of conduit marker support files AutoCAD Electrical has a couple of support files containing wire size information and conduit size information the wdw file and the ww1 file These files are simple text files that can be edited with any text edi...

Page 1129: ...ectory as your project file WDP If you want to use the same file for all projects then create or modify the DEFAULT WW1 file in the USER folder in the Project Manager right click the project name and select Settings to find the full path There should be a separate line in the file for each conduit Each line has two fields The first field is the conduit size that will be shown in the Conduit Marker...

Page 1130: ...t is being run across the projector selected markers 5 In the Report Generator dialog box make any changes to the report format You can specify to add the time and date title line project lines column labels page numbers and blank spaces between report entities 6 Optional Click Edit Mode to edit the report 7 If the report is formatted correctly specify to print the report put it on the drawing or ...

Page 1131: ... toolbar click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to access the Conduit Marker Report tool From the Panel Layout menu click Conduit Marker Tools Conduit Marker Report Decide if you want to run the report across selected drawings from the project the active drawing or just selected conduit markers Generate a conduit marker report 1119 ...

Page 1132: ... Select the drawings or conduit markers to process depending on whether the report is being run across the projector selected markers 6 In the Report Generator dialog box make any changes to the report format You can specify to add the time and date title line project lines column labels page numbers and blank spaces between report entities 7 Optional Click Edit Mode to edit the report 8 If the re...

Page 1133: ...Conduit Marker toolbar click the arrow on the Conduit Reports tool to access the Wire Conduit Routing Report tool From the Panel Layout menu select Conduit Marker Tools Wire Conduit Routing Report Decide if you want to run the report across selected drawings from the project the active drawing or just selected conduit markers Generate a conduit routing report 1121 ...

Page 1134: ...1122 ...

Page 1135: ...In this chapter Convert promis e drawing files toAutoCAD Electrical Convert non AutoCAD Electrical blocks Convert text to an attribute Convert Arrows Overview of ECDS legacy conversion Tagging and Linking Tools 17 1123 ...

Page 1136: ... WD_M block if it does not exist in the drawing Searches for Installation Location drawing wide defaults Searches for blocks cross reference tables and field boxes Extracts a list of cross reference symbols Processes cable marker symbols PLC modules line entities wire connection point cross reference tables and block inserts Copies footprint P_TAG1 values to the associated nameplate Renames termin...

Page 1137: ...he installation codes to convert Optional Make any changes to project installation and drawing naming Optional Make any changes to the conversion setup or symbol lib raries Make sure the specified symbol library path contains the wd_m dwg block necessary for the conversion Enter the AutoCAD Electrical project path into the text box Click OK NOTE If the project file already exists and is marked act...

Page 1138: ...ject folders and files to adhere to the names defined in side of promis e The drawing files are found in the promis e structure Convert promis e project This defines the conversion process from promis e to AutoCAD Electrical Once you click OK this creates AutoCAD Electrical project definition file and folders and then copies the drawing files into the new folders NOTE You cannot see the command wi...

Page 1139: ...s pre and post processing script files to run against the entire project and the AutoCAD Electrical Conversion Setup support files to use Default_wdtitle wdl and De fault wdt After you select the desired support file it is renamed and placed in the same folder as the new project definition file WDP You also have the option to save the command line error message to a log file Opens the Project Prop...

Page 1140: ... assign text attribute values to AutoCAD Electrical attribute names and click Done If your non AutoCAD Electrical block has attributes or you picked some text entities the dialog box includes buttons to make it easier to assign your values to AutoCAD Electrical at tributes Finish mapping values from non AutoCAD Electrical blocks This allows you to continue what you started with the Convert to Sche...

Page 1141: ...alid attribute fields to fill in NOTE Your options may differ depending on how you accessed the dialog box available only if you select non AutoCAD Electrical elements Lists the available text values to assign to Text value the attributes All AutoCAD Electrical attributes for the block inserted are displayed in the Text Value list if there is a block to map with existing attribute values available...

Page 1142: ...icked text with the new AutoCAD Electrical attribute To leave the selected text as is then make sure you turn this option off Delete picked text objects Defines an area of the drawing to fill the graphics window Click to define the graphics window the Zoom window image is then zoomed to the area that you defined in the window Zooms the selected block to the size of the graphics window Zoom extents...

Page 1143: ...ttribute definition Converts a text object that is not associated to a block into an attribute definition You can convert an attribute definition on a library symbol that becomes an attribute when the symbol drawing is inserted as a block into another drawing For example if you convert the text 120 VOLTS AC to an attribute definition with a tag name of RATING1 the original text becomes the attribu...

Page 1144: ...ctrical source arrow with a smart AutoCAD Electrical source arrow and map the information to the new AutoCAD Electrical source Use the Convert Block to Destination Arrow tool to replace a non AutoCAD Electrical destination arrow with a smart AutoCAD Electrical destination arrow 1132 Chapter 17 Conversion Tools ...

Page 1145: ...that you might want to map to the new AutoCAD Electrical destination 3 Select the wire end for the destination arrow 4 Define the Destination Signal Code and click OK 5 Define attribute values Overview of ECDS legacy conversion For this conversion to be effective AutoCAD Electrical must have information to intelligently swap AutoCAD Electrical type blocks with the blocks used on your ECDS drawings...

Page 1146: ...ttribute for example DESCRIPTION you can map these to separate AutoCAD Electrical attributes such as DESC1 DESC2 DESC3 The in the AutoCAD Electrical Attribute field indicates that each time a DESCRIPTION attribute is found within a block the AutoCAD Electrical attribute name should be incremented by 1 starting with 1 IOATTRMAP table The IOATTRMAP table is the same as the ATTRMAP table but is used ...

Page 1147: ...u are adding the drawings to an existing AutoCAD Electrical project make sure you select that option otherwise the WDP project file are overwrit ten The ECDS drawings are copied to another loca tion before they are converted A default location for the converted drawings are supplied but you can enter any location If the directory does not exist AutoCAD Electrical creates it Specifies the path to t...

Page 1148: ...creates three subdirectories called Converted Symbol1 Converted Symbol2 and Converted Symbol3 Drawing Options Your drawings are copied to another directory and converted the original drawings are not changed Specifies the path for the converted drawings If the directory does not exist it is created Copy Directory Sets up the drawing defaults that are used for each drawing The defaults are read fro...

Page 1149: ... block file The TAG attribute takes on the value of the converted text The TAG attribute is set to fixed The color of the TAG attribute is by layer The attribute is the same layer as defined on the WD_M block The TAG attribute takes on the same ACAD properties as the tagged text Linking results The selected text entities are replaced with an AutoCAD Electrical attribute Colors change to visually d...

Page 1150: ... first The block definition is automatically modified The geometry s color changes by layer to visually distinguish what has been already converted as defined in the WD_M block Tag and link components You can do multiple tagging and linkages without exiting the commands NOTE This procedure uses schematic components but the same procedure can be done using panel components 1138 Chapter 17 Conversio...

Page 1151: ...rrent wire layer highlights in gray 5 Click Pick and select wire lines from the drawing to add to a wire layer 6 Click OK Tag components 1 On the Conversion toolbar click the arrow on the Tag Schematic tool to access any of the schematic tagging com mands 2 Select the text entity to replace with the component TAG1 template block file The selected text string highlights indicating what has been sel...

Page 1152: ... times before exiting Add geometry and wire connections 1 On the Conversion toolbar click the arrow on the Link Schematic tool to access the Add Wire Connections tool 2 Select the block to tie the wire connections to 3 Select the end point of the wire or a position on a symbol Press Shift right click and select End Point from the menu to easily select the end point 4 After you define the wire conn...

Page 1153: ...s You can take advantage of the tagging tools to modify the text entities to attributes and the linking tools to make various blocks NOTE Use AutoCAD Explode to convert Mtext to normal text for tagging and linking Access On the Conversion toolbar click the Special Explode tool Click Projects Conversion Tools Special Explode Select the block to explode into separate text entities and geometry Tag s...

Page 1154: ...he draw ing properties contains attributes for a schematic component Makes selected text entities an attributed PLC address associated to a PLC tag The template Tag PLC block file PLCIO_ADDR_CONVERT DWG PLCIO_CONVERT DWG PLCIO_V_ADDR_CON VERT DWG or PLCIO_V_CONVERT DWG depend ing on the drawing properties contains attrib utes found useful for PLC addressing After the addressing is defined on the b...

Page 1155: ...IP and TERM01 attrib Tag Schematic Terminal Terminal Number ute visible The template block file HT0T_CON VERT DWG or VT0T_CONVERT DWG depending on the drawing properties contains attributes used for a terminal block component containing a terminal number Makes the selected text entities an attributed block file with the TAGSTRIP and WIRENO attrib Tag Schematic Terminal Wire Number ute visible The ...

Page 1156: ...ing commands from the list Click any of the linking tools Select the existing tagged TAG1 block definition and right click to apply the selection Select the text to link to the tagged attribute The selected text properties are applied to the new attribute Right click to create the link Links simple text as Description 1 3 attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file You can link Link Description...

Page 1157: ...and replaced with the Location attribute Links simple text as Installation attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical block file The entity value is Link Installation Code used as the Installation value for one or more template block definitions If only one template block is selected for the link the text entity is removed and replaced with the Installation attrib ute Links simple text as manufacturer at...

Page 1158: ...se these tools to convert text entities into an attributed block file Through the insertion of a template block you have control over which attributes are inserted and visible All necessary attribute definitions are automatically placed During the tagging process the text entity is removed and replaced with a template block file that contains multiple attributes used in AutoCAD Electrical Access O...

Page 1159: ...e template block file ACE_TERMW_CON VERT DWG contains attributes for panel terminal symbols Link panel Use these tools to associate nonblocked text to previously placed template blocks Through the modification of a template block you have control over which attributes are inserted and visible All necessary attribute definitions are placed using the properties of the existing text entities such as ...

Page 1160: ...plit tag while the linked portion becomes the Part2 of the split tag Links simple text as an Item Number attribute on an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file During Link Item Number the conversion process the text entity is removed and replaced with the Item Number attribute P_ITEM Links simple text as Location attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file The entity Link Location Code value...

Page 1161: ...ting 1 12 attributes on an AutoCAD Electrical Panel block file The entity Link Rating value is used as the rating value for one or more template block definitions If only one template block is selected for the link the text entity is removed and replaced with the rating attribute up to 12 Links simple text that is not an attribute defini tion or part of geometry as User 01 99 attrib Link User utes...

Page 1162: ... the appropriate wire connection attributes to A new block definition is created with the newly added wire connections You can subsequently create a new block file if the block is exploded Access On the Conversion toolbar click the arrow on the Link Schematic or Link Panel tool to access the Add Wire Connections tool From the Projects menu select Conversion Tools Link Schematic or Link Panel Add W...

Page 1163: ...Click Projects Conversion Tools Link Schematic or Link Panel Un Link Select the link to remove the link between the attributes and the block it is associated to is removed Overview of block attribute mapping You can perform drawing wide or project wide block replacements using a user defined Microsoft Excel spreadsheet and an AutoCAD Electrical aware symbol library that it references The spreadshe...

Page 1164: ...old name to a new name swap Attribute mapping sheet format Attribute tag found on the legacy non AutoCAD Electrical block insert Wildcards and AutoLisp style punctuation for wildcards are supported Column A Old Attribute Name Attribute tag name found on the AutoCAD Electrical block insert Wildcards and AutoLisp style punctu ation for wildcards are supported Column B AcadE Attribute Name Block name...

Page 1165: ...e overrides in sheet 1 Multiple entries in this field are supported with this syntax Old1 New1 Old2 New2 Defines specific attribute values to insert into the newly swapped attributes Multiple entries in this Column G Attribute Value Overrides field are supported with this syntax New1 val1 New2 val2 An entry of New1 blanks out that attribute value The block replacement process generates a log file ...

Page 1166: ... the option to create the spreadsheet framework for the block attribute mapping If a spreadsheet was not found on the Spreadsheet Not Found dialog box click OK to run through the active project s drawing set and fill in a blank spreadsheet with extracted block names and attributes Only the first column of each of the sheets are filled in You can then add the block attribute mapping inform ation an...

Page 1167: ...Select to run the block replacement on the entire project the active drawing or a single symbol on the active drawing Overview of block attribute mapping 1155 ...

Page 1168: ...1156 ...

Page 1169: ...MiscellaneousTools In this chapter Overview of power check tools Overview of pneumatic tools Insert hydraulic components Insert P ID components Troubleshooting Tools 18 1157 ...

Page 1170: ...rks a component with a PASSPWR flag The PASSPWR flag instructs the Power Report to pass Set Pass Power through the marked component when calculating the load on a given source If a component carries the PASSPWR flag the Power Report program will pass through the component and continue looking for load values on the network Looks for any components assigned as a power source and then follows any wi...

Page 1171: ...Access On the Power Check toolbar click the Add Edit Power Source Load Levels tool Click Wires Wire Number Miscellaneous Power Check Add Edit Power Source Load Levels Select the component for the power source or load value The value is added to an AutoCAD Electrical connection attribute This dialog box contains a list of available connection points If you select near the connection point for the p...

Page 1172: ...OTE Certain components don t need a PASSPWR flag such as terminals and contacts since they are automatically passed through Access On the Power Check toolbar click the Mark Component To Pass Power tool Click Wires Wire Number Miscellaneous Power Check Mark Com ponent To Pass Power Each selected component is displayed in the list If the component already carries the PASSPWR flag a appears next to t...

Page 1173: ...rogram Files x86 Autodesk Acade version Libs pneu_iso125 Recommended Settings for drawing pneumatic diagrams Where this can be set Value Setting Drawing Properties Drawing Format Horizontal Ladder Orientation Insert component This icon menu can be modified expanded or replaced with your own custom menu You can change the default icon menu using the Library and Icon Menu Paths section of the Projec...

Page 1174: ...ay for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window The current view option is indicated with a check mark Options include Icon with text Icon only or List view The tree structure is created by reading the icon menu file dat The tree structre is based on the arrangement order of submenus defined in the dat file Menu Displays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the menu or the subme...

Page 1175: ...t assigning a unique Component Tag The untagged value that displays is the com No tag ponent s TAG1 TAG2 default value To add component detail later click the Edit Component tool and select the component to edit Indicates to display the previously used menu each time you open the Insert Component dialog box For example if you insert a Always display previously used menu push button from the Push B...

Page 1176: ...ing options View Changes the view display for the Symbol Preview window and Recently Used window The current view option is indicated with a check mark Options include Icon with text Icon only or List view Properties available for icons only Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name image block names and so on Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change an...

Page 1177: ...Insert P ID Component Overview of pneumatic tools 1165 ...

Page 1178: ... tag The untagged value that displays is the component s TAG1 TAG2 default value 5 Select the component to insert such as Filters Centrifugal from the Symbol Preview window The Recently Used column displays components inserted during the current editing session You can also select the component to insert from this list 6 Specify the insertion point in the drawing The orientation of the symbol trie...

Page 1179: ...ct Manager Right click the project name and select Properties Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu The default icon menu can also be redefined in wd env Add entry WD_MENU for schematic icon menu and WD_PMENU for panel layout icon menu Access Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool Click Components Insert Component or Components Multiple Insert Multiple I...

Page 1180: ...ays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure Symbol Preview window Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined by the dat file Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing Executes a command Displays a submenu NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon the icon name and block...

Page 1181: ...ponent dialog box For example if you insert a Always display previously used menu push button from the Push Buttons menu the next time you open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default Specifies the component block insertion scale This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties Drawing Format dialog Scale schematic box Once set this value is remembered unti...

Page 1182: ...dow and Recently Used window The current view option is indicated with a check mark Options include Icon with text Icon only or List view Properties available for icons only Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name image block names and so on Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties Pneumatic Hydraulic and P ID icon menus The Menu t...

Page 1183: ...Tag select No tag The untagged value that displays is the component s TAG1 TAG2 default value 5 Select the component to insert from the Symbol Preview win dow The Recently Used column displays components inserted during the current editing session You can also select the component to insert from this list 6 Specify the insertion point in the drawing The orientation of the symbol tries to match the...

Page 1184: ...Manager Right click the project name and select Properties Use the Icon Menu Wizard to easily modify the menu The default icon menu can also be redefined in wd env Add entry WD_MENU for schematic icon menu and WD_PMENU for panel layout icon menu Access Click the Insert Component tool or the Multiple Insert Component tool Click Components Insert Component or Components Multiple Insert Multiple Inse...

Page 1185: ...isplays the symbol and submenu icons corresponding to the menu or the submenu selected in the Menu tree structure Symbol Preview window Clicking on the icon performs one of the following functions based on the icon properties as defined by the dat file Inserts the symbol or circuit onto the drawing Executes a command Displays a submenu NOTE When you move the cursor over an icon the icon name and b...

Page 1186: ...nent dialog box For example if you insert a Always display previously used menu push button from the Push Buttons menu the next time you open the Insert Component dialog box the Push Button menu displays by default Specifies the component block insertion scale This defaults to the value set in the Drawing Properties Drawing Format dialog Scale schematic box Once set this value is remembered until ...

Page 1187: ... window and Recently Used window The current view option is indicated with a check mark Options include Icon with text Icon only or List view Properties available for icons only Opens a Properties dialog box to view the existing symbol icon properties like the icon name image block names and so on Use the Icon Menu Wizard to change any icon properties Pneumatic Hydraulic and P ID icon menus The Me...

Page 1188: ...rnings The real time warning is saved in the log file named project_name _error log and is saved in the User subdirectory If a log file already exists the new content is added to the same file A blank line separates one error record from another About the wdn file The wdn file is a text file used specifically for auditing terminals Terminal numbers listed in the wdn file are not checked for duplic...

Page 1189: ... your project If no errors were found the Details button is not enabled 4 Click on an audit record in the dialog box and click Go To or double click the audit record Once you browse to an error location an x appears in the audit dialog box 5 Fix the error using any of the AutoCAD Electrical editing tools After correcting the error you can select another audit record in the dialog box for correctio...

Page 1190: ...ting your project s scratch database file you may want to turn on the Debug Trace This can help track down the problem Select one of the following commands Select Projects Extras Command Trace Mode MDB Command Trace On To turn the tracing off select Projects Extras Command Trace Mode MDB Command Trace Off Select Projects Extras Command Trace Mode Command Trace On To turn the tracing off select Pro...

Page 1191: ...ation arrow symbols 1 Click the arrow on the Insert Wire tool to access the Check Repair Gap Pointers tool 2 Click the Check Repair Gap Pointers tool 3 Select each wire segment as directed Gap data is added as needed The result of the check repair is shown in the command prompt area Check trace a wire Overview of real time error checking 1179 ...

Page 1192: ... menu 2 Select whether to process the active drawing or the entire project and click OK 3 Indicate which areas to check for errors You can look for problems related to missing wires which were connected through gap pointers clean up wires pointing to nonexistent wire numbers erase wire numbers that are not linked to a wire network and draw a red outline around each wire entity 4 Click OK The Drawi...

Page 1193: ...Displays the duplicated cable and wire id for the active project The report lists the duplicated cable tags or cable Cable Exception tags with duplicated wire id error message reference of the cable tag and the drawing where the error occurs Displays components with no bill of material part assign ments The report lists the component reference designa Component No Catalog Number tion tag reference...

Page 1194: ...e drawing where the error occurs Displays any children without a parent schematic compon ent The report lists the component reference designation Contacts tag for the child without a parent reference of the child component tag error message and the drawing where the error occurs Displays the recovery tip so that you can fix the error Recovery Tip Goes to the error location within the project and c...

Page 1195: ...lected to audit the project select the drawings in the active project to audit and click OK Looks for problems related to missing wires which were connected via gap pointers Also see Wires Wire Num bers Miscellaneous Check Repair Gap Pointers Wire gap pointers Looks for and cleans up wires pointing to nonexistent wire numbers this is the opposite of wire number floaters Also looks for bad color ga...

Page 1196: ...value will be shown in the edit boxes allowing you to edit them 4 Edit the name and value as desired Once you click out of the edit box the name or value will be updated in the list 5 Click Save Changes to update the selected block or attribute with the Xdata changes Add invisible data to an attribute 1 Select Projects Extras Xdata Editor 2 Select an attribute in the drawing If the selected block ...

Page 1197: ...ribute carries any Xdata already the names and values will be displayed in the list box at the top of the dialog Specifies the Xdata name To edit the name click on it in the list The existing name is shown in the edit boxes allowing you to Name edit it Once you click out of the edit box the name is updated in the list Specifies the Xdata value To edit the value click on it in the list The existing...

Page 1198: ...1186 ...

Page 1199: ...nts Set upAutoCAD Electrical for multiple users Show source and destination markers on cable wires Use the PLC Database File Editor Add your own symbols circuits and commands to the icon menu Build your own symbols Configure projects for various drawing standards Use AutodeskVault with AutoCAD Electrical 19 1187 ...

Page 1200: ...nt schematic symbol without the wire connection points It includes 2 extra attributes bey ond what a normal parent symbol carries WDTAGALT carries a copy of the schematic symbol s TAG1 value WDTYPE an invisible attribute with a nonblank value indicating the drawing discipline Example PID or IN or PNEU or HYD The schematic parent solenoid symbol includes just one extra attribute WDTAGALT carries a ...

Page 1201: ...rt Edit Component dialog box click Tags Used Schematic 13 Select Show all components for all families The tag values from the other symbol are displayed in the list 14 Select the valve representation in this case FE100 with a family code of IN for instrument 15 Click Copy Tag 16 On the Copy Tag dialog box click WDTAGALT 17 On the Insert Edit Component dialog box click Show Edit Miscellaneous 18 Ve...

Page 1202: ...in this database table then the associated contact count and pin number information is retrieved and placed on the parent schematic component Any device can have pins assigned to it but common components that carry pin assignments are relays motor starters and connectors Pins are used for Error checking Accurate connection information Providing correct connections You can expand the Pin List datab...

Page 1203: ...ith each value separated by commas These values are applied to the TERM01 and TERM02 attributes respectively on the parent symbol If you set COILPINS K1 K2 then pins K1 K2 are assigned to the parent symbol of a component In the example below TERM01 K1 and TERM02 K2 Setting up COILPINS for two wired devices The automatic pin list look up and assignment at component insertion time is not limited to ...

Page 1204: ...as another pin number To view or manually edit the PINLIST values select Edit Component and then click NO NC Setup on the Insert Edit Component dialog box Setting up PEER_COILPINS and PEER_PINLIST The PEER_ fields in the Pin List database specify pin list assignments for a single part number with two parent devices You set up the second coil s coil pins and pin list data in the PEER_COILPINS and P...

Page 1205: ...ectrical as long as they are placed in the AutoCAD Electrical defined path such as in the project s subdirectory the path given by the AutoCAD Electrical environment variable or AutoCAD search paths NOTE We recommend that you create a backup of your information in another location and remove the shared data from your local drive to ensure the data is being located correctly Shared files The follow...

Page 1206: ...es x86 Autodesk Acade version Libs NOTE The symbol library path is stored with each project in its wdp file and must be modified ACE_AS_MENU DAT ACE_GB_MENU DAT ACE_HYD_MENU DAT ACE_IEC_MENU DAT AutoCAD Electrical icon menu In sert Component menus ACE_JIC_MENU DAT ACE_JIS_MENU DAT ACE_PAN EL_MENU DAT ACE_PID_MENU DAT ACE_PNEU_MENU DAT WD_ABECAD DAT C Documents and Settings username Application Dat...

Page 1207: ...ese files must be in a location that is specified as an AutoCAD Support path They can be placed in a location that is already defined as being a support path or you can add a new support path pointing to this location wd_desc wdd Description selections C Documents and Settings username Application Data Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical release country code Support NOTE These files must be in a location ...

Page 1208: ...bol libraries part footprint files and support files to a shared network location so all users can work from a common standard database and simplifying database management and configuration To start network deployment select Network Deployment in the AutoCAD Electrical installation program Install the Network Installation Wizard NIW and run it from the start menu From the NIW you can create an ima...

Page 1209: ...u want to go back to AutoCAD Electrical s default menu select Default Electrical menu on your own special menu AutoCAD Electrical immediately switches back to the AutoCAD Electrical default icon menus Show source and destination markers on cable wires There may be times when you want to show the individual wires of a cable at each end where they connect and yet you want to show the wires coming to...

Page 1210: ...r of _MULTI_WIRE to red and the color of WIRES to blue for this example The color difference illustrates how the feature works 7 In the Layer Properties Manager dialog box click OK Inserting components 1 Click the Insert Component tool 2 In the Insert Component JIC Schematic Symbols dialog box select Push Buttons 3 In the JIC Push Buttons dialog box select Push Button N O 4 Press F9 to turn SNAP o...

Page 1211: ...o insert 3 Limit Switches N O Insert the limit switches anywhere on the right hand side of the drawing slightly below the push buttons you just inserted 8 Show source and destination markers on cable wires 1199 ...

Page 1212: ...rag the wire to the right 3 Repeat for the other two push buttons 4 Add a wire to each of the limit switches Drag the wires to the left 5 Press F9 to turn SNAP off 6 Select all of the wires and verify that they were created on the WIRES layer 1200 Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity ...

Page 1213: ... AutoCAD Electrical reports use this information in the Wire Color field 7 Click OK 8 In the Source Destination Signal markers for Fan In Out dialog box click Yes to insert the matching destination marker now NOTE Since the destination wires are nearby it s easier to insert them right away If the wires were on another drawing you could wait until later to add the destination markers 9 In the Fan I...

Page 1214: ... and bottom wires for each group For the middle wire In the Signal Source Code dialog box click Use to enter CBLA 01 as the code and enter BLUE as the description For the bottom wire In the Signal Source Code dialog box click Use to enter CBLA 02 as the code and enter WHT as the description Notice that the wires change from blue to red and the descrip tions BLUE and WHT display on both sets of wir...

Page 1215: ...es connected to the push buttons Continue dragging past the push buttons and click 3 Drag your cursor to the right to create a horizontal line and click 4 Drag down across the ends of the wires connected to the limit switches ending on the bottom wire and click Press Enter to create the lines Show source and destination markers on cable wires 1203 ...

Page 1216: ...nd 6 Click the wire connected to the top limit switch 7 Click each of the lines you just created The lines change from black to red since they are taking on the properties of the wire you selected 8 Press Enter to exit the command 1204 Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity ...

Page 1217: ...og box select the 3 conductor second item in list and click OK 6 In the Insert Edit Cable Marker Parent wire dialog box delete the wire color id value BLK and click OK 7 In the Insert Some Child Components dialog box click Close Use the PLC Database File Editor AutoCAD Electrical can generate any of hundreds of different PLC I O modules on demand in a variety of different graphical styles all with...

Page 1218: ...t insertion time This is all possible because AutoCAD Electrical generates PLC I O modules via a parametric generation technique driven by a PLC database ACE_PLC MDB 1206 Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity ...

Page 1219: ...Module dialog box specify the following Manufacturer Allen Bradley Series 1746 Series Type Discrete Input Code Catalog Number 1746 IA9 Terminals 9 Addressable Points 8 5 Click OK You now have a new blank input module with 9 terminals and 8 addressable I O points You now need to define some information for each terminal in the module the most import ant being what symbols AutoCAD Electrical should ...

Page 1220: ...inals for both input and output or it may not have a wire connection 3 Select to use Module Info Input I O Point Wire Left by selecting the picture and then click OK The selected terminal is assigned to the Terminal Type in the PLC Database File Editor dialog box AutoCAD Electrical looks at the block to see what attributes come in when the block is inserted Some of the attributes come in with pred...

Page 1221: ...K As an alternative to the Select Terminal Information dialog box you can use the drop down list of predetermined Terminal Types Click the arrow for the Terminal Type and select from the list of available terminal types Setting additional terminal information Some modules may have terminals that are not used When you build your PLC module on an AutoCAD Electrical drawing there is a choice inside t...

Page 1222: ...D Electrical sees this spacing factor value on any terminal type I O point or wire connection entry line it uses a factor of the rung spacing For example a 2 for a given entry inserts this point down 2 times the rung spacing instead of a full rung spacing A value of 1 5 inserts the point down an extra half rung spacing than normal A value of 0 0 puts the particular I O point at the same location a...

Page 1223: ...tabase File Editor You can add a terminal to the list by clicking in any box in the last entry of the list A blank entry line is added to the bottom of the list You must define the block name assign it to a terminal category for selection give it a description and assign a bitmap to be used for dialog displays The list displays the block name category unique description and sample bitmap file for ...

Page 1224: ...ion of the PLC Parametric Selection process These bitmap images are displayed during normal operation and selection of PLC entries and are found at C Program Files Autodesk Acade version Acade Use the same file names that are already there P_STYLEx bmp where x is the plc style 1 9 3 Click View DWG or View Bitmap to view the PLC parametric symbols 4 After you are done viewing the various symbols cl...

Page 1225: ...tly encode the rack and group numbers 1 and 2 prompts into each I O address value encode each I O address entry in the date file with TAGA_ 1 2 N 3 If you want to assign a text constant to any attribute value combine a text constant with the variables as shown in the module prompts and addressing examples above Inserting the PLC module into the drawing 1 Click Save Module to save the module to the...

Page 1226: ...iven by a text file AutoCAD Electrical defaults to icon menu ACE_ standard _MENU DAT where standard JIC IEC GB HYD JIS PID or PNEU for schematic symbols and ACE_PANEL_MENU DAT for panel symbols These menu files are found in the C Documents and Settings username Application Data Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical release country code Support subdirectory 1214 Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity ...

Page 1227: ...ect the function to be performed when the icon is selected from the icon menu Add component Inserts a symbol Add circuit Inserts a prebuilt circuit This causes AutoCAD Electrical to insert and explode the dwg name supplied Add new submenu Starts a new submenu Add command Performs a command Use Command for inserting three phase schematic symbols and panel footprints Add your own symbols circuits an...

Page 1228: ...and required attributes page 177 2 Click the arrow on the Miscellaneous tool to access the Icon Menu Wizard tool 3 Click the Icon Menu Wizard tool 4 In the Select Menu File dialog box select to modify the schematic menu file and click OK 5 In the Icon Menu Wizard dialog box select Add Compon ent to add a new icon to the menu NOTE You can also right click in empty space and select Add icon Componen...

Page 1229: ... from current screen image The Icon Menu Wizard runs the AutoCAD MSLIDE command on your current screen image to create the png and sld file If the file does not exist then Create PNG from the current screen image is selected by default If you do not want to create the image from the current drawing s displayed image switch it off If you want to redo an existing image click this switch on 7 Specify...

Page 1230: ...tion that will be performed when the icon is selected from the icon menu Three pieces of information are needed to trigger the new menu page 2 On the Create New Submenu dialog box specify the image file name and sld or png graphic to appear in the icon button The image name can be manually typed into the edit box You can browse to an existing sld or png file to assign to the icon use an image file...

Page 1231: ...ou to build the appropriate command to insert a multipole symbol or a panel symbol To see the command line parameters for a specific AutoCAD Electrical command select the command in the list and the parameters display at the right If quotation marks are shown then enclose the parameter value within quotation marks NOTE If you select an API command that requires parameters you must manually enter t...

Page 1232: ...ge name can be manually typed into the edit box You can browse to an existing sld or png file to assign to the icon use an image file that matches the active drawing name use an image file that matches a picked block on the drawing or use an image file with the same name as the block name entered for the block name NOTE Browse cannot be used if you are using a slide library instead of individual s...

Page 1233: ... file to assign to the icon use an image file that matches the active drawing name use an image file that matches a picked block on the drawing or use an image file with the same name as the block name entered for the block name If you have not created the png image and want to have it created automatically from the current screen image select Create PNG from current screen image The Icon Menu Wiz...

Page 1234: ..._JIC_MENU DAT and your own my_menu dat 1 Copy the standard menu into a new file name instead of creating the file from scratch Open the new DAT file with a text editor and remove everything except for the top portion of the file shown below M0 INSERT COMPONENT JIC SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS Rename the title line to indicate that this is your very own personal menu file 2 Add a line similar to the following...

Page 1235: ...ilds a smart schematic symbol by either adding AutoCAD Electrical attributes to the symbol s geometry or by converting text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes You can also use AutoCAD attribute definition and editing commands to do the same thing This tool makes the task easier by letting you quickly pick and place attributes It tracks what attributes are present and checks your work to mak...

Page 1236: ...6 Draw a rectangle on the drawing Add attributes to symbol 1 In the Symbol Builder Schematic Parent or Stand alone symbol dialog box click Standard This option assigns attributes to the rectangle as well as sets the height and justification for each attribute In this exercise we will add 5 attributes TAG1 DESC1 LOC INST and FAMILY However you are not limited to these 5 attributes and you can inclu...

Page 1237: ...ormat such as CR PB LT 5 In the TAG1 default code dialog box enter PS and click OK Notice that the Component type Schematic Parent or Stand alone dialog box redisplays The TAG1 option is now grayed out since that attribute has been placed for the parent symbol Continue placing the rest of the attributes 6 Select DESC1 Height 0 125 and Justify Center 7 Click Insert Attribute 8 Insert the attribute ...

Page 1238: ...Attribute button These values should both be PS 11 Click Back to Main Menu Add wire connection points 1 Click Wire Connection You can define wire connection points and terminal text for the library symbol The Terminal style configuration dialog box displays 2 Select terminal style 1 Screw This terminal style inserts both the graphic to represent the screw and the wire connection points You have to...

Page 1239: ...match on the last two characters of the TERMxx and the X TERMxx attribute names NOTE The xx in TERMxx is an incrementing number based upon how many terminal attributes have been added Use this dialog box to move the TERM01 text change the text height or justification convert existing text entity to TERM DESC01 or TERM01 attribute and indicate that there shouldn t be a TERM text entity for the wire...

Page 1240: ...umber The Terminal style configuration dialog box redisplays NOTE If you want to add multiple instances you can use the Multiple Insert option This prevents you from having to insert the pins one at a time 1228 Chapter 19 Advanced Productivity ...

Page 1241: ... default value dialog box enter L2 and then click OK Your drawing should look like the following 16 In the Terminal style configuration dialog box click Back to Main Menu The Symbol Builder Schematic Parent or Stand alone symbol dialog box redisplays Notice that the number of connection points that were placed is listed next to the Wire Connection button Finishing the parent symbol The additional ...

Page 1242: ... geometry and text entities at the initial prompt of the Symbol Builder this converts the existing text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes in place Select Convert to AutoCAD Electrical attributes to map your text attributes to the attribute names for the selected symbol type 1 Click Rating Place optional rating attributes on the symbol You can add up to 12 rating attributes Attribute prompt...

Page 1243: ... TAG1 attribute 8 Enter a file name or accept the default and click Save 9 In the Block insertion base point dialog box click OK 10 Specify the insertion point Pick the point in line with the top terminals so that it is easy to later place on a wire 11 When asked to insert an instance of this block now click OK 12 Place the symbol on your drawing If you place the symbol on an existing rung the wir...

Page 1244: ...alog box click Rectangle 6 Draw a square on the drawing Add attributes to symbol 1 In the Symbol Builder Schematic Parent or Stand alone symbol dialog box click Standard The Component type Schematic Terminal dialog box displays listing the AutoCAD Electrical attributes that you can insert for the symbol Once an attribute is inserted on the symbol it is disabled in the Missing attributes list AutoC...

Page 1245: ...the Symbol Builder s WBLOCK option and set to invisible by default 8 Click Back to Main Menu Add wire connection points 1 Click Wire Connection This allows you to define wire connection points and terminal text for the library symbol The Terminal style configuration dialog box displays You have to determine which direction the wire will attach to the component In this exercise wire connection attr...

Page 1246: ...on points that were placed is listed next to the Wire Connection button Finishing the terminal symbol 1 Click WBlock 2 In the New Terminal block name dialog box click No Wire Change AutoCAD Electrical terminals follow a specific naming conven tion The first two characters are HT The third character is a 0 if the wire number does not change through its terminal or it is a 1 if the terminal symbol s...

Page 1247: ...he component tag inserts and the wires connect to the symbol New symbols you create can also be inserted with the AutoCAD Electrical Insert Component or Insert Panel Component com mands You can add your new symbol to the icon menu or you can select it from the Type it or Browse dialog file selection options in the icon menu 9 In the Terminals dialog box click OK 10 Select Wires Insert Wire Numbers...

Page 1248: ...oCAD Electrical attributes that you can insert for the symbol Once an attribute is inserted on the symbol it is disabled in the attribute list AutoCAD Electrical allows only one insertion of each attribute 7 Select TAG1 Height 0 125 and Justify Center 8 Click Pick Text 9 Select the text you want to change to the TAG1 attribute ID in this example The text changes automatically from its original val...

Page 1249: ...he default and click Save 4 In the Block insertion base point dialog box click OK 5 Specify the insertion point Pick the center of the symbol so that it is easy to later place on a wire 6 When asked to insert an instance of this block now click OK 7 Place the symbol on your drawing If you place the symbol on an existing rung the wire breaks the component tag inserts and the wires connect to the sy...

Page 1250: ... the following differences Panel footprint symbols do not have to carry the wire connection attributes that schematic symbols almost always carry There are no parent child versions of a symbol for panel footprint symbols Some of the attribute names are different A panel symbol must have the P_TAG1 or P_TAGSTRIP attribute rather than the TAG1 or TAGSTRIP attribute Panel footprint symbol block namin...

Page 1251: ...ol Below are the minimum attribute requirements for AutoCAD Electrical to recognize a block as a panel footprint The com ponent footprint block must carry a minimum of one of the following 1 In the Panel Symbol Builder dialog box click Standard This option allows you to assign attributes to the rectangle as well as set the height and justification for each attribute There are 7 attributes that sho...

Page 1252: ...Insert Attribute 7 Insert the attribute below P_TAG1 8 Select DESC2 Height 0 125 Justify Center and Visible 9 Click Insert Attribute 10 Insert the attribute below DESC1 11 Insert the LOC INST MFG and CAT attributes in order as indicated below LOC Height 0 01 Justify Center Invisible Insertion point just below DESC2 and to the left INST Height 0 01 Justify Center Invisible Insertion point above LOC...

Page 1253: ...r direction and then place the point on your new symbol Select one of the supplied wire number or terminal styles from the menu You can edit existing terminal styles or create your own Learn more about creating your own terminal symbols in the AutoCAD Electrical Help Convert Text Converts existing text entities to AutoCAD Electrical attributes in the same location as the original text If you windo...

Page 1254: ... Insert Edit dialog box is filled in with the schematic device information such as the tag In stallation code Location code Manufacturer and Catalog Number 9 Click OK Adding attributes using templates If you do not want to use the Symbol Builder to add attributes to the panel footprint you can use an attribute template to automatically add attributes You can have certain attributes added to any fo...

Page 1255: ... into the block it attempts to find the center of the inserted block by collecting and averaging the parts and pieces that make up the block It inserts the attribute definition template at this calculated location Next for each attribute definition in the merged template AutoCAD Electrical checks to see if the original block is already coming in with that particular attribute tag name If there is ...

Page 1256: ...ns two specific IEC type symbols IEC2 and IEC4 The main difference Schematic Libraries between these libraries is the size of the text associ ated with them IEC2 symbols have a text size of 2 5 for the main text items such as Component Tag Install ation Location Component Description and so on IEC4 symbols have a text size of 3 5 for the Component Tag and a text size of 2 7 for Install ation Locat...

Page 1257: ...L1 is interpreted as being associ ated with a different relay coil than relay con tact 100CR marked with location code PNL2 If this setting is not selected both contacts are associated with the same parent relay coil 100CR By selecting this option your compon ent tags are automatically prefixed with the and where applicable Suppress dash when first character of tag Suppresses any single dash chara...

Page 1258: ...on values on components if they match the drawing default values Suppress Installation Location in tag on reports Specifies to exclude Installation and Location values as part of the tag when displayed in re ports Upon insert automatic fill Installation Location with drawing default or last used Fills the In stallation and Location edit boxes on the In sert Edit component dialog box and the attrib...

Page 1259: ...tact in either a graphical or table format If you select the graphical nontable format you can define details of the graphical format by clicking Setup Styles Tab In IEC it is sometimes preferable to display wire connections as tee markers instead of connection Wire Style dots To do this in the Wire Tee section select the appropriate angle tee marker from the list Drawing Format Tab In IEC the mos...

Page 1260: ...stem s origin to be other than the upper left hand corner of the drawing X Zones Similar to X Y Grid but there isn t a Y axis Set your drawing s horizontal labels spacing and origin on the X Zones setup dialog box TIP Use negative zone spacing value if you want the zone reference origin to be at the right side of the drawing Scale for IEC drawings is normally set to mm full size Scale Drawing Prop...

Page 1261: ...ted components such as the PB of tag ID PB101 AutoCAD Electrical searches for this mapping file in the following order 1 User subdirectory C Documents and Settings username Application Data Autodesk AutoCAD Electrical release country code Support User 2 Active project s wdp file subdirectory 3 All paths defined under AutoCAD Options Files Support Files Search Path Depending on how you want to over...

Page 1262: ...les related to that drawing automatically update Perform vault tasks with the Project Manager When working with AutoCAD Electrical and Autodesk Vault you check out projects or individual drawings from a vault location to edit You can perform all vault tasks within the Project Manager when you are logged into the vault You can also manage the relationships between a project file and its dependents ...

Page 1263: ...n a design The status icons indicate the status of your local files as compared to the same files in the vault You can tell when the local copy is in sync with the vault and when it is not The tooltip for each status icon describes the state of the file and suggests the next logical step The status of a local file is updated when it is saved to disk NOTE The vault status icons are only available i...

Page 1264: ... to open and check out the file from the vault 7 To work on more files in the project check out multiple files to the working folder using the Check Out All command in the Project Manager 8 When you finish modifying the files check them back into the vault using the Check In All command in the Project Manager All related files update Best practices for vault commands Below are the suggested workfl...

Page 1265: ...et Latest Version dialog box click OK The most recent versions of the selected files are downloaded from the vault If the working copy of a file is newer than the most recent version of the file in the vault you are prompted to chose either losing changes made to the current working copy or to not get the latest version of that file 4 Click Settings to get the parents and children of the selected ...

Page 1266: ...ween versions of the project file and corresponding drawings Roll back to a previous project version You can roll back to a previous project version using Vault Explorer restoring the project file wdp and all associated drawing and project configuration files to a previous version 1 Close the project and drawings in AutoCAD Electrical 2 Using Vault Explorer examine the wdp file and corresponding d...

Page 1267: ...ld preset a consistent working folder for all project members to use Assign the working folder location to the root level of the vault A shared working folder cannot be assigned to a subfolder NOTE If Inventor add in clients will access the same vault do not enforce a shared working folder If Inventor and AutoCAD Electrical are sharing the same vault the vault administrator cannot enforce the shar...

Page 1268: ...read write by another user 4 You can still check out a file that is opened for read only by another user 5 You can open a file in read only when it is currently checked out to someone else using the same working folder 6 Ensure the drawings are checked back into the vault after you finish working on them so they are available to other users who may need to modify them 1256 Chapter 19 Advanced Prod...

Page 1269: ...AutoCAD Electrical Command In this chapter AutoCAD Electrical Commands 20 1257 ...

Page 1270: ... to Catalog Database page 86 Add Wire Connections page 1150 Adjust In Line Wire Label Gaps page 511 Align page 332 Associate Terminals page 570 Autodesk Inventor Professional Export page 1018 Automatic Report Selection page 993 Bend Wire page 659 Block Replacement page 1154 Break Apart Terminal Associations page 572 Cable Markers page 449 Change Attribute Justification page 424 Change Attribute La...

Page 1271: ...ck to Source Arrow page 1132 Convert Ladder page 483 Convert Text to Attribute Definition page 1131 Convert to Schematic Component page 1129 Copy Add Component Override page 365 Copy Assembly page 1065 Copy Catalog Assignment page 790 Copy Circuit page 385 Copy Component page 308 Copy Footprint page 1061 Copy Function Installation Code page 1062 Copy Group Code page 1062 Copy Level Assignments pag...

Page 1272: ...ies Components page 116 Drawing Properties Cross References page 121 Drawing Properties Drawing Format page 123 Drawing Properties Drawing Settings page 96 Drawing Properties Styles page 114 Drawing Properties Wire Numbers page 493 ECDS to Electrical Database Builder page 1134 ECDS to Electrical Drawing Convert page 1135 Edit Component page 288 Edit Conduit Marker page 1112 Edit Footprint page 104...

Page 1273: ...rs page 506 Fix UnFix Component Tag page 413 Flip Wire Gap page 473 Flip Wire Number page 511 Footprint Database File Editor page 1084 Hide Attribute Single Picks page 410 Hide Attribute Window Multiple page 410 Hide Unhide Cross Referencing page 361 Hide Wire Numbers page 521 Icon Menu Wizard page 734 IEC Tag Mode Update page 89 In Line Wire Labels page 467 Insert 22 5 Degree Wire page 437 Insert...

Page 1274: ... Footprint Catalog List page 1055 Insert Footprint Equipment List page 1057 Insert Footprint Icon Menu page 1036 Insert Footprint Manual page 1045 Insert Footprint Manufacturer Menu page 1058 Insert Footprint Schematic List page 1044 Insert Hydraulic Component page 1167 Insert Ladder page 478 Insert Panel Assembly page 1065 Insert P ID Component page 1172 Insert PLC Full Units page 221 Insert PLC ...

Page 1275: ...ematic page 1144 Link Components with Dashed Lines page 361 Link Description Panel page 1147 Link Description Schematic page 1144 Link Item Number Panel page 1147 Link Installation Code Panel page 1147 Link Installation Code Schematic page 1144 Link Location Code Panel page 1147 Link Location Code Schematic page 1144 Link Manufacturer Panel page 1147 Link Manufacturer Schematic page 1144 Link PLC ...

Page 1276: ...l Sequence Assignments page 932 Modify Symbol Library page 430 Move Circuit page 385 Move Component page 332 Move Connector Pins page 649 Move Show Attribute page 410 Move Wire Number page 511 Multiple Cable Markers page 461 Multiple Insert Icon Menu page 284 Multiple Wire Bus page 436 Panel Bill of Materials Report page 927 Panel Component Report page 930 Panel Component Exception Report page 929...

Page 1277: ... Properties Drawing Settings page 99 Project Properties Styles page 111 Project Properties Wire Numbers page 105 Project Wide Utilities page 509 Project Wide Update Retag page 697 Promis e Conversion page 1125 Publish to Web page 706 Push Description Down page 409 Push Description Up page 409 Rebuild Freshen Project Database page 90 Remove Component Override page 366 Remove Level Sequencing Assign...

Page 1278: ...st page 967 Report Format File Setup Schematic Connector Details page 969 Report Format File Setup Schematic Connector Plug page 971 Report Format File Setup Schematic Connector Summary page 973 Report Format File Setup Schematic Missing Bill of Material page 977 Report Format File Setup Schematic PLC IO Address and Descriptions page 980 Report Format File Setup Schematic PLC I O Component Connect...

Page 1279: ...Connector Details Report page 908 Schematic Connector Plug Report page 909 Schematic Connector Summary Report page 911 Schematic Database File Editor page 349 Schematic Missing Bill of Material Report page 913 Schematic PLC I O Address and Descriptions Report page 915 Schematic PLC I O Component Connection Report page 905 Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far Report page 919 Schematic Terminal Numbers...

Page 1280: ...PLC Module page 335 Split Connector page 335 Spreadsheet to PLC I O Utility page 259 Squeeze Attribute Text page 425 Stretch Attribute Text page 425 Stretch Connector page 643 Stretch PLC Module page 332 Stretch Wire page 439 Surfer page 690 Swap Update Block page 212 Swap Connector Pins page 648 Swap Wire Number page 511 Symbol Builder page 202 Tag Child page 1141 Tag Child Form C page 1141 Tag C...

Page 1281: ...al Mark Internal Connections page 579 Terminal Show Internal External Connections page 579 Terminal List From File page 582 Terminal List Manual Picks page 582 Terminal Properties Database Editor page 631 Terminal Renumber Pick Mode page 578 Terminal Renumber Project Wide page 578 Terminal Strip Editor page 588 Terminal Strip Table Generator page 624 Title Block Setup page 715 Toggle Angled Tee Ma...

Page 1282: ...le page 410 Unhide Wire Numbers page 521 Unity Pro Export page 281 Unity Pro Export to Spreadsheet page 275 User Defined Attribute List page 1006 View Edit Component Sequence page 1095 Wire Annotation Exception Report page 933 Wire Annotation of Panel Footprint page 1077 Wire Arrows for Reference Only page 284 Wire Color Gauge Labels page 442 Wire Conduit Routing Report page 1120 Wire Number Leade...

Page 1283: ...6 assemblies 1064 Assign Wire Numbering Formats by Wire Layers dialog box 504 associate terminals 585 Associate Terminals dialog box 618 associations 568 585 add 568 585 modify 568 585 terminals 568 attributes 134 172 177 192 196 197 199 201 302 337 400 403 409 410 416 418 424 425 431 708 1005 1061 1064 1128 1131 1137 1151 add 431 annotate from external 302 blocks 431 child components 177 child up...

Page 1284: ...ection 991 Automatic Report Selection dialog box 994 B balloons 1087 insert 1087 setup 1087 Batch Plotting Options and Order dialog box 695 Bill of Material Data Fields to Report dialog box 848 bill of materials 298 300 790 793 902 913 1051 1053 copy 790 list 300 792 1053 missing 793 missing report 913 multiple 298 791 1051 schematic report 902 block 431 values 431 block mapping 1151 block propert...

Page 1285: ...ent dialog box 416 Circuit Scale dialog box 395 circuits 384 1214 add custom advanced 1214 copy 384 insert 384 move 384 save 384 save icons 384 scale 384 clean drawings 1176 client subdirectories 83 client specific libraries 83 codes 1061 command trace mode 1176 Commands 1258 Compare Drawing and Project Settings dialog box 130 compare settings 129 Component Annotation dialog box 1129 Component Ann...

Page 1286: ...ncing 1093 report setup 975 retag 413 698 reverse 338 schematic symbols 284 355 389 446 468 1161 1167 1172 sequence 1104 split 330 stretch 330 swap 340 tag 1137 tags 284 wire list report 967 Conduit Marker Data Fields to Display dialog box 817 Conduit Marker Report dialog box 1118 Conduit Marker Setup dialog box 1115 conduit markers 1110 1116 1118 1120 add spares 1110 block 1110 edit 1110 insert 1...

Page 1287: ...35 Copy Active Drawing Settings To dialog box 142 copy codes 1061 copy drawing settings 134 Copy Installation Location ount Group to Components dialog box 1063 Copy Level Assignments dialog box 1096 Copy Project 50 Step 1 Select Existing Project to Copy dialog box 50 COPYTAG 196 Create New Circuit dialog box 741 Create New Drawing dialog box 64 Create New Project dialog box 49 Create New Submenu d...

Page 1288: ...tion markers 536 543 1197 advanced 1197 insert 536 show 543 Din Rail dialog box 348 din rails 344 display configurations 68 dot tee markers 530 Drawing Audit dialog box 1183 drawing files 34 38 52 63 68 82 91 92 96 129 624 700 708 1124 1176 archive 82 changes 91 700 clean 1176 convert 1124 create 38 52 63 display configuration 68 drawing properties 96 group 34 open 38 52 preview 34 process 91 prop...

Page 1289: ...383 explode blocks 1141 export 999 component data 999 general data 999 panel components data 999 panel terminals data 999 plc i o descriptions data 999 plc i o header data 999 plc i o wire connections data 999 spreadsheet data 999 terminals data 999 export I O 267 Export to Spreadsheet dialog box 999 F family overrides 302 fan in out 543 Fan In Fan Out Signal Destination dialog box 549 Fan In Fan ...

Page 1290: ...8 component 938 component exception 938 component wire list 938 connector details 938 connector plug 938 connector summary 938 missing bill of materials 938 missing level sequence assignments 938 nameplate 938 PLC I O address and descriptions 938 PLC I O component connection 938 PLC modules used so far 938 terminal exception 938 terminal numbers 938 terminal plan 938 wire annotation exception 938 ...

Page 1291: ...x 309 311 Insert Edit Component dialog box 288 294 Insert Edit Conduit Wire Way Label dialog box 1112 Insert Edit Panel Level Assignment 1099 1104 Component dialog box 1104 Terminal Strip dialog box 1099 Insert Edit Terminal Symbol dialog box 560 insert edit terminals 559 installation codes 618 internal jumpers 396 define 396 invisible data 1184 J jr project to AutoCAD Electrical 1133 jumper termi...

Page 1292: ...us attributes 197 Missing Bill of Material Data Fields to Report dialog box 874 missing bill of materials report 913 977 setup 977 missing catalog assignments 793 missing level sequence assignments 948 missing level sequence assignments report 932 Modify Line Reference Numbers dialog box 483 Modify Fix Unfix dialog box 508 Module Box Dimensions dialog box 237 Module Layout dialog box 220 Module Sp...

Page 1293: ...024 panel footprints see footprints 1031 panel layers 143 rename 143 panel layout 1022 1026 drawings 1022 1026 toolbar 1022 tools 1022 Panel Layout Component Insert Edit dialog box 1047 Panel Layout Terminal Insert Edit dialog box 1039 Panel Layout Data Export dialog box 1002 Panel Layout List Schematic Components Insert dialog box 325 panel layout symbols 1036 panel layouts 1064 templates 1064 pa...

Page 1294: ...ialog box 306 PINLIST_TYPE 800 pins 284 edit 284 piping instrumentation symbols 1171 PLC 218 221 225 246 251 253 267 525 781 905 965 add modules 225 annotate modules 221 annotate points 246 build symbols 225 change settings 253 copy 225 copy modules 225 database file 225 database file editor 225 database format 253 edit database 225 edit modules 221 generate I O drawings 253 generate modules 218 g...

Page 1295: ...verview 1158 report 1158 Power Source Load Report dialog box 1160 previous 693 Project Database Table Data Project Drawing Files Update dialog box 86 project manager 38 52 Project Manager dialog box 38 52 Project Properties 99 102 106 110 112 496 539 Components tab dialog box 102 Cross References tab dialog box 110 Drawing Format tab dialog box 112 Project Settings dialog box 99 Styles tab dialog ...

Page 1296: ...t dialog box 755 Properties Command dialog box 752 Properties Component dialog box 750 Properties Main Menu dialog box 749 Properties Submenu dialog box 757 Publish to Web Temporary Folder for Build dialog box 707 R ratings 337 annotate 337 Ratings Defaults dialog box 337 Reassign Terminal dialog box 612 Rebuild Database File dialog box 90 records 314 349 351 766 777 1081 add 314 add footprint 108...

Page 1297: ...mat File Setup Schematic PLC Modules Used So Far dialog box 987 Report Format File Setup Schematic Terminal Numbers dialog box 983 Report Format File Setup Schematic Terminal Plan dialog box 985 Report Format File Setup Schematic Wire From To dialog box 979 Report Format File Setup Schematic Wire Label dialog box 989 Report Format File Setup Wire Annotation Exception dialog box 950 report format f...

Page 1298: ...m to 897 wire label 897 Schematic Reports dialog box 897 schematic symbols 284 355 389 446 468 1161 1167 1172 schematic tagging 1141 Schematic Terminals List Panel Layout Insert dialog box 1056 1069 Schematic Wire Numbers Panel Wiring Diagram dialog box 1077 scratch databases 86 script file creation 697 script files 810 Select Description from AutoCAD Electrical Language Table dialog box 304 Selec...

Page 1299: ... Alone Source Cross Reference Symbol dialog box 359 standard description lists 303 Style Box Dimensions dialog box 243 styles 96 536 548 drawing properties 96 536 fan in out 548 project properties 96 536 support files 1193 advanced 1193 surf 688 codes 688 continue a previous surf 688 drawings 688 Surf dialog box 690 swap 209 library 209 update block 209 Swap Block Update Block Library Swap dialog ...

Page 1300: ...inal strip editor 585 cable information 585 catalog code assignment 585 define columns 585 insert accessories 585 insert spares 585 installation codes 585 location codes 585 preview 585 row styles 585 terminal strip 585 wire constraints 585 Terminal Strip Editor 590 595 600 604 Cable Information tab dialog box 600 Catalog Code Assignment tab dialog box 595 Terminal Preview tab dialog box 604 Termi...

Page 1301: ...minal annotation 1095 terminal 408 text conversion 1131 Text Cross Reference Format Setup dialog box 367 text cross references 362 text justification 424 text sizes 425 text styles 425 TEXTVALS 777 Title Block Setup User Defined dialog box 717 724 727 Title Block Setup dialog box 716 723 726 title blocks 83 708 718 724 customize 718 embedded information 718 link 718 map 718 map AutoLISP 724 projec...

Page 1302: ...e pages 705 publishing drawing files 705 WEBLINK assignment 777 What s New 2 26 wire annotation exception 950 wire annotation exception report 933 wire colors 502 encode 502 information 502 Wire Conduit Routing Data Fields to Report dialog box 892 wire connection 579 terminals 579 wire connections 914 979 1074 1077 1150 add 1150 annotations 1077 default 1074 from to report 914 report format files ...

Page 1303: ... box 490 Wire Tagging dialog box 489 wire types 156 edit 156 set 156 Wire Conduit Routing Report dialog box 1120 wires 156 434 435 437 439 440 443 467 473 484 525 541 585 659 660 1074 1077 1176 3 phase bus 435 angled 437 bend 659 cable marker report 443 change type 156 check 1176 color labels 440 colors 440 connection annotations 1077 constraints 585 duplicate 1176 gaps 473 gauge labels 440 in lin...

Page 1304: ...Z zip utility 82 1292 Index ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for 22505-051400-9000 - AutoCAD Electrical 2008

Reviews:

Autodesk 22505-051400-9000 - AutoCAD Electrical 2008, User Manual, Page: 1302 / 1304

Search results

Summary of Contents for 22505-051400-9000 - AutoCAD Electrical 2008

Reviews: